DSR-60 80

DIGITAL VIDEOCASSETTE RECORDER
DSR-80/80P
DIGITAL VIDEOCASSETTE PLAYER
DSR-60/60P
SDI OUTPUT BOARD
DSBK-100
DSBK-100P
QSDI OUTPUT BOARD
DSBK-110
DSBK-110P
SDI INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD
DSBK-120
DSBK-120P
TIME CODE INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD
DSBK-130
DSBK-130P
SERVICE MANUAL
Vol. 1 (1st Edition/Revised 2)
MANUAL STRUCTURE
Purpose of this manual This manual is the Service Manual Vol.1 of the digital videocassette recorder
DSR-80/80P and the digital videocassette player DSR-60/60P and the option board
SDI output board DSBK-100/100P, QSDI output board DSBK-110/110P, SDI input/
output board DSBK-120/120P, time code input/output board DSBK-130/130P.
This manual contains the maintenance information of this equipment, and servicing
information necessary for parts replacement and adjustments.
Related manuals In addition to this Service Manual Vol. 1, the following manuals are provided.
. Operating Instructions (Supplied with equipment)

DSR-60/60P
Parts number : 3-859-820-11 (English, for UC,CE)
3-859-820-21 (French, for UC,CE)
3-859-820-31 (German, for CE)
3-859-820-41 (Italian, for CE)
DSR-80/80P
Parts number : 3-860-358-13 (English, for UC,CE)
3-860-358-23 (French, for UC,CE)
3-860-358-33 (German, for CE)
3-860-358-43 (Italian, for CE)
Explains how to operate this equipment.
. Service Manual Vol.2 (Not supplied with equipment)

Parts number : 9-977-696-22
Contains the block diagrams, board layouts, schematic diagrams, semiconductor pin
assingments and parts lists.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 1
Contents The sections covered in the manual are summarized below to give you a general
understanding of the manual.
SECTION 1 OPERATING INSTRUCTION

Describes the contents of the operating instructions.
SECTION 2 INSTALLATION
Contains rack mount information necessary for installation of the equipment, the
connector information necessary for connectiing the unit with peripherals and others.
SECTION 3 SERVICE OVERVIEW

Describes the replacement of the parts, the locations of the main parts and boards,
error code, notes and so on.
SECTION 4 MAINTENANCE MENU

Describes the maintenance menu.
SECTION 5 PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Describes the periodic inspection and cleaning procedure.
SECTION 6 REPLACEMENT OF MECHANICAL PARTS

Describes the replacement procedures and adjustment after replacement.
SECTION 7 TAPE PATH ALIGNMENT

Describes the adjustment procedures of tape path system.
SECTION 8 ELECTRICAL ALIGNMENT OVERVIEW

Describes the general information for electrical adjustments.
SECTION 9 (This section is intentionally left blank.)
SECTION 10 ELECTRICAL ALIGNMENT

Describes the electrical adjustment of each board.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
The DSR-60/60P manual will be available as a supplement shortly.
2. INSTALLATION
2-1. Installation Procedure ..................................................................................... 2-1

2-2. Operational Environment ............................................................................... 2-1
2-3. Operating Voltage .......................................................................................... 2-1
2-4. Installation Space ........................................................................................... 2-2
2-5. Supplied Accessories ...................................................................................... 2-2
2-6. Optional Accessories ...................................................................................... 2-2
2-7. Rack Mounting ............................................................................................... 2-3
2-8. Connection of Editing Equipment,
and Input/Output Signals of Connectors ........................................................ 2-5
2-8-1. Connection of Editing Equipment .......................................................... 2-5
2-8-2. Matching Connectors .............................................................................. 2-9
2-8-3. Input/Output Signals of the Connectors ............................................... 2-10
2-9. Installation Setup and Adjustment ............................................................... 2-13
2-9-1. Switch Settings on the Connector Panel ............................................... 2-13
2-9-2. Setting on the Front Panel Unit ............................................................ 2-13
2-9-3. On-board Switch Setting ...................................................................... 2-14
2-9-4. System Adjustment After Installation .................................................. 2-16
2-9-5. Connection of Editor Controller ........................................................... 2-16
2-10. Setup Check Sheets ...................................................................................... 2-18
3. SERVICE OVERVIEW
3-1. Location of Main Parts ................................................................................... 3-1

3-1-1. Location of Printed Circuit Boards ......................................................... 3-1
3-1-2. Location of Main Mechanical Parts ....................................................... 3-2
3-1-3. Location of Sensors (1) .......................................................................... 3-4
Location of Sensors (2) .......................................................................... 3-5
3-2. Functions of Record Proof Hole and Record Proof Plug of Cassette ............ 3-6
3-3. Error Messages ............................................................................................... 3-7
3-3-1. Alarm Display ........................................................................................ 3-7
3-3-2. Error Codes ............................................................................................. 3-9
3-4. Removal and Attachment of the Cabinet ..................................................... 3-22
3-5. Removal and Attachemt of the Cassette Compartment ................................ 3-23
3-6. Removal of the Switching Regulator DSR-60/60P ........................................ 3-24
3-6. Removal of the Switching Regulator DSR-80/80P ........................................ 3-25
3-7. Replacement of the Fuse .............................................................................. 3-26
3-8. Extension Board ........................................................................................... 3-26
3-9. Removal and Attachment of the Boards ....................................................... 3-27
3-9-1. Removal of the Card Boards ................................................................ 3-27
3-9-2. Removal of the CP-276B Board DSR-60/60P ................................... 3-28
3-9-2. Removal of the CP-276A Board DSR-80/80P ................................... 3-29
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 1
3-9-3. Removal of the CP-281B/C Board DSR-60/60P ................................... 3-30
3-9-3. Removal of the CP-281 Board DSR-80/80P ................................... 3-31
3-9-4. Removal of the KY-336B Board DSR-60/60P ................................... 3-32
3-9-4. Removal of the KY-336 Board DSR-80/80P ................................... 3-33
3-9-5. Removal of the HP-73 Board ............................................................... 3-34

3-9-6. Removal and Attachment of the FP-75 Board ..................................... 3-35
3-10. Eject Procedure of a Cassette Tape
when There is Tape Slack (Manual Eject) ................................................... 3-36
3-11. Head Cleaning when Head Clogging Occurs ............................................... 3-38
3-12. Operating the VTR without a Cassette Tape ................................................ 3-38
3-13. Notes on Spare Parts ..................................................................................... 3-40
3-13-1. Notes on Spare Parts ............................................................................. 3-40
3-13-2. Replacement Procedure for Chip Parts ................................................. 3-40
3-13-3. Replacement of the Flexible Card Wire ............................................... 3-41
3-14. Tools for Adjustment .................................................................................... 3-42
3-15. Safety Check-Out (UC model only) ............................................................. 3-44
4. MAINTENANCE MENU
4-1. How to Operate Maintenance Menu .............................................................. 4-3

4-2. Menu Data Control ......................................................................................... 4-4
4-3. Edit Check ...................................................................................................... 4-7
4-4. Servo Check ................................................................................................... 4-9
4-5. Servo Adjust ................................................................................................. 4-23
4-6. Electrical Adjustment ................................................................................... 4-32
4-7. Service Support ............................................................................................ 4-42
4-8. Others ........................................................................................................... 4-44
5. PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
5-1. Hours Meter .................................................................................................... 5-1

5-1-1. Displaying Hours Meter Information ..................................................... 5-2
5-1-2. How to Reset Hours Meter ..................................................................... 5-3
5-2. Maintenance upon Completion of Repair ...................................................... 5-4
5-2-1. Video Head Cleaning Procedure ............................................................ 5-4
5-2-2. Tape Running Path Cleaning .................................................................. 5-4
5-2-3. Cassette Compartment Entrance Cleaning ............................................. 5-4
5-3. Periodic Inspection List .................................................................................. 5-5
6. REPLACEMENT OF MECHANICAL PARTS
6-1. General Information for Part Replacement and Adjustment .......................... 6-1
6-1-1. Preparation Before Starting Part Replacement ....................................... 6-1
6-1-2. Head Cleaner and Drum Assembly ........................................................ 6-2
6-1-3. Oil and Grease ........................................................................................ 6-2
6-2. Drum Assembly Replacement ........................................................................ 6-3
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
2
6-3. Reel Table Replacement ................................................................................. 6-5
6-3-1. Checking and Adjusting the Reel Table Height ..................................... 6-6
6-4. Brake assembly (Supply and Takeup) Replacement ...................................... 6-8
6-4-1. Brake Torque Adjustment and Check (Supply) ..................................... 6-9
6-4-2. Brake Torque Adjustment and Check (Takeup) ................................... 6-10
6-4-3. Reel Brake Release Check and Adjustment ......................................... 6-11
6-5. Reel Rotation Sensor Replacement .............................................................. 6-12
6-6. Reel Block Assembly Replacement ............................................................. 6-13
6-7. Reel Motor Replacement .............................................................................. 6-15
6-8. Brake Solenoid Replacement ....................................................................... 6-16
6-9. Capstan Motor Replacement ........................................................................ 6-17
6-10. Pinch Pressure Assembly Replacement and Adjustment ............................. 6-18
6-11. Pinch Solenoid Replacement ........................................................................ 6-19
6-12. Gear Box Motor Replacement ...................................................................... 6-21
6-13. Worm Gear Replacement (Gear Box) .......................................................... 6-22
6-14. Gear Box Motor Rotation Sensor Replacement ........................................... 6-23
6-15. Pinch Roller Arm Assembly Replacement ................................................... 6-24
6-16. Preseding Roller (TG-7) Assembly Replacement ........................................ 6-25
6-17. Threading Ring Assembly Replacement ...................................................... 6-26
6-18. Ring Roller Replacement ............................................................................. 6-27
6-19. Ring Position Sensor Replacement .............................................................. 6-28
6-20. RS Motor Assembly Replacement ............................................................... 6-29
6-21. Worm Gear (Reel Shift) Replacement ......................................................... 6-30
6-22. Reel Position Sensor Replacement ............................................................... 6-32
6-23. S Arm Assembly Replacement ..................................................................... 6-34
6-23-1. FWD/REV Back Tension Adjustment ................................................. 6-35
6-24. Guide Roller Assembly (TG-1) Replacement .............................................. 6-38
6-26. TR Roller Assembly (TG-3) Replacement ................................................... 6-40
6-28. Cassette Memory Terminal Replacement .................................................... 6-42
6-29. Head Cleaner Assembly Replacement ......................................................... 6-43
6-30. Fan Motor Replacement ............................................................................... 6-45
7. TAPE PATH ADJUSTMENT
7-1. General Information for Tape Path Adjustment ............................................. 7-1

7-2. Tape Path Check ............................................................................................. 7-5
7-3. Tape Path Adjustment
(Checking Amout of Tape Contract with Top Flanges at Exit Side) ............. 7-7
(Checking Amount of Tape Contact with Top Flanges at Entrance Side) ..... 7-8
(Tape Path fine Adjustments at Entrance and Exit Sides) ............................ 7-10
7-6. RF Switching Position Adjustment .............................................................. 7-12
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3
8. ELECTRICAL ALIGNMENT OVERVIEW (for NTSC)
8-1. Adjustment Parts (for NTSC) .................................................................. 8-1 (N)

8-2. Measuring Equipment for Adjustment (for NTSC) ................................ 8-3 (N)
8-3. Reference Tape for Alignment (for NTSC) ............................................ 8-3 (N)
8-4. Maintenance Menu (for NTSC) .............................................................. 8-4 (N)
8. ELECTRICAL ALIGNMENT OVERVIEW (for PAL)
8-1. Adjustment Parts (for PAL) ..................................................................... 8-1 (P)

8-2. Measuring Equipment for Adjustment (for PAL) .................................... 8-3 (P)
8-3. Reference Tape for Alignment (for PAL) ................................................ 8-3 (P)
8-4. Maintenance Menu (for PAL) .................................................................. 8-4 (P)
9. (Blank)
10. ELECTRICAL ALIGNMENT (for NTSC)
10-1. System Adjustment (for NTSC) ............................................................ 10-1 (N)

10-1-1. Character Position Adjustment ...................................................... 10-1 (N)
10-1-2. SPCK Error Adjustment ................................................................ 10-1 (N)
10-2. Servo Adjustment (for NTSC) .............................................................. 10-2 (N)
10-3. Audio Adjustment (for NTSC) .............................................................. 10-2 (N)
10-3-1. Output Level Adjustment .............................................................. 10-2 (N)
10-4. RF ADJUSTMENT (for NTSC) ........................................................... 10-2 (N)
10-5. VIDEO ALIGNMENT (for NTSC) ...................................................... 10-3 (N)
10-5-1. Recorder/Player Adjustment ......................................................... 10-5 (N)
10-5-1-1. INT SC Frequency Adjustment .......................................... 10-5 (N)
10-5-1-2. HCK Adjustment ................................................................ 10-5 (N)
10-5-1-3. COMPONENT Y OUT Level Adjustment ........................ 10-6 (N)
10-5-1-4. COMPONENT B-Y OUT Level Adjustment .................... 10-6 (N)
10-5-1-5. COMPONENT R-Y OUT Level Adjustment .................... 10-7 (N)
10-5-1-6. Setup off Chroma Level Adjustment ................................. 10-7 (N)
10-5-1-7. S-VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment ................................. 10-8 (N)
10-5-1-8. VIDEO OUT 1 Y/SYNC Level Adjustment ...................... 10-8 (N)
10-5-1-9. VIDEO OUT 2 Y Level Adjustment ................................. 10-9 (N)
10-5-1-10. ENC SC Leak Adjustment ............................................... 10-10 (N)
10-5-1-11. U-V Axis Phase (B-Y, R-Y Phase) Adjustment .............. 10-11 (N)
10-5-1-12. PB VIDEO OUT 1 C Level Adjustment .......................... 10-12 (N)
10-5-1-13. PB S-VIDEO C Level Adjustment .................................. 10-13 (N)
10-5-1-14. PB Composite C/C Delay Adjustment ............................. 10-13 (N)
10-5-1-15. PB Composite Y/C Delay Adjustment ............................. 10-14 (N)
10-5-1-16. PB Component Y/C Delay Adjustment ........................... 10-15 (N)
10-5-1-17. PB INT SCH Phase Adjustment ...................................... 10-16 (N)
10-5-1-18. REF. CF Phase Adjustment .............................................. 10-17 (N)
10-5-1-19. REF. Internal SCH Adjustment ........................................ 10-19 (N)
10-5-1-20. REF. VIDEO OUT SYNC/Burst Level Adjustment ........ 10-19 (N)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4
10-5-1-21. PB G Balance/Level Adjustment ..................................... 10-20 (N)
10-5-1-22. PB G DC Adjustment ....................................................... 10-21 (N)
10-5-1-23. PB B Balance/Level Adjustment ..................................... 10-22 (N)
10-5-1-24. PB B DC Adjustment ....................................................... 10-23 (N)
10-5-1-25. PB R Balance/Level Adjustment ...................................... 10-24 (N)
10-5-1-26. PB R DC Adjustment ....................................................... 10-25 (N)
10-5-2. Recorder Adjustment (for NTSC) ............................................... 10-26 (N)
10-5-2-1. Composite 4Fsc Lock Loop DC Adjustment ................... 10-26 (N)
10-5-2-2. REC Y Clamp Level Adjustment ..................................... 10-27 (N)
10-5-2-3. REC Y Level Adjustment ................................................ 10-28 (N)
10-5-2-4. REC Component R-Y Level Adjustment ......................... 10-29 (N)
10-5-2-5. REC Component B-Y Level Adjustment ......................... 10-29 (N)
10-5-2-6. REC A/D Y Level Adjustment ........................................ 10-30 (N)
10-5-2-7. REC Composite Y Level Adjustment .............................. 10-31 (N)
10-5-2-8. REC Composite C Level Adjustment .............................. 10-32 (N)
10-5-2-9. REC RGB Level Adjustment ........................................... 10-33 (N)
10-5-2-10. REC Composite Y/C Delay Adjustment .......................... 10-34 (N)
10-5-2-11. REC Component Y/C Delay Adjustment ........................ 10-35 (N)
10-5-2-12. REC S-VIDEO Y/C Delay Adjustment ........................... 10-36 (N)
10-5-2-13. REC RGB Delay Adjustment........................................... 10-37 (N)
10-5-2-14. Composite SCH Detect Adjustment................................. 10-38 (N)
10-5-2-15. RGB OUT G Phase Adjustment ...................................... 10-39 (N)
10. ELECTRICAL ALIGNMENT (for PAL)
10-1.System Adjustment (for PAL) ................................................................ 10-1 (P)

10-1-1. Character Position Adjustment ....................................................... 10-1 (P)
10-1-2. SPCK Error Adjustment ................................................................. 10-1 (P)
10-2. Servo Adjustment (for PAL) .................................................................. 10-2 (P)
10-3. Audio Adjustment (for PAL) ................................................................. 10-2 (P)
10-3-1. Output Level Adjustment ............................................................... 10-2 (P)
10-4. RF Adjustment (for PAL) ....................................................................... 10-2 (P)
10-5. Video Alignment (for PAL) ................................................................... 10-3 (P)
10-5-1. Recorder/Player Adjustment .......................................................... 10-5 (P)
10-5-1-1. INT SC Frequency Adjustment ........................................... 10-5 (P)
10-5-1-2. HCK Adjustment ................................................................. 10-5 (P)
10-5-1-3. COMPONENT Y OUT Level Adjustment ......................... 10-6 (P)
10-5-1-4. COMPONENT B-Y OUT Level Adjustment ..................... 10-6 (P)
10-5-1-5. COMPONENT R-Y OUT Level Adjustment ..................... 10-7 (P)
10-5-1-6. S-VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment .................................. 10-7 (P)
10-5-1-7. VIDEO OUT 1 Y/SYNC Level Adjustment ....................... 10-8 (P)
10-5-1-8. VIDEO OUT 2 Y Level Adjustment .................................. 10-8 (P)
10-5-1-9. ENC SC Leak Adjustment .................................................. 10-9 (P)
10-5-1-10. U-V Axis Phase (B-Y, R-Y Phase) Adjustment ............... 10-10 (P)
10-5-1-11. VIDEO OUT 1 C/Burst Level Adjustment ....................... 10-11 (P)
10-5-1-12 PB S-VIDEO C Level Adjustment ................................... 10-12 (P)
10-5-1-13. PB Composite C/C Delay Adjustment .............................. 10-12 (P)
10-5-1-14. PB Composite Y/C Delay Adjustment .............................. 10-13 (P)
10-5-1-15. PB Component Y/C Delay Adjustment ............................ 10-14 (P)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 5
10-5-1-16. PB INT SCH Phase Adjustment ....................................... 10-15 (P)
10-5-1-17. REF. CF Phase Adjustment ............................................... 10-16 (P)
10-5-1-18. REF. Internal SCH Adjustment ......................................... 10-18 (P)
10-5-1-19. REF. VIDEO OUT SYNC/Burst Level Adjustment ......... 10-18 (P)
10-5-1-20. PB G Balance/Level Adjustment ...................................... 10-19 (P)
10-5-1-21. PB G DC Adjustment ........................................................ 10-20 (P)
10-5-1-22. PB B Balance/Level Adjustment ...................................... 10-21 (P)
10-5-1-23. PB B DC Adjustment ........................................................ 10-22 (P)
10-5-1-24. PB R Balance/Level Adjustment ...................................... 10-23 (P)
10-5-1-25. PB R DC Adjustment ........................................................ 10-24 (P)
10-5-2. Recorder Adjustment (for PAL) ................................................... 10-25 (P)
10-5-2-1. Composite 4Fsc PLL DC Adjustment ............................... 10-25 (P)
10-5-2-2. REC Y Clamp Level Adjustment ...................................... 10-26 (P)
10-5-2-3. REC Y Level Adjustment ................................................. 10-27 (P)
10-5-2-4. REC Component R-Y Level Adjustment .......................... 10-28 (P)
10-5-2-5. REC Component B-Y Level Adjustment .......................... 10-28 (P)
10-5-2-6. REC A/D Y Level Adjustment ......................................... 10-29 (P)
10-5-2-7. REC Composite Y Level Adjustment ............................... 10-30 (P)
10-5-2-8. REC Composite C Level Adjustment ............................... 10-31 (P)
10-5-2-9. REC RGB Level Adjustment ............................................ 10-32 (P)
10-5-2-10. REC Composite Y/C Delay Adjustment ........................... 10-33 (P)
10-5-2-11. REC Component Y/C Delay Adjustment ......................... 10-34 (P)
10-5-2-12. REC S-VIDEO Y/C Delay Adjustment ............................ 10-35 (P)
10-5-2-13. REC RGB Delay Adjustment ............................................ 10-36 (P)
10-5-2-14. Composite SCH Detect Circuit Adjustment ..................... 10-37 (P)
10-5-2-15. RGB OUT G Phase Adjustment ....................................... 10-38 (P)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-860-358-13(1)
Digital
Videocassette
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Recorder
SECTION 1
Operating Instructions
Before operating the unit, please read this manual
thoroughly and retain it for future reference.
from operation manual.

This section is extracted
DSR-80/80P
 1997 by Sony Corporation
1-1
1-2
Table of Contents
Owner’s Record For the customers in the USA

Chapter 1
The model and serial numbers are located at the rear. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
Record the serial number in the space provided below. limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the Overview Features ............................................................................. 5
Refer to these numbers whenever you call upon your Sony FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment
Location and Function of Parts ....................................... 8
dealer regarding this product.
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment Front Panel .......................................................................... 8
Model No. DSR-80 Serial No. generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the Rear Panel ......................................................................... 14
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential Chapter 2
WARNING area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expense. Recording and Recording ........................................................................ 19
expose the unit to rain or moisture. Playback Settings for Recording ....................................................... 19
You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not
expressly approved in this manual could void your authority Usable Cassettes ................................................................ 22
to operate this equipment.
Recording Procedure ......................................................... 24
This device requires shielded interface cables to comply with Playback ........................................................................... 28
FCC emission limits.
Settings for Playback ......................................................... 28
Playback Procedure ........................................................... 29
Caution
Television programs, films, video tapes and other materials
may be copyrighted. Chapter 3
Unauthorized recording of such material may be contrary to
the provisions of the copyright laws. Setting the Time Data ...................................................... 31
Convenient
Functions for Displaying Time Data and Operation Mode Indications ... 31
Voor de klanten in Nederland
Editing Operation Using the Internal Time Code Generator .......................... 33
Bij dit produkt zijn batterijen geleverd. Synchronizing Internal and External Time Codes ............. 34
This symbol is intended to alert the user to the Wanneer deze leeg zijn, moet u ze niet
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” weggooien maar inleveren als KCA. Rerecording the Time Code — TC Insert Function .......... 35
within the product’s enclosure that may be of
High-Speed and Low-Speed Search: Quickly and
sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons. Accurately Determining Editing Points ................ 37
Search Operations via External Equipment ...................... 37
This symbol is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and Search Operations on This Unit ........................................ 37
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance. Dubbing Signals in QSDI Format — QSDI Dubbing
Function ................................................................... 38
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
2 Table of Contents 3
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Table of Contents Features
Chapter 1 Overview
The DSR-80/80P is a 1/4-inch digital video cassette Wide track pitch
Chapter 4
recorder that uses the DVCAM digital recording
format. This system achieves stable, superb picture The recording track pitch is 15 µm, fully 50 percent
Menu Settings Menu Organization .......................................................... 41
quality by digitally processing video signals that are wider than the DV format’s 10-µm track pitch. Thanks
Menu Contents ................................................................ 42 separated into color difference signals and luminance to this feature, the DVCAM format sufficiently meets
Chapter 1 Overview
SETUP menu ..................................................................... 42 signals (component method). the reliability and precision requirements of
The DSR-80/80P unit is equipped with the variety of professional editing.
Changing Menu Settings ................................................ 51
functions that are needed for videocassette recorders
Buttons Used to Change Settings ...................................... 51 and players used in professional digital video editing
Changing the Settings of Basic Items ............................... 51 systems. It supports the ClipLink™ function High-quality PCM digital audio
developed by Sony Corporation for highly efficient
Displaying Enhanced Items ............................................... 53 video editing. When connected to a Sony PCM recording makes for a wide dynamic range and a
Changing the Settings of Enhanced Items......................... 53 EditStation™, the unit serves as part of a powerful high signal-to-noise ratio, thereby enhancing sound
Returning Menu Settings to Their Factory non-linear editing system1). quality.
The unit is also equipped with a full-fledged analog There are two recording modes: 2-channel mode (48-
Defaults ........................................................................ 54
interface to support hybrid systems that combine kHz sampling and 16-bit quantization), which offers
Displaying Supplementary Status Information ............ 55 conventional analog equipment with digital equipment. sound quality equivalent to the DAT (Digital Audio
Tape) format, or 4-channel mode (32-kHz sampling
Chapter 5 The DSR-80/80P’s main features are described below. and 12-bit quantization).
Connections and Connections for a Digital Non-Linear Editing

System ..................................................................... 57 Playback compatibility with DV format
Settings DVCAM Format
Connections for a Cut Editing System .......................... 58 A DV cassette recorded on a DV-format VCR can be
Connections for an A/B Roll Editing System ............... 59 DVCAM is based on the consumer DV format, which played back on this unit. (Cassettes recorded in LP
uses the 4:1:1 component digital format, and provides mode cannot be played back.)
Connections for QSDI Dubbing ..................................... 64 a 1/4-inch digital recording format for professional use.
Connections for Analog Recording ............................... 65
Adjusting the Sync and Subcarrier Phases .................. 66 Choice of two cassette sizes
High picture quality, high stability
The unit can use both standard-size and mini-size
Chapter 6 Video signals are separated into color difference DVCAM cassettes.
signals and luminance signals, which are encoded and • According to cassette size, it automatically changes
Maintenance and Maintenance .................................................................... 69 compressed to one-fifth size before being recorded to the position of the reel drive plate.
Troubleshooting Condensation ..................................................................... 69 ensure stable and superb picture quality. • The maximum recording/playback times are 184
Regular Checks ................................................................. 69 Because the recording is digital, multi-generation minutes for standard size cassettes and 40 minutes for
dubbing can be performed with virtually no mini-size cassettes.
Head Cleaning ................................................................... 70 deterioration of quality.
Troubleshooting .............................................................. 71
Error Messages .................................................................. 73
Alarm Messages ................................................................ 73
Appendix
........................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notes on Use ................................................................... 77
1) Non-linear editing
Specifications .................................................................. 78 This is an editing method that uses video and audio
signals that have been digitally encoded and recorded on
Glossary ........................................................................... 81 a hard disk as digital data. When compared with
conventional (linear) editing methods, non-linear editing
offers vastly improved efficiency in editing operations,
Index ................................................................................. 83 such as by eliminating tape transport time.
4 5
1-3
Table of Contents Chapter 1 Overview

1-4
Features
A Wealth of Interfaces Supports ClipLink function Digital slow-motion playback Easy maintenance functions
In response to commands sent from the EditStation, Using the frame memory function, the unit can show • Self-diagnostic/alarm function : This function
index pictures that are recorded on tape or ClipLink noise-free slow-motion playback at speeds ranging automatically detects setup and connection errors,
Digital interfaces from 0 to 1/5 normal in both directions. Frame-by-
log data that is recorded in the cassette memory can be operation faults, and other problems. It also displays
The unit provides the following two digital interfaces. transferred to the EditStation. The EditStation frame or field-by-field playback of still pictures is also a description of the problem, its cause, and the
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
• SDTI (QSDI)1) : This interface enables SDTI (QSDI)- operator can then efficiently use these pictures and possible. recommended response on the video monitor screen
format video, audio and time code signals to be data in a preliminary editing session. or time counter display.
transferred between this unit and the Sony EditStation • Digital hours meter : The unit’s digital hours meter
at normal speed. For more information about the ClipLink function, refer to Jog audio function functions include four kinds of tally operations for
• AES/EBU interface : This interface enables AES/ the “ClipLink Guide” also supplied with this unit. operating hours, head drum usage hours, tape
When in jog mode, audio can be monitored at
EBU-format digital audio signals to be input and playback speeds ranging from normal to 1/30 normal in transport hours, and tape threading/unthreading times.
output. both directions. The audio signals are once stored in The tally results can be viewed on the video monitor
As an option, you can also use the SDI (Serial Digital
Internal time code generator/reader or the time counter display.
memory and then played back at the same rate as the
Interface) as an interface for D1 (component) format The unit contains a time code generator/reader which search speed. This allows you to use audio playback
digital video and audio signals. can generate and read longitudinal time code (LTC) in to find the desired edit points.
the SMPTE format (DSR-80) or EBU format (DSR- Rack mountable
80P), to ensure frame-accurate editing. When you use the optional RMM-130 Rack Mount
Analog interfaces When the unit is equipped with an optional DSBK- Built-in TBC (Time Base Corrector) Kit, you can mount this unit onto an EIA-standard 19-
The unit also comes with analog interfaces enabling it 130/130P Time Code Input/Output Board, it can inch rack (height = 4 units).
A digital TBC is built in to ensure jitter-free video
to be connected to analog video and audio equipment. output the time code read from tape as analog (LTC)
output during analog editing.
• Analog video : These interfaces include a component signal, and receive externally generated time code
interface (can be switched to RGB), composite (LTC).
interface, and S-video interface.
Optional Accessories
• Analog audio : 4-channel input and 4-channel output Other Features
Remote control
are both provided. DSBK-120/120P SDI (Serial Digital
The unit can be operated by remote control from an
Menu system for functionality and Interface) Input/Output Board
editing controller that supports the RS-422A interface
or from on optional SIRCS2)-system remote controller operation settings When installed in the DSR-80/80P, this board enables
Facilities for High-efficiency such as the DSRM-10 or SVRM-100A. digital video and audio signals in the D1 format to be
The unit provides a menu system to make its various
Editing functions easier to use and set up its operation input to and output from the unit.
conditions.
The unit provides an abundance of functions that High-speed search function
enhance editing efficiency and precision. DSBK-130/130P Time Code Input/Output
The unit has a picture search function that allows you
to view color picture at playback speeds up to 32 times Superimposition function Board
normal speed in forward and reverse directions. Time code numbers, operation mode indications, When installed in the DSR-80/80P, this board enables
When remote-controlling this unit in shuttle mode menus, error messages, and other text data can be SMPTE or EBU-format time code (LTC) to be input to
from an editing controller or a remote controller, you superimposed and output in analog composite video and output from the unit.
can search at any speed in the range 0 (still) to 32 signals.
times normal in both directions. You can also search
frame-by-frame in jog mode. RMM-130 Rack Mount Kit
At search speeds up to 5 times normal, you can also This kit can be used to mount the DSR-80/80P onto an
hear playback audio. EIA-standard 19-inch rack.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) QSDI is a type of SDTI. In indicator and menu indications, however, the
SDTI is the name of a standard interface established as “SDTI(QSDI)” name is shortened to “QSDI”.
SMPTE 305M. In the remainder of this manual, the short form (“QSDI”)
This unit uses SDTI to transmit DV data, and the input/ is used.
output connectors are labeled “SDTI(QSDI)”. 2) SIRCS (Sony Integrated Remote Control System)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
A command protocol to remote control Sony

professional videocassette recorders/players.
6 Chapter 1 Overview Chapter 1 Overview 7

DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Location
Features and Function of Parts
Front Panel 1 Display section (A) and video/audio input setting section
1 Audio level meter
1 Display section (A) and 2 AUDIO MODE display

Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
video/audio input setting
section (see page 9) 3 INPUT MODE display
2 Display section (B) and

AUDIO MODE INPUT MODE
1 Cassette compartment COUNTER SELECT button OVER dB
0
OVER dB
0
OVER dB
0
OVER dB
0
(see page 11) AUDIO
VIDEO
CH-1,1/2 CH-2,3/4
2 REMOTE/LOCAL switch -12 -12 -12 -12
2CH Fs48k COMPOSITE ANALOG ANALOG
-20 -20 -20 -20
S VIDEO QSDI
-30 -30 -30 -30 Fs44.1k
-40 -40 -40 -40 COMPONENT AES/EBU AES/EBU
3 POWER switch -60 -60 -60 -60 4CH Fs32k SDI SDI SDI
CH-1 CH-2 CH-3 CH-4
4 HEADPHONES control knob AUDIO INPUT LEVEL AUDIO REC INPUT SELECT
CH-1 CH-2 CH-3 CH-4 SELECT
4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 VIDEO AUDIO QSDI
5 HEADPHONES connector 6 0 ) p r 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8
2CH/4CH CH-1 CH-2
0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 CH-1/2 CH-3/4
6 CONTROL S connector
4 INPUT SELECT buttons
5 AUDIO REC SELECT button

3 Tape transport control 6 AUDIO INPUT LEVEL control
section (see page 12) knobs
4 Menu control panel

(inside of the door) 1 Audio level meter [2CH] and [Fs48k] indicators : Light during
(see page 13)
Indicates the recording level during recording or EE playback of a tape recorded in two-channel mode
mode1) and the playback level during playback. When (48 kHz), or during two-channel mode (48 kHz)
the audio level exceeds 0 dB, the OVER indicator recording.
1 Cassette compartment 3 POWER switch lights. [2CH] and [Fs44.1k] indicators : Light during
Accepts standard-size or mini-size DVCAM digital Press on the “1” side to power on the unit. This causes The short bars to the left of some level indication bars playback of a tape recorded in two-channel mode
videocassettes. When using a mini-size cassette, insert the audio level meter and time counter display to light. indicate that those levels are reference audio recording (44.1 kHz).
it into the middle of the compartment. Press on the “¬” side to power off the unit. levels. [4CH] and [Fs32k] indicators : Light during
playback of a tape recorded in four-channel mode
For details of usable cassettes, see page 22. 4 HEADPHONES control knob 2 AUDIO MODE display (32 kHz), or during four-channel mode (32 kHz)
Controls the volume of the headphones connected to Indicates the audio mode during playback or recording recording.
2 REMOTE/LOCAL switch the HEADPHONES connector. or while in EE mode.
Selects whether the unit is operated from its front • During playback it indicates the audio mode in which
panel or from external (remote) equipment. 5 HEADPHONES connector (stereo phone jack) the tape was recorded.
REMOTE : The unit is operated from an editing Connect a stereo headphones for headphone • During recording or while in EE mode, it indicates
controller connected to the REMOTE connector monitoring during recording or playback. the currently selected audio recording mode. The
on the rear panel. The audio signal you want to monitor can be selected AUDIO REC SELECT button is used for audio
LOCAL : The unit is operated from its front panel or with the MONITOR SELECT switches on the menu recording mode selection.
from a SIRCS-system remote controller connected control panel 4. ........................................................................................................................................................................................................
to the CONTROL S connector on the front panel.
1) EE mode
6 CONTROL S connector (stereo minijack)
“EE” stands for “Electric to Electric”. When in this
Connect a SIRCS-system remote controller such as the mode, the video and audio signals that are input to the
DSRM-10 or SVRM-100A. VCR’s recording circuitry do not pass through any
magnetic conversion circuits but instead are output via
electric circuits only. This mode is used to check input
signals and adjust input levels.
8 9
1-5
Chapter 1 Overview Chapter 1 Overview

1-6

Location
3 INPUT MODE display If the selected signal (except for analog audio) is not 2 Display section (B) and COUNTER SELECT button
Indicates the format of the currently selected video and supplied to the appropriate connector, the
audio input signals. corresponding indicator flashes in the INPUT MODE
VIDEO indicators : The corresponding indicator display. 1 COUNTER SELECT button
lights when the selected video input signal is in If the unit is not equipped with an optional DSBK-120/
2 Time data type indicators
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
the composite analog, S-video, component analog, 120P SDI Input/Output Board, no SDI indicators light
or SDI (serial digital interface) format. in the INPUT MODE display no matter how many 3 Time counter display
AUDIO CH-1, 1/2 indicators : The ANALOG, times you press the INPUT SELECT buttons.
AES/EBU or SDI indicator lights for the
corresponding format of the selected audio signal 5 AUDIO REC (recording mode) SELECT button
being input to channel 1 (when in 2-channel Selects the audio mode for recording. Each press 4 Tape end alarm indicator
COUNTER
mode) or to channels 1 and 2 (when in 4-channel toggles between 2-channel mode and 4-channel mode, TC
U-BIT
mode). and the indicator corresponding to the selected option REC INHIBIT 5 REC INHIBIT indicator
HOURS MINUTES SECONDS FRAMES
AUDIO CH-2, 3/4 indicators: The ANALOG, lights in the AUDIO MODE display. REMOTE EDIT MODE CIip Link NOT
6 NOT EDITABLE indicator
EDITABLE
AES/EBU, or SDI indicator lights for the
corresponding format of the selected audio signal Note 7 Cassette memory indicator
COUNTER SELECT EJECT REW PLAY F FWD STOP REC
being input to channel 2 (when in 2-channel This button works only when the unit is in EE mode.
8 ClipLink indicator
mode) or to channels 3 and 4 (when in 4-channel 6 0 ) p r
mode). 6 AUDIO INPUT LEVEL control knobs
QSDI : Lights when QSDI-format video and audio When recording, you can use these knobs to set audio
input signals have been selected. When QSDI is input levels for CH-1 (channel 1), CH-2, CH-3 and
selected, all of the indicators in the VIDEO and CH-4, respectively. 9 EDIT MODE indicator
AUDIO groups go off. You can make these knobs inoperative for an AES/ 0 REMOTE indicator
EBU, SDI or QSDI format digital audio input by
4 INPUT SELECT buttons setting “DIGITAL INPUT” under the AUDIO
Select video input signals and audio input signals. CONTROL menu item to “BYPASS”. 1 COUNTER SELECT button 3 Time counter display
VIDEO button : Each press of this button cycles Selects the type of time data to be shown in the time Indicates the following:
through four video signal selection options: On how to use the menu, see Chapter 4 “Menu Settings”.
counter display. Each press of this button cycles • Time data : CNT (count value of the time counter),
composite analog, S-video, component analog, through three indicator display options: COUNTER time code, or user bit data
and SDI. When you select one of these options, (CNT: count value of the time counter), TC (time • Digital hours meter’s count value : time total for
the corresponding VIDEO indicator in the INPUT code), and U-BIT (user bits). unit’s operating hours, drum usage hours, etc.,
MODE display lights up. (selectable via the digital hours meter display menu).
AUDIO CH-1, CH-1/2 button : Each press of this Note • Error messages and alarm messages (see page 73)
button cycles through three audio signal selection If the REMOTE/LOCAL switch is set to REMOTE,
options for audio channel 1 (when in 2-channel the COUNTER SELECT button does not operate 4 Tape end alarm indicator L
mode) or channels 1 and 2 (when in 4-channel while the tape is moving. In this case, make the time Starts flashing when the tape’s remaining capacity is
mode): analog, AES/EBU, and SDI. When you data selection via the remote equipment that is for about 2 minutes.
select one of these options, the corresponding connected to the REMOTE connector on the rear
AUDIO indicator in the INPUT MODE display panel. 5 REC INHIBIT indicator
lights up. Lights when the REC/SAVE switch on the loaded
AUDIO CH-2, CH-3/4 button : Each press of this 2 Time data type indicators cassette is in the SAVE position.
button cycles through three audio signal selection One of the three indicators (COUNTER, TC, and U-
options for audio channel 2 (when in 2-channel BIT) lights to indicate the type of time data currently 6 NOT EDITABLE indicator
mode) or channels 3 and 4 (when in 4-channel shown in the time counter display. Lights during playback of a tape that contains a DV-
mode): analog, AES/EBU, and SDI. When you COUNTER : CNT (count value of the time counter) format recording. DV-format recordings can be used
select one of these options, the corresponding TC : SMPTE time code (DSR-80) or EBU time code as source material for editing, but editing functions
AUDIO indicator in the INPUT MODE display (DSR-80P) such as setting IN/OUT points cannot be used.
lights up. U-BIT : User bit data This indicator also lights when the audio recording
QSDI : Press this button to select QSDI signals. mode selected on this unit does not coincides with that
of the loaded tape.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P

DSR-80/80P/60/60P

Location
7 Cassette memory indicator 9 EDIT MODE indicator 4 Menu control panel

Lights when a cassette provided with a memory chip Lights when this unit is selected as the recorder VCR
(“cassette memory”) is loaded. under the control of an editing controller connected to The menu control panel is located on the inside of the
the REMOTE connector on the rear panel of the unit. door at the lower front of the unit. Press on the top of
8 ClipLink indicator the door to open it.
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
Lights when a cassette is loaded on which ClipLink 0 REMOTE indicator
log data is stored in the cassette memory. Lights when the REMOTE/LOCAL switch on the
front panel has been set to REMOTE. To expose the menu control panel
For details of ClipLink log data, refer to the “ClipLink
Guide” also supplied with this unit. PUSH OPEN
3 Tape transport control section

1 SYNC PHASE control
1 EJECT button 2 SC PHASE control Press on the

top of the door.
2 REW button 3 MENU button
3 PLAY button 4 Arrow buttons
EJECT REW PLAY F FWD STOP REC 5 RESET (NO) button
6 0 ) p r SYNC PHASE SC PHASE MENU RESET(NO)
6 REC button MONITOR SELECT

TC PRESET SET(YES)
CH- CH- CH- CH-
1/2 3/4 1/3 2/4
5 STOP button MIX
4 F FWD button
6 SET (YES) button
7 TC PRESET button
8 MONITOR SELECT switches
1 EJECT button 4 F FWD (fast forward) button
When you press this button, it lights and the cassette is When you press this button, it lights and the tape is
automatically ejected after a few seconds. fast forwarded. During fast forward, the picture does
not appear on the monitor. 1 SYNC (synchronization) PHASE control For details on setting time code and user bit data, see
Turn this control to accurately adjust the “Using the Internal Time Code Generator” (page 33).
2 REW (rewind) button However, if “F. FWD/REW” under the AUTO EE
When you press this button, it lights and the tape starts SELECT menu item is set to “PB”, holding down the F synchronization phase of the output video signal of the
unit with respect to the reference video signal. Use a 5 RESET (NO) button
rewinding. During rewind, the picture does not appear FWD button provides a picture search function at 32
cross-point (Phillips) screwdriver to turn it. Press this button to:
on the monitor. times normal speed in forward direction.
• reset menu settings,
However, if “F. FWD/REW” under the AUTO EE
2 SC (subcarrier) PHASE control • reset the time data shown in the time counter display
SELECT menu item is set to “PB”, holding down the 5 STOP button
Turn this control to accurately adjust the subcarrier to zero, or
REW button provides a picture search function at 32 Press this button to stop the current tape transport
phase of the composite video output signal of the unit • send a negative response to the unit’s prompts.
times normal speed in reverse direction. operation.
with respect to the reference video signal. Use a cross-
point (Phillips) screwdriver to turn it. 6 SET (YES) button
3 PLAY button 6 REC (record) button
Press this button to:
When you press this button, it lights and playback When you press this button while holding down the
3 MENU button • save new settings, such as selected menu items and
begins. If you press this button during recording or PLAY button, it lights and recording begins.
Press this button to display the menu on the monitor time code settings, to the unit’s memory, or
editing, the recording or editing operation is stopped
screen and the time counter display. Press it again to • send a positive response to the unit’s prompts.
and this unit enters playback mode.
Note return from the menu display to the usual display.
7 TC (time code) PRESET button
A menu setting has been selected at the factory so that
On how to use the menu, see chapter 4 “Menu Settings”. Use this button when setting time code’s initial values
no tape transport control buttons other than EJECT 1
and user bit data.
and STOP 5 will work while the REMOTE indicator
is lit on the front panel. 4 Arrow (˘ ≥ ¿ ÷) buttons
Use these buttons to move around the menu items, and For details on setting time code and user bit data, see
also for setting time code and user bit data. “Using the Internal Time Code Generator” (page 33).
For details on changing menu settings, see “Changing
Menu Settings” (page 51).
12 13
1-7

1-8

Location
8 MONITOR SELECT switches Switch setting Selected channel and output format 3 REMOTE connector (9-pin)
Use these switches to select the channels for audio Left Right HEADPHONES MONITOR AUDIO When controlling this unit from an editing controller
output via the MONITOR AUDIO connector on the switch switch connector connector such as the ES-7, PVE-500, BVE-600/800/910, or
rear panel and the HEADPHONES connector on the CH-
1/3
CH-
2/4
Channel 1 only Channel 1 only RM-450/450CE, connect the unit to the editing
MIX (monaural) (monaural)
front panel. controller via this connector using the supplied 9-pin
Channels 1 and 2 Channels 1 and 2
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
CH- CH-
Use the left switch to select the basic channel setting, CH-
1/2
CH-
3/4
1/3 2/4 remote control cable.
MIX (stereo) (mix)
then use the right switch to select the output format CH- CH- Channel 2 only Channel 2 only
1/3 2/4
(monaural, stereo, or mix). MIX (monaural) (monaural)
The table at right lists the correspondence of left/right 1 Analog video signal input/output section
CH-
1/3
CH-
2/4
Channel 3 only Channel 3 only
switch settings and channel/output format selections. MIX (monaural) (monaural)
CH- CH- CH-
1/3
CH-
2/4
Channels 3 and 4 Channels 3 and 4 5 VIDEO IN connectors and 75 Ω termination
1/2 3/4
MIX (stereo) (mix) ANALOG I/O switch
CH-
1/3
CH-
2/4
Channel 4 only Channel 4 only REF.VIDEO VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
MIX (monaural) (monaural) IN 1
75Ω 75Ω
ON ON
2
1 REF. VIDEO IN connectors (SUPER)
6 VIDEO OUT 1 and 2 (SUPER) connectors
and 75 Ω termination switch OFF OFF
Rear Panel COMPONENT VIDEO R.G.B.

OUT Y IN Y OUT
2 REF. VIDEO OUT connector G G
1 Analog video signal input/ TIME CODE 7 COMPONENT VIDEO Y, R–Y, B–Y/RGB IN
IN R-Y Y-R,B R-Y
output section (see page 15) Y-R,B
connectors
3 TIME CODE IN connector R R
2 Digital signal input/output RGB RGB

8 COMPONENT VIDEO Y, R–Y, B–Y/RGB
OUT B-Y B-Y
section (see page 16) OUT connectors
4 TIME CODE OUT connector B B
ANALOG I/O QSDI SDI INPUT SDI OUTPUT

REF.VIDEO VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT 3 SDI signal input/output
section (with the optional 9 S VIDEO IN connector
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)
MONITOR S VIDEO
DSBK-120/120P installed) AUDIO IN OUT
(see page 17)
0 S VIDEO OUT connector
COMPONENT VIDEO
TIME CODE
AC IN
4 Analog audio signal input/
MONITOR
AUDIO
S VIDEO output section (see page 18) 1 REF. (reference) VIDEO IN (input) connectors 3 TIME CODE IN connector (BNC type)
TBC REMOTE REMOTE
(BNC type) and 75 Ω termination switch Input SMPTE time code (DSR-80) or EBU time code
Input a reference video signal to one of these (DSR-80P) externally generated.
connectors. The two connectors can be used for a
1 AC IN connector
loop-through connection. When making a loop- 4 TIME CODE OUT connector (BNC type)
through connection, set the 75 Ω termination switch to When the unit is in normal-speed playback mode, this
2 TBC REMOTE connector OFF and when not, set the switch to ON. connector outputs the time code read from the tape as
When using the COMPONENT VIDEO Y, R–Y, and an analog (LTC) signal. When the unit is in any other
3 REMOTE connector B–Y/RGB IN connectors 7 in four-wire mode (with mode, the connector outputs no signal.
no sync signal included in the green signal), input a
sync signal to this connector. Note
1 AC IN connector Notes
Connect to an AC power outlet using the supplied The TIME CODE IN connector 3 and TIME CODE
• Be sure to power off this unit before connecting the
power cord. 2 REF. (reference) VIDEO OUT (output) OUT connector 4 can only be used when an optional
TBC remote controller to the TBC REMOTE
connector (BNC type) DSBK-130/130P Time Code Input/Output Board is
connector.
2 TBC (time base corrector) REMOTE connector Outputs a reference video signal. installed in this unit.
• TBC remote control can be applied only to the analog
(15-pin) When using the COMPONENT VIDEO Y, R–Y, and
video outputs from the VIDEO OUT 1 and 2
To remote-control the built-in time base corrector, B–Y/RGB OUT connectors 8 in four-wire mode 5 VIDEO IN connectors (BNC type) and 75 Ω
(SUPER) connectors 6, COMPONENT VIDEO Y,
connect an optional TBC remote controller such as the (with no sync signal included in the green signal), this termination switch
R–Y, and B–Y/RGB OUT connectors 8, and S
UVR-60/60P, BK-2006/2007 or BVR-50/50P. connector outputs a sync signal. Input a composite video signal to one of these
VIDEO OUT connector 0 in the analog video signal
connectors. The two connectors can be used for a
input/output section 1 on the next page.
loop-through connection. When making a loop-
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
through connection, set the 75 Ω termination switch to

OFF and when not, set the switch to ON.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P

Location
6 VIDEO OUT 1 and 2 (SUPER) connectors (BNC 8 COMPONENT VIDEO Y, R–Y, B–Y/RGB OUT 4 DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) OUTPUT
type) connectors (BNC type) connectors (XLR 3-pin, male)
Output a composite video signal. When “CHARA. Output a component video (Y, R–Y, B–Y) signal or Output digital audio signals in the AES/EBU format.
DISPLAY” under the DISPLAY CONTROL menu RGB signal, according to the setting of the selector
item has been set to “ON” (factory default setting), a switch. The RGB signal may also have a sync signal
3 SDI (Serial Digital Interface) signal input/output section (with the optional DSBK-120/
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
character signal is superimposed on the video signal included in the green signal, according to a menu
that is output from the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER) setting. 120P installed)
connector. Y : Luminance signal
R–Y and B–Y : Color difference signals When an optional DSBK-120/120P SDI Input/Output
7 COMPONENT VIDEO Y, R–Y, B–Y/RGB IN Board is installed in the unit, this section can be used
connectors (BNC type) For details, see the menu item VIDEO CONTROL, setting for inputting and outputting SDI signals.
Input a component video (Y, R–Y, B–Y) signal or “SYNC ON GREEN”. (Page 47)
RGB signal, according to the setting of the selector
switch. 9 S VIDEO IN connector (4-pin)
Y : Luminance signal Input an S-video signal with separated Y (luminance)
R–Y and B–Y : Color difference signals and C (chroma: 3.58 MHz for DSR-80 and 4.43 MHz
for DSR-80P) components. 1 SDI INPUT connector and active through output connector
0 S VIDEO OUT connector (4-pin) SDI INPUT SDI OUTPUT

Outputs an S-video signal with separated Y 2 SDI OUTPUT connectors
(luminance) and C (chroma: 3.58 MHz with DSR-80
and 4.43 MHz with DSR-80P) components.
2 Digital signal input/output section
1 SDI (Serial Digital Interface signal) INPUT 2 SDI (Serial Digital Interface signal) OUTPUT
connector and active through output connector connectors (BNC type)
(BNC type) Output SDI-format digital video and audio signals.
1 QSDI INPUT connector The left connector is for input of SDI-format digital The same signals are output from both connectors.
QSDI
INPUT OUTPUT video and audio signals. The right connector can be
2 QSDI OUTPUT connector used as an active through output connector.
3 DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) INPUT connectors
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)
CH-1/2 CH-3/4 CH-1/2 CH-3/4
4 DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) OUTPUT connectors

INPUT OUTPUT
1 QSDI INPUT connector (BNC type) Note

Input video, audio and time code signals in the QSDI In search mode, this connector outputs unprocessed
format. audio signals. If you are monitoring this audio signal
on another device, the sound may be different from the
2 QSDI OUTPUT connector (BNC type) playback output of this unit.
Outputs video, audio and time code signals in the
QSDI format when the unit is in playback mode, but 3 DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) INPUT
outputs no EE signals. connectors (XLR 3-pin, female)
Input digital audio signals in the AES/EBU format.
16 17
1-9

1-10

Location Recording
Chapter 2 Recording and

4 Analog audio signal input/output section This section describes the necessary settings and operations to perform
recording on this unit. The same settings and operations apply whether
you are using the unit as part of an editing system, for dubbing1), or as a
stand-alone recorder. For the necessary connections for recording and the
ANALOG I/O settings not covered in this section, see Chapter 5 “Connections and
Chapter 1 Overview
REF.VIDEO
IN
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
1
Settings”.
75Ω 75Ω
ON ON
2
(SUPER)
OFF OFF
OUT Y
COMPONENT VIDEO R.G.B.
IN Y OUT
1 AUDIO IN 600 Ω ON/OFF switches Settings for Recording
G G
AUDIO IN 600Ω 600Ω 600Ω 600Ω
TIME CODE OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
IN R-Y 0dBm 0dBm 0dBm 0dBm
Y-R,B R-Y
Chapter 2 Recording and Playback

R R
Y-R,B
-8dBm +4dBm -8dBm +4dBm -8dBm +4dBm -8dBm +4dBm 2 AUDIO IN –6 dBm/0 dBm/+4 dBm
RGB RGB
CH-1 CH-2 CH-3 CH-4
switches
OUT B-Y B-Y
3 AUDIO IN CH-1 to CH-4 connectors
Playback
B B
AUDIO OUT
1 6 0 ) p 2
S VIDEO CH-1 CH-2 CH-3 CH-4
MONITOR
AUDIO IN OUT
4 AUDIO OUT CH-1 to CH-4 Video monitor Player (DSR-60/60P, etc.)
connectors
5 MONITOR AUDIO connector

REMOTE/LOCAL Audio level meter
switch
AUDIO MODE display
INPUT MODE display
1 AUDIO IN 600 Ω ON/OFF switches 5 MONITOR AUDIO connector (RCA phono

Use these switches to select either 600 Ω impedance jack) 3
(the ON setting) or 10-kΩ impedance (the OFF setting) Outputs audio signals for monitoring. The audio
for the AUDIO IN CH-1 to CH-4 connectors. signals to be output from this connector can be 6 0 ) p r
selected with the MONITOR SELECT switches on the

2 AUDIO IN –6 dBm/0 dBm/+4 dBm switches menu control panel 4 (see page 13).
Set these switches according to the levels of the signals
input to the AUDIO IN CH-1 to CH-4 connectors.
7 6 5 4 Recorder (DSR-80/80P)
3 AUDIO IN CH-1 (channel 1) to CH-4 connectors

(XLR 3-pin, female) Note
Use these connectors to connect separate channels of When controlling this unit from an editing controller, set the REMOTE/
audio input from a player VCR or other external audio LOCAL switch to “REMOTE”. When not, set the switch to “LOCAL”.
equipment.
1 Power on the video monitor, then set the monitor’s input switches
4 AUDIO OUT CH-1 (channel 1) to CH-4 according to the input signals from this unit.
connectors (XLR 3-pin, male)
Output channel-1 to channel-4 audio signals, 2 Set up the player to play back a tape.
respectively.
For details, refer to your player’s operating instructions.
3 Power on this unit by pressing on the “1” side of the POWER switch.
(Continued)
........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) For dubbing of QSDI format signals, use the auto mode For details, see the section “Dubbing Signals in QSDI
(AUTO FUNCTION) execution menu item QSDI Format” on page 38.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
DUBBING.
18 Chapter 1 Overview Chapter 2 Recording and Playback 19

DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Recording
4 When the REMOTE/LOCAL switch is set to “LOCAL”, use the 6 Select the audio mode.
COUNTER SELECT button to select the type of time data to be used. Press the AUDIO REC SELECT button to select the desired mode.
Each selection is shown by lit indicators in the AUDIO MODE
Each press of this button cycles through three options : COUNTER display.
(CNT value), TC (time code), and U-BIT (user bit data). The time
Audio mode Lit indicator in AUDIO MODE display
data type indicator for each option lights as it is selected.
2-channel mode 2CH and Fs48k
When the REMOTE/LOCAL switch is set to “REMOTE”, selection of 4-channel mode 4CH and Fs32k
the time data type is carried out at the editing controller.
Cautions
5 Select the formats of video and audio input signal to be recorded. • In the DVCAM format, there are two audio recording modes, with
Press INPUT SELECT buttons to select the desired signal formats. either two channels at 48 kHz or four channels at 32 kHz. It is not

Each selection is shown by a lit indicator in the INPUT MODE possible to select other modes (for example with four channels at 48
display. kHz).
• During editing, if a signal used in assemble or insert editing is in a
Video input signal Corresponding INPUT Lit indicator in INPUT
(input connector) SELECT button MODE display different mode from the base tape, the signals will be discontinuous at
Composite signal VIDEO COMPOSITE in VIDEO the edit points, and correct editing will not be obtained. For this
(VIDEO IN) group reason, audio editing between different modes is inhibited on this
Separated Y/C signal VIDEO S VIDEO in VIDEO group unit.
(S VIDEO IN) For smooth editing operations, check the audio recording mode of the
Component signal VIDEO COMPONENT in VIDEO base tape beforehand.
(COMPONENT VIDEO group • The audio mode selecting operation is only possible when the unit is
IN)
in EE mode.
SDI signal (SDI INPUT) VIDEO SDI in VIDEO group
• Once you have started recording, you cannot change the audio mode
QSDI signal (QSDI QSDI QSDI
INPUT)
selection.
• If on a tape there is a point where the audio mode is switched, you
cannot perform an insert editing on that tape.
Audio input signal Corresponding INPUT Lit indicator in INPUT
(input connector) SELECT button MODE display
7 Use the AUDIO INPUT LEVEL control knobs to adjust audio input
Analog signal (AUDIO AUDIO CH-1 CH-1/2, ANALOG in AUDIO group levels.
IN CH-1 to CH-4) AUDIO CH-2 CH-3/4
Watching the audio level meter, adjust the level so that the meter does
AES/EBU signal AUDIO CH-1 CH-1/2, AES/EBU in AUDIO group
(DIGITAL AUDIO AUDIO CH-2 CH-3/4
not indicate higher values than 0 dB when the audio signal is at its
(AES/EBU) INPUT) maximum.
SDI signal (SDI INPUT) AUDIO CH-1 CH-1/2, SDI in AUDIO group When the level exceeds 0 dB, the OVER indicator lights.
AUDIO CH-2 CH-3/4
QSDI signal (QSDI QSDI QSDI The factory-preset audio recording level is –20 dB (DSR-80) or
INPUT) –18 dB (DSR-80P). This setting can be changed to –12 dB using the
AUDIO CONTROL menu item.
Caution On how to use the menu, see Chapter 4 “Menu Settings”.
Once you have started recording, you cannot change the input signal
selection.
1-11
20 Chapter 2 Recording and Playback Chapter 2 Recording and Playback 21

1-12
Recording
Notes on using cassettes

Usable Cassettes • Before storing the cassette, rewind the tape to the beginning and be sure
to put the cassette in its storage case, preferably on end instead of flat on
This unit can use standard-size and mini-size DVCAM cassettes listed its side. The storage case of a DVCAM cassette is specially designed to
below. ensure a long-period storage of the tape.
Model name Size
Storing a cassette in any other condition (not rewound, out of its case,
etc.) may cause the video and audio contents to become damaged over
PDV-64ME/94ME/124ME/184ME Standard size
time.
PDVM-12ME/22ME/32ME/40ME Mini size
• If the cassette memory connector (contact point) becomes dirty,
connection problems may occur and cause a loss of functions. Remove
The numbers in each model name indicate the maximum recording/
away any dust or dirt from this area before using the cassette.
playback time (in minutes) for each model. For example, the PDV-184ME

• If the cassette is dropped on the floor or otherwise receives a hard impact,
has a maximum recording/playback time of 184 minutes.
the tape may become slackened and may not record and/or play back
Notes
correctly.
• If you insert an incorrect type of cassette, it will be automatically ejected. For instructions on removing tape slack, see page 27.
• When operating this unit as a player, you can also use DV cassettes on
the unit. However, it is the best choice to always use DVCAM cassettes
because they are more reliable than DV cassettes whatever your purpose
may be: playback, editing, or long-period storage of recordings.
• Cassettes that have been recorded by a DV-format recorder can be played
back on this unit but cannot be used for recording at editing operation
such as the setting of edit points. When you insert such a cassette into
this unit, the NOT EDITABLE indicator lights up on the front panel of
the unit.
DVCAM cassettes
The following figure illustrates the DVCAM cassette’s appearance.
Standard size
Mini size
REC/SAVE switch Cassette memory

For details of this switch, see This memory is used to store ClipLink
“Preventing accidental erasure” log data. For details of ClipLink log data,
(page 27). refer to “ClipLink Guide” supplied with
this unit.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P

DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Recording
Recording Procedure Mini size

Insert the mini-size cassette into
the middle of the cassette
This section describes the procedure to perform a recording on this unit, compartment.
showing an example session in which playback signals coming from a
player VCR will be recorded on the tape loaded in the unit.
Standard size
REMOTE/LOCAL switch
1

6 0 ) p r
2 Tape window facing upward
Recorder (DSR-80/80P) The cassette is automatically drawn into the unit and the tape is wound
round the head drum. The tape is stationary while the head drum
rotates, and the STOP button lights.
3 If the REC INHIBIT indicator lights:

6 0 ) p
It indicates that the loaded cassette’s REC/SAVE switch has been set
to SAVE. Press the EJECT button in the tape transport control section
to remove the cassette, then set the cassette’s REC/SAVE switch to
Player (DSR-60/60P, etc.) REC and reload the cassette.
Note
Notes
Make sure that the unit’s power is on when ejecting and loading
• When controlling this unit from an editing controller, set the REMOTE/ cassettes.
LOCAL switch to “REMOTE”. When not, set the switch to “LOCAL”.
• If you intend to use a tape recorded on this unit in a system comprising a 2 Press and hold the REC button, and press the PLAY button.
DSR-85/85P and an ES-7 EditStation, it is recommended to record color
bars on at least the first 40 seconds of the tape. This puts the unit into recording mode, and the tape starts moving.
When transferring digital signals from the DSR-85/85P to the ES-7
EditStation at quadruple speed, there must be recording for 3 Press the PLAY button on the player.
approximately 40 seconds before the IN point.
This starts the player’s playback operation, at which point this unit
1 After checking the following items, hold the cassette so that the tape starts recording the input playback signals.
window is facing upward, then insert it into the recorder (this unit) as
illustrated on the next page. Cautions
Item to check See section • Once you have started recording, you cannot change the audio mode
Make sure that the cassette’s “REC/ “Preventing accidental erasure” (page
selection.
SAVE” switch is set to “REC”. 27). • If on a tape there is a point where the audio mode is switched, you cannot
Check for tape slack. “Checking the tape for slack” (page 27). perform an insert editing on that tape.
Make sure that the “HUMID!” alarm is “Condensation” (page 69)
not shown in the display window.
1-13

1-14
Recording
If the following indicators light when a cassette is loaded Preventing accidental erasure
Indicator It means:
Cassette memory indicator The loaded cassette contains a cassette memory. Set the REC/SAVE switch on the cassette to SAVE to prevent accidental
erasure of recorded contents.
ClipLink indicator There is ClipLink log data stored in the cassette
memory on the loaded cassette. REC/SAVE switch
Caution Set to SAVE

With such a cassette, execution of recording may
destroy the ClipLink log data. REC
NOT EDITABLE indicator The recording format of the tape is “DV”. SAVE
Replace the tape with one that has been recorded in

“DVCAM” format when the unit is a recorder for

editing.
The audio recording mode selected on this unit does To enable re-recording
not coincides with that of the tape.
• When your current purpose is recording, you can Set the cassette’s REC/SAVE switch to REC.
use the tape as it is. If you insert a cassette into the unit when this switch is set to SAVE, the
• When your current purpose is editing, set the unit unit will not record when you press the PLAY button while holding down
for the same audio recording mode as with the
tape. (For more details, see “Troubleshooting”
the REC button.
(page 71.)
Checking the tape for slack

For this purpose: Do this:
Stop recording Press the STOP button. Using a paper clip or a similar object, turn the reel gently in the direction
The unit enters stop mode, and will automatically shown by the arrow. If the reel does not move, there is no slack. Insert the
switch to standby off mode after 8 minutes.
cassette into the cassette compartment, and after about 10 seconds take it
Remove the cassette Press the EJECT button.
After a few seconds, the tape is unwound from the out.
head drum and the cassette is automatically ejected.
If a CNT value is shown on the time counter display
(assuming the time data type indicator “COUNTER”
is lit), the CNT value is reset.
Inhibit the unit from Change the menu settings.
outputting text information See “CHARA. DISPLAY” (page 43) in Chapter 4 Paper clip, etc.
(time data, operation mode “Menu Settings”.
indications, etc.) to the
video monitor.
Change the time period Change the menu settings.
before the unit switches to See “TAPE PROTECTION” (page 46) in Chapter 4 Reel
standby off mode from stop “Menu Settings”.
mode
No double insertion of cassettes
When you insert a cassette, the orange lock-out plate appears in the
cassette compartment to prevent double insertion.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P

DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Playback
Playback
This section describes the necessary settings and operations to perform

Playback Procedure
playback on this unit. The same settings and operations apply whether you
are using the unit as part of an editing system, for dubbing, or as a stand-
alone player VCR. For the necessary connections for playback and the
settings not covered in this section, see Chapter 5 “Connections and REMOTE/LOCAL switch 1 2
Settings”.
Settings for Playback
6 0 ) p r

Video monitor
2 Note
When controlling this unit from an editing controller, set the REMOTE/
LOCAL switch to “REMOTE”. When not, set the switch to “LOCAL”.
1 Insert a cassette.
Player (DSR-80/80P)
For details of cassette insertion see page 24, and for usable cassette types see
1 page 22.
The cassette is automatically drawn into the unit. The STOP button
6 0 ) p r
will light, and a few seconds later a still image will appear on the
monitor screen.
2 Press the PLAY button.
This starts the playback operation. When the tape is played back all
the way to the end, the unit automatically rewinds it and then stops.
1 Power on this unit by pressing on the “1” side of the POWER switch.
2 Power on the video monitor and set the monitor’s switches as shown
If the following indicators light when a cassette is loaded
below.
Indicator: It means:
Switch Setting
Cassette memory indicator The loaded cassette contains a cassette memory.
75 Ω termination switch ON (or attach a 75 Ω terminator)
Input switch Set according to the type of input signal from this unit. ClipLink indicator There is ClipLink log data stored in the cassette
memory on the loaded cassette.
NOT EDITABLE indicator The tape was recorded in the DV format.
You can not use it as a recording tape for editing.
Using this unit to play back a tape recorded on another device

When playing back a tape on this unit that was recorded with a DV format
VCR or some DSR-series VCRs, it is not possible to play back the first 10
seconds of the tape, because of the different tape loading mechanism. For
any tape to be played back on this unit, it is recommended to make a
preliminary recording for about 10 seconds at the beginning.
1-15

1-16
Playback Setting the Time Data
Chapter 3 Convenient Functions for

For this purpose: Do this: This unit is provided with the following functions When you set “SUB STATUS” under the DIS-
Stop playback Press the STOP button. related to time data. PLAY CONTROL menu item to other than
The unit enters stop mode, and will automatically • Display and reset CNT value
switch to standby off mode after 8 minutes.
“OFF”, you can also display supplementary status
• Set, display, record, and play back SMPTE/EBU time information on the monitor screen about the
Adjust the audio playback Use the audio level control on the monitor. code and user bit data
level editing mode settings, recording format of play-
Search while viewing Press and hold either F FWD or REW button to back tape, and/or time code generator’s operating
search at 32 times normal speed in forward or When the unit is equipped with an optional DSBK-
reverse direction. To return to normal playback 130/130P Time Code Input/Output Board, it can mode.
mode, press the PLAY button. output the time code read from the tape as an analog
(LTC) signal while in normal-speed playback mode, For details of supplementary status information, see
Note
and receive an external analog time code (LTC) signal. “Displaying Supplementary Status Information” (page 55).
The search picture will not be displayed unless “F.
FWD/REW” under the AUTO EE SELECT menu
item is set to “PB”. Note Monitor screen contents

Inhibit the unit from Change the menu settings. Even when the unit is equipped with the DSBK-130/ The contents of the monitor screen are shown below.
outputting text information See “CHARA. DISPLAY” (page 43) in Chapter 4
(time data, operation mode “Menu Settings”.
130P, it outputs no signal from the TIME CODE OUT
indications, etc.) to the connector unless it is in normal-speed playback mode. A Time data type
video monitor. Time data
B Drop frame indication
Remove the cassette Press the EJECT button. The following explains how to use these functions. for time code readera)
Chapter 3 Convenient Functions for Editing Operation

After a few seconds, the tape is unwound from the
head drum and the cassette is automatically ejected. C Drop frame indication for
If a CNT value is shown on the time counter display
Editing Operation
time code generator a)
(assuming the time data type indicator “COUNTER”
is lit), the CNT value is reset.
Displaying Time Data and
Disable the automatic Change the menu settings. Operation Mode Indications T C R 0 0 : 0 4 . 4 7 . 0 7
rewind function See “AUTO REW” (page 42) in Chapter 4 “Menu P L A Y L O C K
Settings”. Time data and operation mode indications can be
Change the time period Change the menu settings. displayed on the monitor screen. D DSR-80/80P operation mode
before the unit switches to See “TAPE PROTECTION” (page 46) in Chapter 4
standby off mode from stop “Menu Settings”. Time data can also be displayed in the time counter a) This character can appear on the DSR-80 only. The
mode display on this unit. character to appear in these two columns is always a colon
( : ) on the DSR-80P.
To view time data and operation mode A Time data type

indications on the monitor screen The following time data type indications are displayed.
Indication Description
Select the DISPLAY CONTROL menu item and set
CNT Count value of the time counter
“CHARA. DISPLAY” to “ON” (factory default
TCR Time code data from time code reader
setting). (factory default setting)
The time data and the indication of the unit’s current UBR User bit data from time code reader
operation mode are superimposed on the composite TCG Time code data from time code generator
video signal that is being output from the VIDEO OUT UBG User bit data from time code generator
2 (SUPER) connector, and can be viewed on the T∗R Time code data from time code reader. The
monitor screen. asterisk indicates an interpolation by the time
Use the DISPLAY CONTROL menu item to select the code reader to make up for the time code
information displayed and the character type and data not correctly read from the tape.
position of the indications. U∗R User bit data from the time code reader. The
asterisk indicates that last data is retained by
the time code reader, as the new data has not
For details of these menu settings, see Chapter 4 “Menu been read correctly from the tape.
Settings”.
B Drop frame indication for time code reader
(on DSR-80 only)
. Drop frame mode (factory default setting)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
: Non-drop frame mode
30 Chapter 2 Recording and Playback Chapter 3 Convenient Functions for Editing Operation 31
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Setting the Time Data
C Drop frame indication for time code To display the desired time data in the For details of menu settings, see Chapter 4 “Menu
generator (on DSR-80 only)
Using the Internal Time Code Settings”.
time counter display Generator
. Drop frame mode (factory default setting) 3 Press the TC PRESET button on the menu control
: Non-drop frame mode You can set the time code’s initial value before panel.
COUNTER SELECT button
recording the time code generated by the internal time
D DSR-80/80P operation modes Time data type indicators code generator onto a tape. In addition, you can set the The current setting is shown on the monitor screen
Indication Operation mode time code’s user bits to record user bit data such as the and in the time counter display on the unit’s front
THREADING Tape is being threaded (this indicator date, time, scene number, reel number, or other useful panel. The leftmost digit keeps flashing.
is displayed from the time a cassette is information. One of the following menu screens is displayed on
inserted until the tape has been the monitor depending on the setting made in
threaded)
6 0 ) p r
When the unit is equipped with an optional DSBK- Step 1.
UNTHREADING Tape is being unthreaded (this
indicator is displayed from the time the
130/130P Time Code Input/Output Board, the internal
EJECT button is pressed until the time code generator can be locked to (synchronized TC PRESET MODE UB PRESET MODE
cassette is actually ejected) with) an external time code.
CASSETTE OUT No cassette has been loaded
Time counter display TCG 00:00:00:00 UBG 00:00:00:00
STANDBY OFF Standby off mode
T. RELEASE Tension release mode To set the time code’s initial value and UP :DATA INCREMENT UP :DATA INCREMENT
DOWN :DATA DECREMENT DOWN :DATA DECREMENT
STOP Stop mode Press the COUNTER SELECT button on the front user bit data

LEFT :LEFT SHIFT LEFT :LEFT SHIFT
F. FWD Fast forward mode RIGHT :RIGHT SHIFT RIGHT :RIGHT SHIFT
panel of the unit. RESET :DATA CLEAR RESET :DATA CLEAR
REW Rewind mode Each press of this button cycles through three options: SET :DATA SET SET :DATA SET
PREROLL Preroll mode CNT value, time code, and user bit data. The time TC PSET:ABORT & EXIT TC PSET:ABORT & EXIT
PLAY Playback mode (servo unlocked) data type indicator for each option lights as it is Time code initial value User bit setting screen
PLAY LOCK Playback mode (servo locked) setting screen
selected.
PLAY PAUSE Playback pause mode
Time data type Time data shown in the time counter Note
REC Recording mode (servo unlocked) 6 0 ) p r
indicator display If you press the TC PRESET button while CNT

REC LOCK Recording mode (servo locked)
COUNTER CNT (count value of the time counter) value is being displayed, the message “COUNTER
REC PAUSE Recording pause mode
TC Time code (if recording, the time code is MODE IS SELECTED. SET COUNTER
EDIT Edit mode (servo unlocked)
generated by the internal time code SELECT SWITCH TO TC OR UB” will appear on
EDIT LOCK Edit mode (servo locked) generator; if playing back, the time code
JOG STILL Still picture playback in jog mode is read from the tape) the monitor screen and “CNT mode!” will appear
JOG FWD Jog forward U-BIT User bit data (if recording, the user bit in the time counter display on the unit’s front
panel. If this happens, press the COUNTER
JOG REV Jog reverse data is according to the most recent
settings; if playing back, the user bit 1 2 3 4,5,6 7 SELECT button to light the time data type
SHUTTLE +2.0 Shuttle mode (playback speed) a) data is read from the tape)
PAUSE Shuttle playback pause mode indicator “TC” or “U-BIT”.
a) “+2.0” in the left box is an example of playback speed
indication.
Note
1 Press the COUNTER SELECT button to light the 4 Use the ¿ and ÷ buttons to move the flashing
If the REMOTE/LOCAL switch is set to REMOTE, time data type indicator “TC” or “U-BIT”. digit to the value to be changed.
the COUNTER SELECT button does not operate TC : To set the time code’s initial value.
while the tape is moving. In such cases, use the
external equipment connected to the REMOTE
U-BIT : To set user bit data 5 Use the ˘ and ≥ buttons to change the value of the
flashing digit.
connector on the rear panel to select the time data. The current time code value or user bit data is Enter hexadecimal values (0 to 9, A to F) when
shown in the time counter display. setting user bit data.
To reset the CNT value
Press the RESET (NO) button on the menu control 2 Set the TIME CODE menu items as shown below. 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you have set the desired
panel. This resets the CNT value to 0:00:00:00.
Menu item Setting values for all digits.
Note TC MODE “INT”
To set a value of 00:00:00:00, simply press the
RESET (NO) button.
If during playback the recording on the tape includes RUN MODE “FREE RUN” or “REC RUN”
discontinuities, the counter may operate incorrectly at DF MODE Usually “DF” (Continued)
the corresponding points. (on DSR-80 only)
1-17
32 Chapter 3 Convenient Functions for Editing Operation Chapter 3 Convenient Functions for Editing Operation 33
1-18
Setting the Time Data
7 Press the SET (YES) button.

Synchronizing Internal and Rerecording the Time Code — TC 3 Press the ÷ button.
The message “NOW SAVING...” appears on the

External Time Codes Insert Function This displays the items in the level 1 of the auto
monitor screen, “Saving...” appears in the time mode execution menu.
counter display, and the new settings are stored in When the unit is equipped with an optional DSBK- The TC insert function makes it possible to use the
AUTO FUNCTION MENU
the unit’s memory. 130/130P Time Code Input/Output Board, the internal internal time code generator to rewrite time code and QSDI DUBBING QSDI DUB
After this saving operation is completed, the time code generator can be locked to (synchronized user bits when the time code recorded on a tape is TC INSERT Time counter display
monitor screen and the time counter display return with) an external time code (LTC) that is input to the discontinuous.
to their usual status. unit. You can start recording time code from an initial value
which can be set freely. (See page 36.)
Note
To synchronize the internal time code to Notes
The set data may be lost if you power off the unit
external time code • Use a tape which is recorded in the DVCAM format.
while the above saving operation is in progress.
Wait until the saving operation is completed before (You cannot use the TC insert function with a tape Monitor screen
Input an external time code (LTC) signal to the unit’s recorded in DV format.)
powering off.
TIME CODE IN connector, then set “TC MODE” • The time code recording starts from the current tape 4 Press the ≥ button to select “TC INSERT”.
under the TIME CODE menu item to “EXT REGEN”. position. Cue the tape up beforehand to the required AUTO FUNCTION MENU
Advancement of internal time code The internal time code generator locks onto the start position. QSDI DUBBING TC insert
external time code and starts advancing. Once the TC INSERT
generator • If you use a tape on which ClipLink log data is Time counter display

internal time code generator has become synchronized recorded, the ClipLink log data will be lost.
The internal time code generator can advance in either in this way, you can disconnect the external time code
of two modes, which can be set via “RUN MODE” input and this unit will maintain the synchronized time 1
code.
under the TIME CODE menu item. 2,4
FREE RUN : Advancement starts when the data
saving operation is completed.
Note 3,5
REC RUN : Advancement starts when recording When the selected input mode is “QSDI” (the QSDI SYNC PHASE SC PHASE MENU RESET(NO)
Monitor screen
starts and stops when recording stops. indicator is lit in the INPUT MODE display), setting
“TC MODE” under the TIME CODE menu item to CH-
1/2
MONITOR SELECT
CH-
3/4
CH-
1/3
MIX
CH-
2/4
SET(YES)
7,8 5 Press the ÷ button.

“EXT REGEN” causes the internal time code
To set the current time as the time code’s generator to automatically synchronize with the The following message appears.
initial value external time code input to the unit via the QSDI TC INSERT
interface. 1 Press the MENU button on the menu control panel. Set tape!
SYSTEM MENU Time counter display
In Step 2 above, set “RUN MODE” under the TIME Setup menu
Once an external time code signal has been input, the SETUP MENU
CODE menu item to “FREE RUN”, then set the AUTO FUNCTION Time counter display
current time (format: HH:MM:SS:FF = hours: unit’s internal time code advancement mode and frame HOURS METER INSERT THE TAPE IN
THIS VTR.
minutes:seconds:frame number) in Step 3 and count mode are automatically set as shown below.
subsequent steps. Advancement mode : FREE RUN
Frame count mode : Same as external time code
(drop frame or non-drop frame) ABORT:MENU KEY
Monitor screen
To confirm external synchronization Monitor screen (Continued)
Press the STOP button to put the unit into stop mode, 2 Press the ≥ button to select “AUTO FUNCTION”.
then press the REC button. SYSTEM MENU
Auto func
SETUP MENU
Look at the time counter display and check that the AUTO FUNCTION Time counter display
time code value displayed there matches the external HOURS METER
time code value.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Monitor screen
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
High-Speed and Low-Speed Search: Quickly and

Setting the Time Data Accurately Determining Editing Points
6 Insert the cassette. Use the search function to easily locate the desired
Search Operations on This Unit
scene and to quickly and accurately determine edit
A message to confirm the TC insert operation points.
Once “PB” has been set for “F. FWD” and “REW”
appears.
via AUTO EE SELECT under the OPERATIONAL
TC INSERT
TC insert? FUNCTION menu item (factory default setting:
Time counter display Search Operations via External “PB”), you can use the F FWD button and REW
START TC INSERT? Equipment button for high-speed searching. When using these
buttons for high-speed searches, be sure to set the
You can control the following operation modes of the REMOTE/LOCAL switch on the front panel to
unit either from an editing controller (such as the ES-7, LOCAL.
PVE-500, etc.) connected to the REMOTE connector
START:YES KEY
ABORT:MENU KEY on the rear panel or from a SIRCS-system remote
To do a forward high-speed search
Monitor screen controller (such as the DSRM-10) connected to the
CONTROL S connector on the front panel.
Press and hold the F FWD button. While you are
To cancel the TC insert operation Shuttle : Use this mode to view color playback at
holding down the button, you can view the color
Press the MENU button. speeds ranging from 0 to 32 times normal in both
playback, which is advancing 32 times normal speed.
directions.
7

Press the SET (YES) button.
Note
To do a reverse high-speed search
Time code recording starts from the current tape When controlling the unit from the SVRM-100A
position. for a shuttle-mode search, the maximum possible Press and hold the REW button. While you are
search speed is 16 times normal in both directions. holding down the button, you can view the color
TC INSERT
Executing If you want a faster search than this, hold down playback, which is going at 32 times normal speed in
Time counter display the F FWD or REW button. This allows you to reverse direction.
EXECUTING. view a color playback at 32 times normal in
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TCR 00:00:00:00 forward or reverse direction.
UBR 00:00:00:00
Jog : Use this mode for low-speed search and frame-
by-frame search.
ABORT:MENU KEY Digital slow : Use this mode for noise-free color
Monitor screen playback at speeds ranging from 0 to 1/5 normal in
both directions.
Still : Use this mode to view a still picture of any
When the recording ends, the message “TC field.
INSERT COMPLETED. PUSH THE YES Jog audio : Use this mode to monitor the audio track
BUTTON.” appears on the monitor screen and at speeds ranging from normal to 1/30 normal in
“COMPLETED” appears in the time counter both directions.
display.
Note
8 Press the SET (YES) button to exit the menu. When controlling this unit from external equipment, be
sure to set the REMOTE/LOCAL switch on the unit’s
front panel as follows:
External equipment REMOTE/LOCAL
switch setting
Editing controller connected to REMOTE
REMOTE connector
SIRCS-system remote controller LOCAL
connected to CONTROL S connector
For a description of search operations via external

equipment, see the equipment’s operating instructions.
1-19
1-20
Dubbing Signals in QSDI Format — QSDI Dubbing

Function
Dubbing Signals in QSDI Format
In addition to straightforward tape dubbing, you can 1 Press the MENU button on the menu control panel. 5 Press the ÷ button. To end the dubbing operation while it is in
also use this unit to dub automatically from the SYSTEM MENU progress
beginning of the tape to the end, through an QSDI SETUP MENU Setup menu The following message appears. Press the STOP button.
AUTO FUNCTION Time counter display
interface. HOURS METER QSDI DUBBING
When a tape recorded on a DSR-1/1P Digital (A/V/TC/CM) Set tape! When the dubbing is completed, message
Videocassette Recorder or DSR-130/130P Digital Time counter display “COMPLETED” appears on the monitor screen
INSERT RECORD TAPE IN
Camcorder is dubbed, the ClipLink log data held in the THIS VTR AND SOURCE and in the time counter display.
TAPE IN THE PLAYER VTR.
cassette memory is also copied. The source tape and recording tape are both
automatically rewound to the beginning, and the
Notes cassettes ejected. When the cassette is ejected, this
• Use a tape which is recorded in the DVCAM format. Monitor screen unit returns to the state in step 5.
(A tape recorded in DV format cannot be used as a ABORT:MENU KEY
source tape for QSDI dubbing.) 2 Press the ≥ button to select “AUTO FUNCTION”. Monitor screen 8 To continue by dubbing another tape, repeat steps
• Regardless of the audio recording mode setting of SYSTEM MENU 6 and 7.
SETUP MENU Auto func 6 Insert the source tape in the player, and the
this unit, dubbing is performed with the original AUTO FUNCTION Time counter display
audio recording mode unchanged (two-channel mode HOURS METER recording tape in this unit. 9 When the dubbing is completed, press the MENU
(48 kHz) or four-channel mode (32 kHz)). button to exit the menu.
• Approximately the last 2 minutes of the tape may not A message to confirm the dubbing operation
appears.

be copied because of differences in tape lengths. (If
an Index Picture is recorded in this portion, it may QSDI DUBBING
Start dub? If the following message appears in step 6 for
(A/V/TC/CM)
also not be copied.) an A/V/TC/CM dubbing operation
Time counter display
• A continuous recorded section of approximately 5 QSDI DUBBING
Monitor screen START QSDI DUBBING?
(A/V/TC/CM) CM capacity!
seconds is required before the recording start point. It
is recommended to record beforehand color bars or a
similar signal at the start point of the source tape to
3 Press the ÷ button. CM MEMORY STORAGE
CAPACITY OF THE RECORD
TAPE IS TOO SMALL.
be dubbed on this unit.
This displays the items in the level 1 of the auto START:YES KEY
mode execution menu. ABORT:MENU KEY
To carry out QSDI dubbing, this unit must be
AUTO FUNCTION MENU Monitor screen
connected to the REMOTE and QSDI IN/OUT QSDI DUBBING QSDI DUB
ABORT:MENU KEY
connectors on the DSR-85/85P/80/80P/60/60P. TC INSERT Time counter display To cancel the dubbing operation Monitor screen
For details of the connections and switch settings, see the

Press the MENU button.
section “Connections for QSDI Dubbing.” (Page 64) When carrying out A/V/TC/CM dubbing, the contents
7 Press the SET (YES) button. of the cassette memory of the cassettes inserted in both
this unit and the player are checked.
1,9 The tape is automatically wound back to the If the cassette memory capacity of the source tape is
2,4 Monitor screen
beginning, and dubbing starts. larger than the cassette memory capacity of the
QSDI DUBBING recording tape, the above message appears.
3,4,5 (A/V/TC/CM) Executing
In this case, replace the recording tape by a tape with a
SYNC PHASE SC PHASE MENU RESET(NO)
4 Press the ÷ button to display the menu level 2 for Time counter display larger cassette memory capacity.
the item “QSDI DUBBING”, and select the EXECUTING.
MONITOR SELECT XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SET(YES)
dubbing data with the ≥ button.
CH-
1/2
CH-
3/4
CH-
1/3
MIX
CH-
2/4
7 Example: Selecting “A/V/TC/CM”
TCR 00:00:00:00
UBR 00:00:00:00
AUTO FUNCTION MENU

QSDI DUBBING >A/V/TC/CM
A/V Time counter display ABORT:MENU KEY
A/V/TC
A/V/TC/CM Monitor screen
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Monitor screen
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Dubbing Signals in QSDI Format Menu Organization
Chapter 4 Menu Settings

If the following message appears in step 7 for As shown in the figure below, the menu system The items of the setup menu are divided into several
an A/V/TC/CM dubbing operation consists of four levels and is functionally divided into functional groups on level 1, and except for the MENU
QSDI DUBBING three subsystems: the setup menu, the auto mode GRADE item the settings themselves are made on
(A/V/TC/CM) Copy CM?
(AUTO FUNCTION) execution menu and the digital level 2 or level 3.
QSDI DUBBING IS ABORTED.
hours meter display menu. This chapter mainly Also, the menu items are divided into two categories
EXECUTE CM COPY? describes the setup menu, showing its contents and according to how frequently they are accessed: the
how to operate it. “basic” items, to which frequent access is normally
required, and the “enhanced” items, which are less
For details of the auto mode execution menu, see the frequently used. In the following figure, the items
COPY :YES KEY sections “Dubbing Signals in QSDI Format” (page 38) and shown in boldface are basic items, and the other items
NOT COPY:NO KEY “Rerecording the Time Code — TC Insert Function” (page are enhanced items.
35).
The menu settings are saved in non-volatile memory,
When carrying out A/V/TC/CM dubbing, if you press For details of the digital clock display, see the section
“Regular Checks” (page 69). which means they are not erased when you power off
the STOP button to stop dubbing in step 7, or if the unit after executing the setting operation.
dubbing stops because the source tape is longer than
the recording tape, the above message appears, to Menu organization
confirm whether or not to copy the contents of the Menu selection level Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
cassette memory.
SETUP MENU OPERATIONAL FUNCTION AUTO EE SELECT CASSETTE OUT
To copy the contents of the cassette memory, press the
F.FWD/REW
SET (YES) button. LOCAL ENABLE STOP
MAX SRCH SPEED STANDBY OFF
If you do not wish to copy the contents of the cassette AUTO REW
PREROLL TIME
memory, press the RESET (NO) button. If you press AFTER CUE-UP
PLAY START
the RESET (NO) button, however, the contents of the A1 EDIT CH
cassette memory may not agree with the material A2 EDIT CH
A MODE CHANGE
recorded on the tape. QSDI AUDIO MON

DISPLAY CONTROL CHARA. DISPLAY
CHARA. POSITION
CHARA. TYPE
DISPLAY INFO
SUB STATUS
MENU DISPLAY
PEAK HOLD
OVER DISP HOLD
BRIGHTNESS
ALARM
REF. ALARM
TIME CODE TC MODE

RUN MODE
DF MODE (DSR-80 only)
UB BINARY GP.
TC EE OUT MODE
TAPE PROTECTION FROM STOP STOP TIMER

NEXT MODE
FROM STILL STILL TIMER
NEXT MODE
VIDEO CONTROL STILL MODE
SETUP REMOVE (DSR-80 only)
SETUP ADD (DSR-80 only)
SYNC ON GREEN
CC(F1) BLANK
CC(F2) BLANK
AUDIO CONTROL DIGITAL INPUT

REC POINT MUTE
REF LEVEL
OUTPUT LEVEL
MENU GRADE AUDIO MUTE
AUTO FUNCTION QSDI DUBBING A/V

A/V/TC
TC INSERT A/V/TC/CM
HOURS METER T1:OPERATION

T2:DRUM ROTATION
T3:TAPE RUNNING
CT:THREADING
1-21
40 Chapter 3 Convenient Functions for Editing Operation Chapter 4 Menu Settings 41

1-22
Menu Contents
Indication in monitor Indication in time Menu contents (Continued)

SETUP Menu screen counter display OPERATIONAL FUNCTION [Operational]: Operation Description of settings
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION [Operational] settings
The purpose and settings of the setup menu items are PREROLL TIME [> Preroll]: Set the preroll time. The preroll time can be set in one-second increments to
CASSETTE OUT [>> Cass. out]
described below. between 0 and 15 seconds (0 SEC [>> 0 SEC] to 15 SEC
∗EE [>>> EE] [>> 15 SEC]). When an editing controller such as the PVE-
500 has been connected, this setting is disabled and the
Indications of menu Items and settings editing controller’s setting is in effect. Operations such as the
• In the table below entitled “Menu Contents”, the • Settings that have an asterisk in front of them (such
preroll time setting and the time data switching operation are
indication of each menu item or setting on the as ∗EE) are factory default settings. also performed on the editing controller.
monitor screen is shown first, then the indication of • On the time counter display, one to three “>” symbols Factory default setting: 5 SEC [>> 5 sec]
the same item or setting on the time counter display may precede item or setting indications depending on AFTER CUE-UP [> After CUE]: Select the operating mode ∗STOP [>> STOP]: Stop mode
the current menu level. Larger numbers of “>” following cue-up. STILL [>> STILL]: Output still pictures in search mode.
of this unit is shown in square brackets ([ ]).
(Examples) symbols indicate lower menu levels. PLAY START [> PLAY start]: Set the timing for switching 16 FRAME DELAY [>> 16 delay] to 4 FRAME DELAY
from stop mode to playback mode. [>> 4 delay]: The larger the numerical value, the longer the
In an editing system including an editing controller such as delay. By adjusting this setting, it is possible to reduce the
Menu contents the PVE-500, adjusting this setting so that the delay before phase synchronization time and preroll time during editing.
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION [Operational]: Operation Description of settings switching to playback mode is the same on all the decks of Factory default setting: 5 FRAME DELAY [>> 5 delay] (for
settings the editing system means that there is no longer a need to DSR-80) or 4 FRAME DELAY [>> 4 delay] (for DSR-80P)
AUTO EE SELECT [> Auto CASSETTE OUT [>> Cass. ∗EE [>>> EE]: Output video and audio signals from other synchronize the decks for editing, and the preroll time can
EE]: Determine whether out]: Operations when the equipment. be shortened.
the unit enters EE mode or cassette has been ejected PB [>>> PB]: Mute video and audio signals. A1 EDIT CH [> A1 Edit CH]: Determine which audio channel ∗CH-1 [>> CH-1]: Assign to channel 1.
PB mode when audio and F. FWD/REWa) [>> F. FWD/ EE [>>> EE]: Output video and audio signals from other the EDIT PRESET command set on an editing controller CH-2 [>> CH-2]: Assign to channel 2.
video signals from other REW]: Operations when in equipment. (such as the PVE-500) for A1 is assigned to. CH-3 [>> CH-3]: Assign to channel 3.
equipment are input. fast forward or rewind ∗PB [>>> PB]: Mute video and audio signals. (However, CH-1 & CH-2 [>> CH-1&2]: Assign to channel 1 and channel
When this unit is used as mode holding down the F FWD or REW button on the front panel 2.
the recorder for cut editing, makes this setting ineffective temporarily and allows you to
it is possible to output the A2 EDIT CH [> A2 Edit CH]: Determine which audio channel ∗CH-2 [>> CH-2]: Assign to channel 2.
perform a picture search at 32 times normal speed in
input audio and video the EDIT PRESET command set on an editing controller CH-3 [>> CH-3]: Assign to channel 3.
forward or reverse direction.)
signals to the monitor. The (such as the PVE-500) for A2 is assigned to. CH-4 [>> CH-4]: Assign to channel 4.
STOP [>> STOP]: EE [>>> EE]: Output video and audio signals from other

term “EE” mode is used to CH-3 & CH-4 [>> CH-3&4]: Assign to channel 3 and channel
refer to this feature, which Operations when in stop equipment. 4.
enables the entire editing mode ∗PB [>>> PB]: The unit enters playback mode and outputs a
operation to be carried out still picture. A MODE CHANGE [> Aud change]: Determine whether or ∗OFF [>> OFF]: Do not permit.
with a single monitor. not to permit an insert editing that uses a different audio ON [>> ON]: Permit.
STANDBY OFF [>> STBY EE [>>> EE]: Output video and audio signals from other recording mode (2- or 4-channel mode) from that which
OFF]: Operations when in equipment was used for the tape loaded in the recorder.
standby off mode ∗PB [>>> PB]: The unit enters playback mode and outputs a
still picture. QSDI AUDIO MON [> QSDI A mon]: Determine what type of ∗QSDI [>> QSDI]: Output the input QSDI audio as it is.
audio signal to be output as EE audio when the selected ANALOG [>> Analog]: Automatically switch audio input
LOCAL ENABLE [> Local ENA]: Select which of the tape ALL DISABLE [>> All DIS]: All of the tape transport control input is QSDI. selection and output analog audio.
transport control buttons (EJECT, REW, PLAY, F FWD, buttons are disabled. AES/EBU [>> AES/EBU]: Automatically switch audio input
STOP, REC) operate when the REMOTE/LOCAL switch is ∗STOP & EJECT [>> STOP & E]: Only the STOP and EJECT selection and output AES/EBU format digital audio.
set to REMOTE. buttons are enabled.
SDI [>> SDI]: Automatically switch audio input selection and
ALL ENABLE [>> All ENA]: All of the tape transport control output SDI format digital audio.
buttons are enabled, and settings such as preroll time
change or time data display selection are effective.
MAX SRCH SPEED [> Max SRCH]: Set the maximum value × 16 [>> × 16]: Restrict the search speed to the maximum 16 DISPLAY CONTROL [Display]: Settings related to Description of settings
for search mode. times normal for which the picture can be seen on the indications on the monitor and the unit
monitor. Use this setting when using search mode for CHARA. DISPLAY [> Chara disp]: Determine whether or not ∗ON [>> ON]: Output text.
cueing. to output text (such as time code numbers) from the VIDEO OFF [>> OFF]: Do not output text. (In spite of this setting,
∗× 32 [>> × 32]: Restrict the search speed to the maximum OUT 2 (SUPER) connector. pressing the MENU button causes menu text to be output.)
32 times normal for which the picture can be seen on the
CHARA. POSITION [> Chara pos]: Set the position of text Use ¿ ÷ ˘ ≥ buttons on the menu control panel to adjust
monitor. Use this setting when using search mode for
superimposed on output from the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER) the indication position while watching the monitor screen.
cueing.
connector to the monitor.
× 85 [>> × 85]: Allow searching at up to the maximum tape
Press the MENU button to confirm the setting and return to
transport speed of 85 times normal. The picture cannot be
the level 1 of the setup menu.
seen on the monitor at this speed.
AUTO REW [> AUTO REW]: Determine whether or not to ∗ENABLE [>> ENABLE]: Rewind automatically. (Continued)
rewind automatically when playback reaches the end of a DISABLE [>> DISABLE]: Do not rewind automatically.
tape.
a) Note (Continued)
Set this item to “PB” when you want to use the F FWD speed. If this item is set to “EE”, holding down the F
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
and REW buttons to view playback at 32 times normal FWD and REW buttons produces EE pictures.
42 Chapter 4 Menu Settings Chapter 4 Menu Settings 43

DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Menu Contents
Menu contents (Continued) Menu contents (Continued)

DISPLAY CONTROL [Display]: Settings related to Description of settings DISPLAY CONTROL [Display]: Settings related to Description of settings
indications on the monitor and the unit indications on the monitor and the unit
CHARA. TYPE [> Chara type]: Set the type of characters in Make the following settings while watching the monitor OVER DISP HOLD [> Hold OVER]: Determine whether or not ∗OFF [>> OFF]: Do not hold the OVER indication display.
text superimposed on output from the VIDEO OUT 2 screen. to hold the OVER indication display on the audio level ON [>> ON (HOLD)]: Hold the OVER indication display.
(SUPER) connector to the monitor. ∗WHITE (WITH BKGD) [>> White]: White characters on black meter once the indication lights.
background Note
BLACK (WITH BKGD) [>> Black]: Black characters on white With “ON” selected, once the display is held it will remain held
background unless you change the setting to “OFF”.
WHITE/OUTLINE [>> W/outline]: White characters with black BRIGHTNESS [> Brightness]: Set the brightness of front Set brightness as a percentage of the maximum.
outline panel indicators. ∗100% [>> 100%]
BLACK/OUTLINE [>> B/outline]: Black characters with white 66% [>> 66%]
outline 33% [>> 33%]
ALARM [> ALARM]: Determine whether alarm messages are ∗ON [>> ON]: Alarm messages are issued.
Press the MENU button to confirm the setting and return to issued or not. OFF [>> OFF]: Alarm messages are not issued.
REF. ALARM [> REF ALARM]: Determine whether alarm ON [>> ON]: Alarm messages are issued.
DISPLAY INFO [> DISP info]: Select information ∗TIME DATA & STATUS [>> Time&STA]: Time data and messages related to reference video signal are issued or ∗ON (LIMITED) [>> ON (Limit)]: Alarm messages are issued
superimposed on output from the VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER) operating mode indications not. only during recording mode, EE mode, and while editing.
connector to the monitor. TIME DATA & UB [>> Time&UB]: Time data selected using OFF [>> OFF]: Alarm messages are not issued.
the COUNTER SELECT button, and user bit data. (When
user bit data is selected using the COUNTER SELECT
button, user bit data and time code are output.) TIME CODE [Time code]: Settings related to the time code Description of settings
TIME DATA & CNT [>> Time&CNT]: Time data selected generator
using the COUNTER SELECT button, and CNT value. TC MODE [> TC MODE]: Determine whether to use internal ∗INT PRESET [>> INT]: Use internal time code.
(When CNT is selected using the COUNTER SELECT time code (generated by the internal time code generator) EXT REGEN [>> EXT]: Use external time code.
button, CNT value and time code are output.) or external time code.
TIME DATA ONLY [>> Time]: Only time data Notes
REC DATE & TIME [>> REC Date]: The time data selected • To be able to input an LTC signal from external equipment, it
with the COUNTER SELECT button is shown on the time is necessary to install the optional DSBK-130/130P Time
counter display, and the date and time of recording are Code Input/Output Board in this unit.

shown on the monitor screen. • When the selected input mode is “QSDI” (the QSDI indicator
SUB STATUS [> Sub status]: Select supplementary status ∗OFF [>> OFF]: Nothing of supplementary status information. is lit in the INPUT MODE display), setting “TC MODE” under
information superimposed on output from the VIDEO OUT EDIT PRESET [>> Edit Pre]: Indications of the editing mode the TIME CODE menu item to “EXT REGEN” causes the
2 (SUPER) connector to the monitor. settings made from the connected editing controller. internal time code generator to automatically synchronize
PB FORMAT [>> Format]: Indication of the recording format with the external time code input to the unit via the QSDI
which was used for the tape being played back. interface.
TC MODE [>> TC mode]: Indications of the operating mode RUN MODE [> RUN mode]: Select the time code generator’s ∗FREE RUN [>> FREE RUN]: Time code generator keeps
of internal time code generator. advancement (RUN) mode. running.
ALL [>> ALL]: All of the above-mentioned items of REC RUN [>> REC RUN]: Time code generator only runs
supplementary status information. while recording.
Note
For details of supplementary status information displayed on
the monitor when a setting other than “OFF” is selected, see Set to “FREE RUN” when carrying out editing with an editing
“Displaying Supplementary Status Information” (page 55). controller. With the “REC RUN” setting, editing and other
operations will not be carried out correctly.
MENU DISPLAY [> Menu DISP]: Set the type of characters in Make the following settings while watching the monitor
menu text superimposed on output from the VIDEO OUT 2 screen. (Only on DSR-80) ∗ON (DF) [>> ON (DF)]: Drop frame mode
DF MODE [> DF mode]: Select whether the time code OFF (NDF) [>> OFF (NDF)]: Non-drop frame mode
(SUPER) connector to the monitor. ∗WHITE [WITH BKGD] [>> White]: White characters on black
background generator and time counter operate in drop frame mode or
non-drop frame mode.
BLACK [WITH BKGD] [>> Black]: Black characters on white
background Normally select drop frame mode, to keep in sync with real
time. The non-drop frame mode is useful for example
WHITE/OUTLINE [>> W/outline]: White characters with black
when using computer graphics, and working on a frame
outline
count basis.
BLACK/OUTLINE [>> B/outline]: Black characters with white
outline UB BINARY GP. [> UB Binary Gp]: Select the user bit ∗000: NOT SPECIFIED [>> 000]: Character set not specified
binary group flag of the time code generator 001: ISO CHARACTER [>> 001]: 8-bit characters
Press the MENU button to confirm the setting and return to conforming to ISO 646 and ISO 2022
Note 010: UNASSIGNED-1 [>> 010]: Undefined
When the TC MODE menu item is set to EXT REGEN, the 011: UNASSIGNED-2 [>> 011]: Undefined
PEAK HOLD [> Peak hold]: Set the peak hold time for audio 1.5 SEC [>> 1.5 SEC] to *OFF [>> OFF]: Set the time from user-bit binary group flag setting follows the setting on the 100: UNASSIGNED-3 [>> 100]: Undefined
level meter. zero (OFF) to 1.5 seconds in steps of 0.1 second. time code input to this unit. 101: PAGE/LINE [>> 101]: Mutliplex
(Continued) 110: UNASSIGNED-4 [>> 110]: Undefined
111: UNASSIGNED-5 [>> 111]: Undefined
(Continued)
1-23

1-24
Menu Contents
Menu contents (Continued) Menu contents (Continued)

TIME CODE [Time code]: Settings related to the time code Description of settings VIDEO CONTROL [Video]: Settings related to video Description of setting
generator control
TC EE OUT MODE [>TC out mod]: This only appears when ∗ MUTE [>>mute]: Output no timecode. STILL MODE [> STILL mod]: Determine whether the image FRAME STILL [>> Frame]: Output the image of a whole
the optional DSBK-130/130P Timecode Input/Output Board THROUGH [>> through]: Output LTC with the phase of a whole frame or a field is output in still playback mode. frame.
is installed. synchronized to the signal input to the TIME CODE IN ∗FIELD 1 STILL [>> Field 1]: Output the image of field 1 only.
It controls the phase of the LTC signal output when connector. Use this mode when the signal input to the FIELD 2 STILL [>> Field 2]: Output the image of field 2 only.
recording timecode and in “STOP REC” mode (forced EE VIDEO IN connectors is not synchronized to the reference (Only on DSR-80) ∗OFF [>> OFF]: Do not remove black setup.
mode). video signal. (See the example configuration on page 48.) SETUP REMOVE [> Setup rmv]: Determine whether or not to ON [>> ON]: Remove black setup.
VIDEO INPUT PHASE [>> V input]: Output LTC with the remove black setup from analog video input signals.
phase synchronized to the input video signal. Use this (Only on DSR-80) ∗OFF [>> OFF]: Do not add black setup.
mode when using the video input in a bridging (loop- SETUP ADD [> Setup add]: Determine whether or not to add ON [>> ON]: Add black setup.
through) connection. (See the example configuration on black setup to analog video output signals.
page 48.)
SYNC ON GREEN: When outputting RGB signals from the ∗ON [>>ON]: Include a sync signal (use the RGB three-wire
VIDEO OUTPUT PHASE [>> V output]: Output LTC with the
COMPONENT VIDEO Y, R–Y, and B–Y/RGB OUT mode).
phase synchronized to the output video signal. Use this
connectors, select whether or not to include a sync signal OFF [>>OFF]: Do not include a sync signal. (Use the RGB
mode when using a bridging (loop-through) connection
in the green signal. four-wire mode, and output the sync signal from the REF
from the output video to the input video. (See the example
VIDEO OUT connector.)
configuration on page 49.)
CC(F1)BLANK [>CC1 blank]: Select whether or not to blank ∗OFF [>>OFF]: Do not blank.
the closed caption first field signal. ON [>>ON]: Blank.
TAPE PROTECTION [Tape protect]: Settings related to Description of settings
tape and video head protection CC(F2)BLANK [>CC2 blank]: Select whether or not to blank ∗OFF [>>OFF]: Do not blank.
the closed caption second field signal. ON [>>ON]: Blank.
FROM STOP [> From STOP TIMER [>> STP timer]: 30 MIN [>>> 30 min] to 0.5 SEC [>>> 0.5 sec]: Select time
STOP]: Set the time to Set the time to switch from from 16 settings ranging from 0.5 seconds to 30 minutes in
switch from stop mode to stop mode to tape protection steps of 0.1 second. AUDIO CONTROL [Audio]: Settings related to audio Description of setting
tape protection mode and mode. Factory default setting: 8MIN [>>> 8min] control
select the mode for ∗STANDBY OFF [>>> STANDBY]: Standby off mode
NEXT MODE [>>> Next mode]: DIGITAL INPUT [> Digi. Input]: Enable or disable the AUDIO ∗VARIABLE [>> Variable]: Enable the control knobs.
protecting the video Select tape protection mode TENSION RELEASE [>>> T.RLSE]: The tape tension is INPUT LEVEL control knobs to work for AES/EBU, SDI, or BYPASS [>> Bypass]: Disable the control knobs.
heads and video tape. when time set in STOP released, but the picture can still be seen on the monitor. QSDI format digital audio input.

TIMER setting elapses. REC POINT MUTE [> REC pt mute]: Determine whether or ∗OFF [>> OFF]: Mute.
Note not to mute audio at the joints of recordings. ON [>> ON]: Do not mute.
When the unit is in tension release mode, the head drum is REF LEVEL [> REF Level]: Select reference audio level. Select the level from among the following three:
still rotating, so the picture can be output and monitored. That
–12dB [>> –12dB], –18dB [>> –18dB], and
is, it is still in “standby on” mode (i.e. is on standby).
Therefore, care should be taken over the setting if it is –20dB [>> –20dB]
critically important whether the unit is in “standby on” or Factory default setting: –20 dB (DSR-80), –18 dB (DSR-
“standby off” mode (for example when the unit is used for 80P)
broadcasting). OUTPUT LEVEL [>OUT Level]: Select the audio output Select the level from the following three settings: *+4dB
FROM STILL [> From STILL TIMER [>> STL timer]: 30 MIN [>>> 30 min] to 0.5 SEC [>>> 0.5 sec]: Select time reference level. [>>+4dB], 0dB [>>0dB], –6dB [>>–6dB],
STILL]: Set the time to Set the time to switch from from 16 settings ranging from 0.5 seconds to 30 minutes in AUDIO MUTE [>Audio mute]: Select whether or not to mute ON [>>ON]: Mute.
switch from still search still search mode or steps of 0.1 second. the output until the audio signal has stabilized, in the ∗OFF [>>OFF]: Do not mute. (This reduces the time delay
mode or playback pause playback pause mode to Factory default setting: 8MIN [>>> 8min] transition from still/search mode to playback. until the audio signal is output.)
mode to tape protection tape protection mode.
mode. Also select the NEXT MODE [>>> Next mode]: ∗STEP FWD [>>> Step]: The tape is advanced at 1/30 normal Notes
type of tape protection Select the type of tape speed for 2 seconds.
mode to follow still search protection mode to follow • In the transition from the stop mode to playback, muting is
STANDBY OFF [>>> STANDBY]: Standby off mode
mode when the set time still search mode when the always applied until the audio signal has stabilized.
TENSION RELEASE [>>> T.RLSE]: The tape tension is
elapses (playback pause time set in “STILL TIMER” released, but the picture can still be seen on the monitor. • The search speeds at which an audio signal can be output
mode is always followed elapses. vary from model to model.
by tension release mode).
Note
When the unit is in step forward or tension release mode, the MENU GRADE [Menu grade]: Selection of menu items to Description of settings
head drum is still rotating, so the picture can be output and be displayed
monitored. That is, it is still in “standby on” mode (i.e. is on Determine whether to display basic items only or both basic ∗BASIC [> Basic]: Display basic items only.
standby). Therefore, care should be taken over the setting if and enhanced items on the monitor screen and on the time ENHANCED [> Enhanced]: Display both basic and enhanced
it is critically important whether the unit is in “standby on” or counter display when using the menu. items.
“standby off” mode (for example when the unit is used for
broadcasting).
DSR-80/80P/60/60P

DSR-80/80P/60/60P
TC EE OUT MODE settings • VIDEO INPUT PHASE mode • VIDEO OUTPUT PHASE mode
Use the following as reference information when The timecode output signal is synchronized to the The timecode output signal is synchronized to the
setting “TC EE OUT MODE” (see page 46). input video signal. output video signal.
This mode is appropriate when the output from a This mode is appropriate when the output from a
• THROUGH mode single device is recorded on a number of VCRs. The single device is output to a number of VCRs with
In this mode, the LTC signal is output with the phase connections are loop-through connections. separate cables for video, audio, and timecode.
synchronized to the input timecode signal, and is In this mode, the same timecode is recorded on all of In this mode, the same timecode is recorded on all of
appropriate when recording signals from multiple the VCRs 1 to n. the VCRs 1 to n.
devices on a number of VCRs.
When the camcorder is in genlock mode the timecode VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN
precision is ±0 frames, and when not in genlock VIDEO LOOP THRU
AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT
mode is ±1 frame. TIME CODE IN
AUDIO IN
TIME CODE OUT
TIME CODE OUT AUDIO OUT
VIDEO IN Input device DSR-80/80P (1st unit) TIME CODE IN
(VCR, camera, etc.) Input device
AUDIO IN (VCR, camera, etc.) TIME CODE OUT
TIME CODE IN VIDEO IN
DSR-80/80P (1st unit)
Camcorder 1 TIME CODE OUT VIDEO LOOP THRU
DSR-80/80P (1st unit) TIME CODE IN VIDEO IN
TIME CODE OUT VIDEO OUT
VIDEO IN DSR-80/80P (2nd unit) AUDIO IN
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT
TIME CODE IN TIME CODE IN
Camcorder 2 TIME CODE OUT TIME CODE OUT

DSR-80/80P (2nd unit) DSR-80/80P (2nd unit)
VIDEO IN
VIDEO LOOP THRU
TIME CODE IN
TIME CODE OUT VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN DSR-80/80P (nth unit) VIDEO OUT
AUDIO IN AUDIO IN
TIME CODE IN Composite video or SDI (video and audio) signal
AUDIO OUT
Timecode signal
Camcorder n TIME CODE OUT TIME CODE IN
DSR-80/80P (nth unit) TIME CODE OUT
DSR-80/80P (nth unit)

Composite video or S-video signal • Composite video signal
Audio signal • S-video signal
Timecode signal • Analog component signal
• SDI signal
Audio signal
Timecode signal
1-25

1-26
Menu Contents Changing Menu Settings
Auto mode (AUTO FUNCTION) execution menu This section explains how to change menu settings. 1 Press the MENU button on the menu control panel.
The following table shows the purpose and function of For details of the use of individual items, see the sections
“Dubbing Signals in QSDI Format” (page 38) and The menu selection level display appears on the
the items in the auto mode execution menu. Buttons Used to Change monitor, with “SETUP MENU” selected (shown in
“Rerecording the Time Code — TC Insert Function” (page
35).
Settings reverse video).
The time counter display of this unit shows only
Use the following buttons on the menu control panel to the currently selected item. When the item name is
Menu contents change the menu settings. long, it is abbreviated.
QSDI DUBBING [QSDI dub]: Selection of data for QSDI Description of setting Menu control buttons Functions
dubbing
MENU button • Opens the menu and launches Menu selection level display
For dubbing through the QSDI interface, select data that the A/V [> A/V]: Dub the audio and video. menu control mode.
dubbing applies to. A/V/TC [> A/V/TC]: Dub the audio, video, and time code. • Closes the menu and exits menu SYSTEM MENU
A/V/TC/CM [> A/V/TC/CM]: Dub the audio, video, time code, control mode. SETUP MENU Setup menu
and cassette memory contents. AUTO FUNCTION Time counter display
˘ and ≥ buttons These buttons move the HOURS METER
Note highlighted cursor up and down
within the current level to select
When “A/V” is selected, the time code recorded follows the an item or setting. Hold down one
setting of the TIME CODE item in the setup menu. of these buttons to make the
highlighted cursor move
TC INSERT [TC insert]: Time code rewriting Description of setting continuously.
Rewrite the time code from an initial value which can be set — ¿ and ÷ buttons • Press the ÷ button to go down
freely. one level. Monitor screen
• Press the ¿ button to go up
one level.
Hold down one of these buttons to
make the highlighted cursor move
2 Press the ÷ button.
continuously.
RESET (NO) button • Returns the setting to the factory This displays all items in the menu level 1.

default setting.
• Sends a negative response to Level-1 menu display
prompts on the monitor screen.
SETUP MENU
SET (YES) button • Saves the new setting in
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION Operational
memory.
DISPLAY CONTROL Time counter display
• Sends a positive response to TIME CODE
prompts on the monitor screen.
MENU GRADE :BASIC
Changing the Settings of Basic

Items
Monitor screen
The factory default setting is to display only basic
items. To change the settings of basic items proceed as
follows. 3 Press the ≥ or ˘ button, to select the required
item.
1 Example: Display when “DISPLAY CONTROL” is selected
3, 5, 7 SETUP MENU
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION Display
2, 4, 6 DISPLAY CONTROL
TIME CODE
MENU GRADE :BASIC

MONITOR SELECT
SET(YES)
CH-
1/2
CH-
3/4
CH-
1/3
MIX
CH-
2/4
9
8
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Monitor screen
(Continued)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Changing Menu Settings
4 Press the ÷ button. 7 Press the ≥ or ˘ button to change the setting of Meanings of indications on the monitor
Changing the Settings of
the item. screen
This displays the menu level 2 for the menu item On-screen indication Meaning
Enhanced Items
SETUP MENU
selected in step 3. DISPLAY CONTROL >> 33%
Right-pointing arrow at the Pressing the ÷ button
Example: Level-2 display for “DISPLAY CONTROL”
BRIGHTNESS :33% Time counter display right of a menu item (See switches to the next lower To change the settings of enhanced items, first carry
* 100%
66% step 1 on page 51) menu level or to a setting out the procedure in the previous section “Displaying
SETUP MENU 33% selection screen. Enhanced Items,” then proceed as follows.
DISPLAY CONTROL > Chara disp Left-pointing arrow at the Pressing the ¿ button returns
CHARA.DISPLAY :ON Time counter display left of a menu item (See to the previous (higher) menu
CHARA.POSITION
CHARA.TYPE :WHITE step 4 on page 52.) level. 1 2
DISPLAY INFO :T&STA Character string at the Current setting of the menu
SUB STATUS :OFF right of a menu item (See item. SYNC PHASE SC PHASE MENU RESET(NO)
MENU DISPLAY :WHITE Current settings

Monitor screen step 4 on page 52.) When shown with a colon: the
PEAK HOLD :OFF MONITOR SELECT
SET(YES)
OVER DISP HOLD :OFF current setting is the same CH-
1/2
CH-
3/4
CH-
1/3
CH-
2/4
8 as the factory default. MIX

BRIGHTNESS :100% To change other settings, press the ¿ button to
ALARM :ON When shown with a raised dot:
return to the previous screen, then repeat steps 5 to the current setting is
Monitor screen
7 as required. different from the factory 3 4
default. (See step 2 on this
5 Press the ≥ or ˘ button to select the item whose 9 When you have completed the settings, press the
page.)
setting you wish to change. SET (YES) button.
An asterisk by a complete
list of settings (See step 6
Factory default setting. 1 Press the MENU button on the menu control panel.
For menu items with a level 3, press the ÷ button on page 52)
to go to the level 3, then press the ≥ or ˘ button to The message “NOW SAVING...” appears on the The menu selection level display appears on the
select the item whose setting you wish to change. monitor screen, and “Saving...” appears in the time monitor.
Example: Display when “BRIGHTNESS” is selected counter display, while the new settings are saved in
SETUP MENU the unit’s memory. Displaying Enhanced Items 2 Press the ÷ button.
DISPLAY CONTROL > Brightness When the saving operation is completed, the
CHARA.DISPLAY :ON

monitor screen and time counter display return to The factory default setting is not to display enhanced This displays all basic and enhanced items in the
CHARA.POSITION
CHARA.TYPE :WHITE their normal indications. items. menu level 1.
DISPLAY INFO :T&STA To display enhanced items, use the procedure in the
SUB STATUS :OFF
MENU DISPLAY :WHITE Notes previous section, “Changing the Settings of Basic Level-1 menu display
PEAK HOLD :OFF Items,” to set the item “MENU GRADE” to
OVER DISP HOLD :OFF
• If you power off the unit before setting operation SETUP MENU
BRIGHTNESS :100% is completed, settings will be lost. Wait until the “ENHANCED.” (In step 3 on page 51 select “MENU OPERATIONAL FUNCTION Menu grade
ALARM :ON saving is completed before powering off the unit. GRADE”, and select “ENHANCED,” then press the DISPLAY CONTROL Time counter display
TIME CODE
Monitor screen
• If instead of pressing the SET (YES) button you SET (YES) button to save the setting in memory.) TAPE PROTECTION
press the MENU button, the new settings are not Once the menu item “MENU GRADE” is set to VIDEO CONTROL
6 Press the ÷ button. saved. The message “ABORT !” appears both on “ENHANCED,” when you press the MENU button AUDIO CONTROL
MENU GRADE •ENHAN
the monitor screen and in the time counter display and the ÷ button to display the SETUP menu, all
Current settings
This displays all possible settings for the item for 0.5 seconds, and the system forcibly exits the basic and enhanced items in the menu level 1 appear.
selected in step 5. menus. To change more than one setting, be sure
SETUP MENU
>> 100% after making the settings to press the SET (YES) Monitor screen
DISPLAY CONTROL
BRIGHTNESS :100% Time counter display
button.
* 100%
66%
3 Follow the same procedure as in steps 3 to 8 of the
33% procedure in the section “Changing the Settings of
Basic Items,” using the arrow buttons to select an
item and change its setting.
(Continued)
Monitor screen
1-27

1-28
Changing Menu Settings Displaying Supplementary Status Information
4 When you have completed the settings, press the 4 Press the SET (YES) button. When you set “SUB STATUS” under the DISPLAY When “SUB STATUS” is set to “TC MODE”:
SET (YES) button. CONTROL menu item to other than “OFF”, you can On-screen Meaning
The message “NOW SAVING...” appears on the view supplementary status information on the monitor indication
The message “NOW SAVING...” appears on the monitor screen, and “Saving...” appears in the time screen below the operating mode display area. INT PRESET The internal time code generator is
monitor screen, and “Saving...” appears in the time counter display, while the settings of all items are FREE [IP F] operating in FREE RUN mode.
counter display, while the new settings are saved in returned to their factory defaults, and these factory INT PRESET REC The internal time code generator is
[IP R] operating in REC RUN mode.
the unit’s memory. defaults are saved in the unit’s memory. T C R 0 0 : 0 4 . 4 7 . 0 7
When the saving operation is completed, the EXT LTC-T&U The internal time code generator is in
P L A Y L O C K
Note [ELTU] synchronization with external time
monitor screen and time counter display return to I N S V A 1 23 4 T C code (LTC) input to the unit via
their normal indications. If you power off the unit while settings are being optional DSBK-130/130P board and is
saved, settings may not be correctly returned to generating the same time code value
Supplementary status information and user bit value as those of the
their factory defaults. Wait until the saving is external time code.
completed before powering off the unit.
Returning Menu Settings to Their EXT QSDI-T&U The internal time code generator is in
[EQTU] synchronization with external time
Factory Defaults To abandon the resetting operation The following items of supplementary status code input to the unit via QSDI
Instead of pressing the SET (YES) button, press the information are displayed depending on the setting of interface and is generating the same
After making menu setting changes, to return settings “SUB STATUS”. time code value and user bit value as
RESET (NO) button. The display returns to menu level those of the external time code.
to their factory defaults, use the following procedure. 1, leaving the settings unchanged. Setting of “SUB Items of supplementary
STATUS” information displayed
Display format of supplementary status
EDIT PRESET Editing mode settings made on the
To return a particular setting to its factory editing controller information when “SUB STATUS” is set to
default PB FORMAT Recording format of the tape being
“ALL”
played back All items of supplementary status information are
TC MODE Operating mode of the internal time displayed in the order shown below.
In the display for changing the setting in question,
code generator
press the RESET (NO) button. (Example)

ALL All of the above items
V 1 2 3 4 T D C I P F
Carry out the procedure in the section “Changing the
Settings of Basic Items” (page 51) up to step 6, then The following tables show the on-screen indications of
with the list of the setting displayed (in the example, if supplementary information and their meaning.
Editing mode settings made Operating mode of the
the setting has been changed it will be “66%” or In each table, the indications given in brackets such as on the editing controller internal time code generator
“33%”) press the RESET (NO) button, to return the [ASM] are the indications displayed when “SUB
Recording format of the
setting to its factory default of “100%”. STATUS” is set to “ALL”. (For the display format tape being played back
when “ALL” is selected, see the next paragraph.)
To return all settings to their factory When “SUB STATUS” is set to “EDIT PRESET”:
defaults On-screen Meaning
indication
1 Press the MENU button on the menu control panel, ASM [ASM] Assemble editing mode
to display the menu selection. INS V A1234 TC INS: Insert editing mode
[V1234T] V A1234 TC: Channel or signal
2 Press the ÷ button, to display level 1 of the setup
selected for insert editing
V: Video
menu. A1234: Audio 1, 2, 3, 4
TC: Time code
3 Press the RESET (NO) button.
When “SUB STATUS” is set to “PB FORMAT”:
A message appears, to confirm whether or not you On-screen Meaning
wish to return all settings to their factory defaults. indication
Monitor screen message “INITIALIZE ALL ITEMS TO DVCAM [DC] DVCAM format
FACTORY PRESET DV [D] DV format (SP mode)
VALUES?”
DV(LP) [D] DV format (LP mode)
Message in the time “Init setup?”
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
counter display

DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Connections for a Digital Non-Linear Editing

System
Chapter 5 Connections and Settings

This unit can be connected to an ES-7 EditStation to The following figure shows a connection diagram for
configure a digital non-linear editing system. non-linear editing system in which this unit serves as
If you use the QSDI interface, you can transfer video, the recorder.
audio, time code, and other compressed data between
this unit and the ES-7. For connections of the ES-7 and its peripheral devices such
The unit supports ClipLink functions, enabling index as the ESBK-7011 Control Panel, the ESBK-7045 Disk Unit,
pictures recorded on tape and ClipLink log data stored etc., refer to your ES-7 Operating Instructions.
in cassette memory to be transferred to the ES-7 in an
Note
instant.
The example connections shown in this chapter
For a general description of ClipLink functions, refer to assume that DSR-85/85P, DSR-80/80P, and DSR-60/
“ClipLink™ Guide” supplied with the unit. 60P units have DSBK-100/110/120/130 (or DSBK-
100P/110P/120P/130P) option boards installed.
QSDI
REF. VIDEO IN INPUT QSDI OUTPUT 1 B B OUT(1/2/3/4)
1 QSDI OUTPUT
1 QSDI INPUT
REMOTE 2 RECORDER
MONITOR VIDEO OUT 2

AUDIO (SUPER) DSR-80/80P ES-7 EditStation
(recorder)
3 1
Chapter 5
Audio input Composite video input
1 75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)
Connections and Settings

2 9-pin remote control cable (one cable
is supplied with the DSR-80/80P)
3 Cable with RCA phono plugs

(not supplied)
Video monitor
Settings on the DSR-80/80P

Switch Setting
REMOTE/LOCAL REMOTE
REF. VIDEO IN 75Ω termination ON
For details of video/audio input and audio mode settings,

see “Settings for Recording” (page 19).
1-29
Chapter 5 Connections and Settings 57

1-30
Connections for a Cut Editing System Connections for an A/B Roll Editing System
The following figure shows a cut editing system For details of connecting devices other than the DSR-80/ The following is an example configuration of A/B roll Betacam VCR such as the UVW-1800/1800P as the
configuration that includes two DSR-80/80Ps to serve 80Ps, refer to the instruction manual for each device. editing system using the DSR-80/80P. recorder.
as the player and recorder. In this configuration, the recorder is a DSR-80/80P, The purpose of the following figure is to clearly
player 1 is a DSR-60/60P, and player 2 is an analog indicate the flow of signals among the component
When you select assemble or insert editing 1 75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied) Betacam UVW-1600/1600P Videocassette Player. To devices in this system. The specific connections and
mode on the editing controller, the EDIT
MODE indicator lights on the front panel of the
create a final tape (a tape that contains a completely DSR-80/80P settings for this system are described
2 9-pin remote control cable (one cable
recorder and the recorder automatically enters is supplied with the DSR-80/80P) packaged program) in Betacam format, you can use a beginning on the next page.
the selected editing mode.
(not supplied)
1 Audio monitor system
DSR-80/80P QSDI DSR-80/80P
(player) QSDI OUTPUT INPUT (recorder)
Source video
REF. Main video monitor monitor
VIDEO
OUT
Video signal generator
(Sony Tektronix TSG-
130, etc) DSR-80/80P
(recorder)
MONITOR VIDEO REMOTE MONITOR VIDEO REMOTE DPS-D7 or other

AUDIO OUT 2 AUDIO OUT 2 delay unit a)
(SUPER) (SUPER) 6 0 ) p r
3 1 2 1 3 1 2
Composite Composite
Audio input video input Audio input video input
REF.
PLAYER VIDEO IN MXP-290 Audio
Mixer
Source monitor Main monitor

Chapter 5
Chapter 5
RECORDER PVE-500, etc
DFS-500/500P
Editing control unit (such as (Editing controller)
DME Switcher
RM-450/450CE, PVE-500, etc.)

Settings on the DSR-80/80Ps (recorder and player)
Switch Recorder Player About reference video signals
REMOTE/LOCAL REMOTE REMOTE
In order to provide stable video and audio signals for
analog editing, it is necessary for the built-in time base
6 0 ) p
For details of the video/audio input and audio mode settings

for the recorder, see “Settings for Recording” (page 19). corrector (TBC) to operate correctly. To ensure this,
input a reference video signal synchronized with the UVW-1600/
DSR-60/60P (player 1) 1600P
Note video signal to the REF. VIDEO IN connector and set (player 2)
Jog audio playback by the player can only be the REF. VIDEO IN 75 Ω termination switch to ON.
monitored on the player itself and its monitor. This
monitoring cannot be done on the recorder even when Video signal a) When using a DFS-500/500P DME Switcher, the phase of the
video signals processed by the DFS-500/500P is delayed,
it is in EE mode. which means that a delay unit must be connected between the
Audio signal
MXP-290 Audio Mixer’s output and the audio input in the DSR-
Reference video signal 80/80P (recorder).
Control signal
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
58 Chapter 5 Connections and Settings Chapter 5 Connections and Settings 59

DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Connections for an A/B Roll Editing System
Audio monitor system connections Reference video signal connection Control signal connections
The following shows an example of audio monitor When you perform recording or editing, be sure to use The following shows an example of control signal
system connections. a reference video signal. connections to enable the editing controller to control
all other A/B roll editing system devices.
For details of these connections, refer to each connected DFS-500/500P DME Switcher
device’s instruction manual. DSR-80/80P (recorder)
Setting on all devices controlled from the editing controller
Switch Setting
Speaker Speaker REMOTE/LOCAL REMOTE
(left channel) (right channel)
BLACK
BURST
OUT 4 3 2 1
REF. VIDEO IN 75 Ω termination
switch: ON 9-pin remote control cable a) REMOTE
REF. VIDEO IN DSR-80/80P (recorder)

DSR-60/60P (player 1)
ANALOG I/O QSDI SDI OUTPUT
REF.VIDEO VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
TIME CODE OUT
Audio amplifier AC IN
MONITOR S VIDEO OUT

AUDIO OUT
AUDIO
TBC REMOTE REMOTE
REF. VIDEO IN 75 Ω termination

switch: ON REMOTE
L R L R
REF. VIDEO IN Mixer control mode 9-pin remote control cable a)
DSR-60/60P (player 1)
selection switch:
REF.VIDEO VIDEO OUT
PARALLEL
UVW-1600/1600P (player 2)
Cables with RCA phono plugs COMPONENT VIDEO
RECORDER
(not supplied)
MONITOR MONITOR AC IN
OUT 2 OUT 1 MONITOR

AUDIO
S VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
PLAYER 1
TBC REMOTE REMOTE
PVE-500 Editing
Control Unit
MIXER SWITCHER PLAYER 2
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
REF. VIDEO IN 75 Ω termination switch: ON
REF. VIDEO IN
9-pin remote control cable a) REMOTE
MXP-290 Audio Mixer

DFS-500/500P DME Switcher
REF.
VIDEO 9-pin remote control cable a) EDITOR
IN
MXP-290 Audio Mixer
PVE-500 Editing Control Unit
REF. VIDEO IN 75 Ω
termination switch: ON 9-pin/15-pin mixer control cable (not supplied)
EDITOR (15-pin)
a) Use the 9-pin remote control cable supplied with this unit or an
Use 75Ω coaxial cables for all of these connections. optional RCC-5G/10G/30G cable.
1-31

1-32
Connections for an A/B Roll Editing System
Video/audio signal connections Connection of a video monitor Settings on an editing control unit
The following shows an example of video/audio signal Set up the following connections to enable monitoring When connecting an editing control unit, make the
connections in an A/B roll editing system. In this of video and audio signals on a video monitor. In settings as follows, according to the model.
example, analog component signals are used as the addition to video signals, you can have time data, the
video signals and XLR 3-pin connectors are used as DSR-80/80P’s operation mode, alarm messages, and PVE-500
audio input/output connectors. other information displayed as text on the monitor No settings are required.
screen by setting “CHARA. DISPLAY” under the
DISPLAY CONTROL menu item to “ON” (this is the BVE-600/900/910/2000 (NTSC model) or FXE-
DSR-80/80P COMPONENT VIDEO 1 factory default setting). 100/120
(recorder) Y, R–Y, B–Y/RGB IN
DFS-500/500P VIDEO INPUTS Set the VCR constants as follows.
DME Switcher COMPONENT 2 For details of menu operations, see Chapter 4. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
80 11 00 96 05 05 03 80 0A 08 FE 00 80 5A FF
75 Ω termination switch: ON (or attach a BVE-600/900/910/2000 (PAL model) or FXE-

75 Ω terminator)
PGM OUT
Input switches: Set according to the type
100P/120P
COMPONENT 1
of input signals. Set the VCR constants as follows.
AUDIO IN
CH-1 CH-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 VIDEO INPUTS 2
3 3 Video monitor 81 11 00 7D 05 05 02 80 0A 07 FE 00 80 4C FF
COMPONENT 1
CH-1 OUT CH-2 OUT
DPS-D7 or other delay unit COMPONENT VIDEO RM-450/RM-450CE

DSR-60/60P (player 1) Y, R–Y, B–Y/RGB OUT Set the DIP switches as follows.
ANALOG I/O
CH-1 IN CH-2 IN
QSDI SDI OUTPUT
REF.VIDEO VIDEO OUT
• Left switches
3 3
MXP-290
COMPONENT VIDEO
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
LINE OUT 2 LINE OUT 1
TIME CODE OUT
Audio Mixer OFF – – OFF – – – –

AC IN
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR S VIDEO OUT
Composite video input

AUDIO
Audio input
TBC REMOTE REMOTE
• Right switches (RM-450)
1 2
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AUDIO OUT
MIC/LINE 4 3 2 1 CH-1 CH-2 VIDEO OFF – OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
3 MONITOR OUT
IN
3 AUDIO 2 (SUPER)
• Right switches (RM-450CE)
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
3 COMPONENT 1
OUTPUT 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
3
ON – OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON

1 12-pin/3-BNC cross cable (not BVE-800
supplied) (Consult your Sony
dealer about this cable.) Set the DIP switches as follows.
• SW2
2 12-pin dubbing cable (not DSR-80/80P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
supplied) AUDIO OUTPUT ON OFF ON ON – ON ON –
UVW-1600/1600P (player 2) CH-2
CH-1
3 Cable with XLR connectors 1 Cable with RCA phono
(not supplied) plugs (not supplied) • SW3 (NTSC model)
2 75 Ω coaxial cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(not supplied) OFF ON OFF ON – ON OFF OFF
Settings on the DSR-80/80P (recorder)
Switch Setting
• SW3 (PAL model)
AUDIO IN 600 Ω ON/OFF ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AUDIO IN –6dBm/0dBm/+4dBm Normally +4dBm
ON ON OFF ON – ON OFF OFF
For details of the video/audio input and audio mode

DSR-80/80P/60/60P
settings, see “Settings for Recording” (page 19).

DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Connections for QSDI Dubbing Connections for Analog Recording
The following shows an example of connections for (Using a DSR-60/60P for QSDI dubbing requires an The following shows connections for a system in
QSDI dubbing (see page 38), with the DSR-80/80P optional DSBK-110/110P QSDI Output Board.) which analog playback signals from another recorder
used as the recorder and a DSR-60/60P as the player. or player are recorded on a DSR-80/80P. In this
system, the video signals are analog component signals
and the audio signals are recorded from audio channels
DSR-60/60P (player) a) This connector is provided by the optional DSBK-110/ 1 and 2.
110P QSDI Output Board.
Video monitor
AC IN
(not supplied)
2 75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)
QSDI REMOTE
OUTPUT a) 3 Cable with XLR connectors (not
1 2
DSR-80/80P QSDI supplied)
REMOTE Composite Audio input
(recorder) INPUT
video input
2 1
75 Ω termination
switch: ON
2
MONITOR VIDEO OUT 2 a)
AUDIO (SUPER) VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO REF. VIDEO OUT MONITOR DSR-80/80P
REF. VIDEO IN Y,R–Y,B–Y/RGB OUT OUT 2(SUPER) AUDIO (recorder)
3 1
REF.VIDEO VIDEO OUT
Audio input Composite video input COMPONENT VIDEO
TIME CODE OUT
AC IN
AUDIO OUT
COMPONENT
MONITOR
AUDIO
S VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
TBC REMOTE REMOTE
Y,R–Y,B–Y/RGB IN
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
1 75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied) AUDIO OUT AUDIO IN
DSR-60/60P CH-1 CH-2
Video monitor CH-1 CH-2 3
(player)
3
2 9-pin remote control cable

(supplied, length 5 m (16 ft))
a) Three 75 Ω coaxial cables are used one each for Y, R–Y, and B–Y.

(not supplied) Settings on the DSR-80/80P For details of the video/audio input and audio mode
Switch/input/audio mode Setting settings, see “Settings for Recording” (page 19).
REMOTE/LOCAL REMOTE (when controlling
the unit from an editing
DSR-80/80P (recorder) and DSR-60/60P controller)
(player) settings AUDIO IN 600 Ω ON/OFF ON
Switch Recorder Player AUDIO IN –6 dBm/0 dBm/ Normally +4 dBm
REMOTE/LOCAL LOCAL REMOTE +4 dBm
Video input Component
Audio input Analog
Audio mode 2-channel (48 kHz)
1-33

1-34
Adjusting the Sync and Subcarrier Phases
When using two or more players, as in an A/B roll After configuring the editing system, use a vectorscope Performing a phase adjustment operation 7 On player 1, adjust the SYNC and SC controls,
editing system, phase synchronization of the signals to adjust the sync and subcarrier phase of the recorder using a Phillips screwdriver, so that the output
(i.e. system sync) is necessary and for composite
signals only, the subcarrier phase must also be in sync.
and players. Subcarrier phase adjustment is necessary
when using composite signals and Y/C signals.
1 Press the SCH button on the vectorscope. from player 1 on channel (A) is in correct phase
alignment with the black burst signal on channel
If not, picture instabilities or color break-up may occur The vectorscope switches to “SCH” mode. (B).
at edit points.
2 Press the B channel button on the vectorscope.
DSR-60/60P (player 1) This indicator
This displays the black burst signal from the moves as you This indicator
turn the SYNC moves as you
switcher. turn the SC
Switcher (DFS-500/ control.
control.
500P a), etc.)
6 0 ) p DSR-80/80P (recorder)
3 Press the EXT button on the vectorscope.
Adjust the sync and subcarrier phase of the
output signal from player 1.
This switches the vectorscope to external
) r
synchronization mode.
6 0 p
Note
When component signals are used the subcarrier
BLACK
BURST
PGM OUT Vectorscope (Sony
Tektronix 1750/1751, etc.)
4 Adjust the phase synchronization control on the
phase indicator does not appear.
OUT vectorscope so that the sync and subcarrier phases
are close to the reference line.
75 Ω coaxial cable (B)
8 Output the player 2 signal from the PVE-500, and
repeat Steps 6 and 7 to adjust the sync and
A IN
Sync phase subcarrier phase of the output from player 2.
75 Ω coaxial cable (A) B IN
Subcarrier phase Reference line
REF. VIDEO
EXT IN
Editing controller (PVE-500)
Align the sync and subcarrier phase of the black burst

signal to the reference line.
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
a) The sync and subcarrier phase of the output signal from the Note
DFS-500/500P switcher are automatically adjusted.
Ensure that the 75 Ω coaxial cables (A) and (B) are of the same
length.
5 Output the player 1 signal from the PVE-500.

6 Press the A channel button on the vectorscope.
This displays the sync phase and subcarrier phase

(composite signals only) of the signal from player
1.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P

DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Maintenance
Chapter 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Condensation
If you move the unit suddenly from a cold to a warm If the condensation alarm message appears
location, or if you use it in a very humid place, immediately after powering on:
moisture from the air may condense on the head drum. Leave the unit powered on and wait until the alarm
This is called condensation, and if a tape is run in this message disappears. You cannot load a cassette into
state, the tape may stick to the drum and can be easily the unit while the alarm message is being displayed.
damaged. To lessen the risk of this occurring, this unit Once the alarm message disappears, the unit is ready
is equipped with a condensation detection system. for use.
If condensation occurs while the unit is

operating:
The alarm message “MOISTURE HAS BEEN
DETECTED.” appears on the monitor screen, and the
alarm message “HUMID!” on the time counter
display. At the same time the unit ejects the cassette
automatically. If this happens, leave the unit’s power
on and wait until the alarm messages disappear.
Regular Checks
Digital hours meter For all modes except T1 (OPERATION), there are two
types of count: a “trip” count, which is resettable, and
The digital hours meter keeps cumulative counts of the the cumulative total from manufacture, which is
total operating time, the head drum rotation time, the unresettable.
tape transport operating time, and the number of
threading/unthreading operations. These counts can be Displaying the digital hours meter
displayed on the monitor screen and the time counter
display of this unit. Use them as guidelines for
scheduling maintenance.
1 Press the MENU button on the menu control panel.
In general, consult your Sony dealer about necessary
The menu selection level display appears on the
periodic maintenance checks.
monitor screen and the time counter display.
Menu selection level display
Digital hours meter display modes
The digital hours meter has the following four display SYSTEM MENU
SETUP MENU Setup menu
modes.
Chapter 6
AUTO FUNCTION
• T1 (OPERATION) mode HOURS METER
The cumulative total hours during which the unit is
powered on is displayed in 10-hour increments.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting

• T2 (DRUM ROTATION) mode
The cumulative total hours of drum rotation with tape
threaded is displayed in 10-hour increments.
• T3 (TAPE RUNNING) mode
The cumulative total hours of tape transport operation Monitor screen
is displayed in 10-hour increments. (Continued)
• CT (THREADING) mode
The cumulative number of tape threading/unthreading
operation pairs is displayed in 10-operation pair
increments.
1-35
Chapter 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 69

1-36
Maintenance Troubleshooting
2 Press the ≥ button to select “HOURS METER”. Digital hours meter indications on the time If an alarm message appears on the monitor screen or
SYSTEM MENU counter display the time counter display, or if the unit appears to be
SETUP MENU Hours meter One of the four indications appears on the time counter malfunctioning, please check the following before
AUTO FUNCTION Time counter display
HOURS METER display at a time. Use the ˘ and ≥ buttons to change contacting your Sony dealer.
the item displayed.
Initially, only the trip value appears. Hold down the Tape problems
÷ button to display also the cumulative total from Symptom Cause Remedy
manufacture, which will appear to the right of the trip Recording is not possible. The cassette’s REC/SAVE switch is set Set the REC/SAVE switch to REC.
value and the slash. to SAVE.a)
The unit’s tape transport The REMOTE/LOCAL switch is set to Set the REMOTE/LOCAL switch to LOCAL and
Monitor screen The following illustrates the digital hours meter control buttons (PLAY, F FWD, REMOTE and “LOCAL ENABLE” under change the menu setting of “LOCAL ENABLE” to
3 Press the ÷ button. indications on the time counter display in all four REW, etc.) do not work. the OPERATIONAL FUNCTION menu “ALL ENABLE”. (See page 42.)
item is set to “STOP & EJECT” or “ALL
display modes. The right-hand indication for each DISABLE”.a)
The cumulative counts by the digital hours meter display mode is the indication you can view while No cassette is loaded.a) Insert a cassette. (See page 24.)
are indicated on the monitor screen and the time holding down the ÷ button on the menu control
counter display. The NOT EDITABLE indicator The audio recording mode selected on • When your current purpose is editing, set the
panel. on the front panel lights up. this unit does not coincides with that of REMOTE/LOCAL switch to LOCAL and set the
the loaded tape.a) unit for the same audio recording mode as with
Digital hours meter indications on the monitor T1 (OPERATION) mode: the tape, then reset the REMOTE/LOCAL switch
screen to REMOTE.
All four counts (T1, T2, T3, and CT) are indicated on Oper. 00000 • When your current purpose is recording, you
can use the tape currently loaded in the unit.
the monitor screen.
The recording format of the currently • If you are using this unit as the recorder for
T2 (DRUM ROTATION) mode: loaded tape is “DV”.a) editing, you cannot use the currently loaded tape
as a record tape. Replace it with one recorded in
Resettable trip counts Drum 0000 0000/00000 the “DVCAM” format.
Unresettable counts
• If you are using the unit as the player for editing,
HOURS METER T3 (TAPE RUNNING) mode: you can use this tape as a source tape.
T1 00000 X10 HOURS
T2 0000/00000 X10 HOURS
T3 0000/00000 X10 HOURS
Tape 0000 0000/00000 Time data problems
CT 0000/00000 X10 COUNT Symptom Cause Remedy
T1:OPERATION CT (THREADING) mode: Cannot freely set the time “TC MODE” under the TIME CODE Change the menu setting of “TC MODE” to “INT
T2:DRUM ROTATION data’s initial value. menu item has been set to “EXT PRESET”. (See page 45.)
T3:TAPE RUNNING Thread 0000 0000/00000 REGEN”.a)
CT:THREADING
CNT is selected as the time data type to Press the COUNTER SELECT button to make the
To end the digital hours meter display be displayed. (The “COUNTER” time “TC” or “U-BIT” time data type indicator light up.
data type indicator is lit.)a)
Press the MENU button on the menu control panel.
The REMOTE/LOCAL switch is set to Set the REMOTE/LOCAL switch to LOCAL and
REMOTE and “LOCAL ENABLE” under change the menu setting of “LOCAL ENABLE” to
The four-digit value to the left of the slash is the Resetting the trip values the OPERATIONAL FUNCTION menu “ALL ENABLE”. (See page 42.)
resettable trip count, and the right value is the About this operation, consult your Sony dealer. item is set to “STOP & EJECT” or “ALL
cumulative total from manufacture. DISABLE”.a)
Chapter 6
Chapter 6
The tape is running, but the The MENU button or TC PRESET button Press the button once again to exit the menu
time data is not shown in the on the menu control panel has been control mode, time code preset mode, or digital
time counter display. pressed. hours meter display mode. (In either of these
modes, the time data is not shown in the time
Head Cleaning

counter display.)
The “U-BIT” time data type indicator is lit. Press the COUNTER SELECT button to make the
Always use the PDVM-12CL Cleaning Cassette to To clean the heads “COUNTER” or “TC” time data type indicator light
clean the video and audio heads. You can run the Insert the cleaning cassette. This automatically starts up.
cleaning cassette for 10 seconds per cleaning cleaning. You cannot operate any tape transport
operation. Follow the instructions for the cleaning control buttons other than the EJECT button during the Input problems
cassette, as inappropriate use of the cleaning cassette cleaning operation. Symptom Cause Remedy
can damage the heads. After about 10 seconds, the cleaning cassette will be It is not possible to record a No QSDI signal is input to the unit.a) Connect a QSDI signal to the QSDI INPUT
automatically ejected. QSDI signal. connector.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
a) In these states, an alarm message appears on the

monitor screen and on the time counter display.
70 Chapter 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Chapter 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 71

DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Troubleshooting
Monitor problems Error Messages

Symptom Cause Remedy
Data is not superimposed on “CHARA. DISPLAY” under the DISPLAY Set “CHARA. DISPLAY” to “ON”. (See page 43.) This unit is provided with a self-diagnostic function Note
the monitor screen. CONTROL menu item is set to “OFF”.
that detects internal abnormalities. When it detects an To display error messages on the monitor screen, it is
The monitor is not connected to the Connect the monitor to the VIDEO OUT 2
VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER) connector of (SUPER) connector. (You must make this
abnormality, it outputs an error message to the monitor necessary for the monitor to be connected to the
this unit. connection to display any type of text on the screen and indicates an error code in the time counter VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER) connector, and for
monitor.) display. “CHARA. DISPLAY” under the DISPLAY
The image on the monitor’s The 75 Ω termination switch for video Set the 75 Ω termination switch to ON or connect CONTROL menu item to be set to “ON” (factory
screen is too bright. input on the monitor is in the OFF a terminator. If an error message appears, follow the direction
position or a 75 Ω terminator is not fitted
default setting).
indicated under the message in the monitor screen.
to its video input connector.
The image on the monitor’s In a video signal loop-through connection Set the 75 Ω termination switches to OFF on all For details of menu settings, see Chapter 4.
screen is too dark. of video monitors, 75 Ω termination monitors other than the loop-end monitor .
The image is too dark when switches for video input on monitors
recording a composite video other than the loop-end monitor are in ERROR
signal. the ON position.
AN ERROR HAS BEEN
DETECTED. INFORM SERVICE Error message
Audio problems OF FOLLOWING CODE:

02-603 Error code
Symptom Cause Remedy
PRESS EJECT KEY
When an AES/EBU, SDI or “DIGITAL INPUT” under the AUDIO Set “DIGITAL INPUT” to “VARIABLE”. (See page TO EJECT TAPE. Direction Error code
QSDI digital audio input is CONTROL menu item is set to 47.)
selected, the AUDIO INPUT “BYPASS”.
LEVEL control konbs do not Note Error02-603
work. To be able to perform this operation, it is Monitor screen Time counter display
necessary to set the menu item “MENU GRADE”
to “ENHANCED”. (See page 47.)
When a QSDI signal from a “QSDI AUDIO MON” under the Change the menu setting of “QSDI AUDIO MON”
player VCR is selected as the OPERATIONAL FUNCTION menu item to a setting other than “QSDI”, and input an audio
input to this unit, putting the is set to “QSDI”. signal corresponding to the new setting. (See Alarm Messages
player into jog mode stops this page 43.)
unit from outputting an EE
audio signal. Note
When a setting, connection or operation error has been such as the ones shown below to the monitor screen
To be able to perform this operation, it is made, or when a problem such as condensation on and the time counter display.
necessary to set the menu item “MENU GRADE” heads has occurred, the unit outputs alarm messages
to “ENHANCED”. (See page 47.)
ALARM
Editing problems
Symptom Cause Remedy REMOTE MODE IS SELECTED Cause of alarm
Execution of video editing in This phenomenon cannot be avoided with an editing system SET REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCH Direction
insert mode causes subcode using this unit as the recorder. TO LOCAL
data recorded on tape other
Chapter 6
Chapter 6
than time code data to
disappear from tape.
During audio editing in insert This phenomenon cannot be avoided with an editing system
mode, a strange image using this unit as the recorder, but editing itself will be achieved REMOTE!

appears on the video monitor exactly as you have designed.
Monitor screen Time counter display
screen like a partial frozen
image of a frame immediately
before the IN point being mixed
in the playback picture. If an alarm message appears, follow the direction VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER) connector, and for
indicated under the message in the monitor screen. “CHARA. DISPLAY” and “ALARM” under the
DISPLAY CONTROL menu item to be set to “ON”
Note (factory default setting) and “REF. ALARM” to be set
To display alarm messages on the monitor screen, it is to“ON” or “ON (LIMITED)” (factory default setting).
necessary for the monitor to be connected to the
For details of menu settings, see Chapter 4.
1-37

1-38
Troubleshooting
List of alarm messages and associated directions Alarm messages and associated directions (Continued)
Alarm message on monitor screen Direction Alarm message on time
counter display
Here is a list of alarm messages and associated In this list the “Causes” of alarm are arranged in Cause
directions to appear on the monitor screen. It also alphabetic order of the first word of their phrases. Key is jammed. Check the following buttons: EJECT, STOP, Key jammed!
shows the corresponding alarm messages to appear on F FWD, REW, PLAY, REC, ˘, ≥, ¿, ÷, SET
(YES), TC PRESET, MENU, RESET (NO), INPUT
the time counter display of this unit. SELECT (VIDEO, AUDIO CH-1 CH-1/2, AUDIO
CH-2 CH-3/4, QSDI), COUNTER SELECT, AUDIO
Alarm messages and associated directions REC SELECT
Alarm message on monitor screen Direction Alarm message on time Moisture has been detected. Keep the power on and wait until this alarm HUMID!
counter display message disappears.
Cause
No cassette in VTR. Load a cassette. No Cass.!
A black/white signal is being used for REF. Supply a color signal when using composite or S- B&W REF!
VIDEO. video output signals. Record inhibit plug on the cassette is set to Set the REC/SAVE switch on the cassette to REC. REC INHI.!
inhibit.
A cleaning tape has been inserted. The tape will automatically be ejected after cleaning Cleaning Tp
is completed. Remote mode is selected. Set the REMOTE/LOCAL switch to LOCAL. REMOTE!
A non-standard ref. signal is being used for Use a standard signal. REF NON-STD Tape cannot be replayed. Use a tape having signals recorded in 525/60 625/50 Tape
REF. VIDEO. format.
Abnormal settings selected in setup menu. Correct the setup menu settings. Contact your ILL. SETUP Use a tape having signals recorded in 625/50 525/60 Tape
Sony dealer if this alarm message appears again format.
after making corrections. Tape end has been detected. Use a new cleaning tape. Tape end!
Audio not editable on this tape. Use a tape recorded in 2-channel (48 kHz) or 2CH/32kHz! Tape not editable. Use a tape recorded in DVCAM format. Not DVCAM!
4-channel (32 kHz) mode.
Use a tape having signals recorded in 525/60 625/50 Tape
Fs 44.1kHz! format.
Use a tape having signals recorded in 625/50 525/60 Tape
Use a tape having audio signals recorded in locked UNLOCK mode format.
mode.
Tape not usable. Use DVCAM/DV ME (metal-evaporated) tape. MP Tape!
Audio REC mode selection different from Select the same audio recording mode as that of A mode err
audio on tape. the tape. ILL. Tape!
Audio REC (recording) mode cannot be — REC mode! TC EXTERNAL is selected. Use the setup menu to set “TC MODE” to “INT TC EXT!
changed during recording. PRESET”.
Audio REC (recording) mode cannot be Enter the unit into EE mode. PB mode! TCG REGEN mode is selected. Use the setup menu to set “TC MODE” to “INT REGEN mode!
changed in PB (playback) mode. PRESET”.
Counter mode is selected. Use the COUNTER SELECT button to make the CNT mode! TCG RUN mode is set to REC RUN. Use the setup menu to set “RUN MODE” to “FREE REC RUN!
TC or U-BIT indicator light. RUN”.
Input selection cannot be changed in REC — REC mode!
(recording) mode.
Input signal does not conform to DVCAM/DV — Unknown Sig
format.
Input signal is 625/50. — 625/50 sig!
Input signal is 525/60. — 525/60 sig!
Chapter 6
Chapter 6
Input signal is not ×1 mode. Use normal-speed playback mode. not ×1 sig!
Input video is not detected. Check the INPUT MODE VIDEO indicators for No INPUT!
current video selection, and supply an appropriate
video signal.

DSR-80/80P/60/60P

DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Notes on Use
Appendix
Operation and storage locations
Avoid operation or storage in any of the following
places.
• Location subject to extremes of temperature
(operating temperature range 5°C to 40°C (41°F to
Appendix
104°F))
• Location subject to direct sunlight for long periods, or
close to heating appliances (Note that the interior of a
car left in summer with the windows closed can
exceed 50°C (122°F).)
• Damp or dusty places
• Location subject to severe vibrations
• Location near equipment generating strong
electromagnetic emissions
• Location near transmitting stations generating strong
radio waves
Operate the unit in a horizontal position

This unit is designed to be operated in a horizontal
position. Do not operate it on its side, or tilted through
an excessive angle (exceeding 20°).
Avoid violent impacts

Dropping the unit, or otherwise imparting a violent
shock to it, is likely to cause it to malfunction.
Do not obstruct ventilation openings

To prevent the unit from overheating, do not obstruct
ventilation openings, by for example wrapping the unit
in a cloth while it is in operation.
Care
If the casing or panel is dirty, wipe it gently with a soft
dry cloth. In the event of extreme dirt, use a cloth
steeped in a natural detergent to remove the dirt, then
wipe with a dry cloth. Applying alcohol, thinners,
insecticides, or other volatile solvents may result in
deforming the casing or damaging the finish.
Shipping
Pack the unit in its original carton or equivalent
packing, and take care not to impart violent shocks in
transit.
1-39
Appendix 77
1-40
Specifications
General Tape transport control system Audio performance Analog audio inputs
AUDIO IN XLR 3-pin, female (×4),
Signal system Tape speed Frequency response +4/0/–6 dBu, 600 Ω (with 600 Ω
DSR-80: NTSC DSR-80: 28.193 mm/s 2-channel (48 kHz) mode: 20 Hz ON/OFF switch set to ON),
DSR-80P: PAL DSR-80P: 28.221 mm/s to 20 kHz +0.5 dB/–1.0 dB 10 kΩ (with switch OFF),
Appendix
balanced
Appendix
Power requirements Recording/playback time 4-channel (32 kHz) mode:

DSR-80: 120 V AC, 50/60 Hz Using PDV-184ME standard-size cassette: 20 Hz to 14.5 kHz +0.5 dB/
DSR-80P for Europe: Maximum 184 minutes –1.0 dB Digital audio inputs
220 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz Using PDVM-40ME mini-size cassette: Dynamic range More than 85 dB DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) INPUT
DSR-80P for USA and Canada: Maximum 40 minutes Distortion (THD + N) XLR 3-pin, female (×2), 110 Ω,
120 V AC, 50/60 Hz Fast forward/rewind time Less than 0.05% (48 kHz) balanced
Power consumption Using PDV-184ME standard-size cassette:
DSR-80: 140 W/120 V (with all options Less than 3 minutes Time code input
installed) Using PDVM-40ME mini-size cassette: Input connectors TIME CODE IN (with optional DSBK-130/130P Time
DSR-80P: 145 W/220 V (with all options Less than 1 minute Code Input/Output Board installed)
installed) Search speed Digital signal inputs BNC type, SMPTE time code
Operating temperature When controlling via RS-422A interface: QSDI INPUT BNC type, QSDI format (DSR-80) or EBU time code
5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F) Maximum 32 times normal in both (270 Mbps) (DSR-80P), 0.5 Vp-p to 18 Vp-p,
Storage temperature directions (with color picture) SDI INPUT (with optional DSBK-120/120P SDI 3.3 kΩ, unbalanced
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F) Maximum 85 times normal in both Input/Output Board installed)
Operating relative humidity directions (without color picture) BNC type (×2, active-through),
Less than 80% When controlling from optional DSRM-10: Output connectors
Serial Digital Interface format
Storage relative humidity Jog mode: 0 (still) to 2 times (270 Mbps), SMPTE 259M/
Less than 90% normal in both directions CCIR656-III Digital signal outputs
Mass 19 kg (41 lb 14 oz) Shuttle mode: 8 speeds from 0 QSDI OUTPUT BNC type, QSDI format
Dimensions (w/h/d, excluding projections) (still) to 16 times normal in both Analog video inputs (270 Mbps)
427 × 174 × 494 mm directions REF. VIDEO IN BNC type (×2, loop-through) SDI OUTPUT (with optional DSBK-120/120P SDI
(16 7/8 × 6 7/8 × 19 1/2 inches) Digital slow mode: 3 speeds, (0 Black burst Input/Output Board installed)
(still), 1/5, 1/10 normal) in both 0.286 V (DSR-80) or 0.3 V BNC type (×2, active-through),
directions (DSR-80P), 75 Ω, negative sync Serial Digital Interface format
Jog audio mode: 1 to 1/30 normal Composite sync (270 Mbps), SMPTE 259M/
in both directions 2.0 V, 75 Ω, negative sync (for CCIR656-III
RGB four-wire signal input)
VIDEO IN BNC type (×2, loop-through), Analog video outputs
Video performance composite, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, sync REF. VIDEO OUT
BNC type ×1
494 (19 1 /2)
512 (20 1 /4)
negative
Bandwidth (when using analog component interface) COMPONENT VIDEO IN Black burst
DSR-80: Y: 5.0 MHz +1.0 dB/–1.0 dB BNC type ×3 0.286 V (DSR-80) or 0.3 V
R–Y, B–Y: 1.5 MHz +1.0 dB/ for YRB input (DSR-80P), 75 Ω, negative sync
–5.0 dB Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, negative sync Composite sync
DSR-80P: Y: 5.5 MHz +1.0 dB/–2.0 dB R–Y/B–Y: 0.7 Vp-p (75% color 2.0 V, 75 Ω, negative sync (for
R–Y, B–Y: 2.0 MHz +1.0 dB/ bars for DSR-80 or 100% color RGB four-wire signal output)
–2.0 dB bars for DSR-80P), 75 Ω VIDEO OUT 1, 2 (SUPER)
S/N(when using analog component interface) for RGB input (100% color bars) BNC type (×2), composite,
174 (6 7/8)
191 (7 5 /8)
More than 55 dB G:1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, negative sync 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, sync negative
6 0 ) p r
K-factor (K2T, KPB) (for three-wire operation) COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Less than 2.0% 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω (for four-wire BNC type ×3 (Y/R–Y/B–Y ˜
Y/C delay Less than 30 ns operation) RGB switchable)
427 (16 7/8) for YRB output
B:0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω
R:0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, negative sync
Unit: mm (inches)
S VIDEO IN DIN 4-pin R–Y/B–Y: 0.7 Vp-p (75% color
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω bars for DSR-80 or 100% color
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
C: 0.286 Vp-p (DSR-80) or bars for DSR-80P), 75 Ω

0.3 Vp-p (DSR-80P), 75 Ω
78 Appendix (burst level) Appendix 79
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Specifications Glossary
for RGB output (100% color bars) TBC REMOTE D-sub 15-pin, for connection of A/B roll editing EBU S/N
G:1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, negative sync TBC remote controller2) An editing method that uses two or more European Broadcasting Union. Abbreviation of Signal-to-Noise (ratio).
(for three-wire operation) or playback VCRs to create special effects Established by broadcasting and related The higher the S/N value, the less noise
such as dissolve and wipe, and uses one organizations in Europe. and higher the picture quality.
0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω (for four-wire
Accessories supplied record VCR to record the results of the
operation) editing. Using an editing controller allows EE mode Search mode
B:0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω
Appendix
Appendix
efficient control of the VCRs and very EE is an abbreviation of “Electric to A VCR operating mode used when
R:0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω AC power cord (1) precise editing. Electric”. Video and audio signals are searching for specific scenes, by viewing
S VIDEO OUT DIN 4-pin, Y and C separated RCC-5G 9-pin remote control cable (1) supplied to the VCR’s internal circuits, but the video output or time code values while
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω Operating Instructions (1) B–Y signal not to the recording heads. playing back the tape at various speeds in
C: 0.286 Vp-p (DSR-80) or ClipLink™ Guide (1) A chrominance signal determined by forward or reverse direction.
0.3 Vp-p (DSR-80P), 75 Ω subtracting the Y (luminance) signal from Linear editing
the B (blue) signal. One of the component Editing while playing back video and Servo lock
(burst level) signals. audio signals recorded on video tape. See Synchronizing the drum rotation phase and
Optional accessories also “Non-linear editing”. tape transport phase with a reference
Analog audio outputs Capstan signal during playback and recording so
AUDIO OUT XLR 3-pin, male (× 4), +4 dBu, DSBK-120/120P SDI Input/Output Board A drive mechanism that moves the tape at Loading that the video heads scan the tape in the
600 Ω loading, low impedance, DSBK-130/130P Time Code Input/Output Board a specified speed. Its rotation normally When being loaded, the tape is pulled out same pattern during playback and
balanced RCC-5G/10G/30G 9-pin remote control cable (length synchronizes with a reference sync signal. of the cassette case and threaded along the recording.
specified tape path and wrapped round the
MONITOR AUDIO 5 m (16 ft)/10 m (33 ft)/30 m (98 ft))
Chrominance signal drum to be ready for recording or Standby Off mode
Phono jack, –6 dBu +1 dBu/–1 dBu RMM-130 Rack Mount Kit Color signal containing color information playback. Generally, this is done One of two conditions in the stop mode.
47 kΩ, unbalanced Digital video cassette such as hue and saturation. Also called C automatically when you place the cassette The drum does not rotate and tape is
Standard size: PDV-64ME/94ME/124ME/184ME signal. at the cassette entrance of the VCR. Also slackened. There is no damage to the
Digital audio outputs Mini size: PDVM-12ME/22ME/32ME/40ME called threading. video heads and the tape, but the VCR is
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) OUTPUT PDVM-12CL Cleaning Cassette Component video signals (RGB) not ready for immediate recording or
XLR 3-pin, male (×2), 110 Ω, Video signals comprising separate Loop-through connection playback.
balanced component signals for the primary colors A connection which allows a signal input
red, green, and blue. Widely used for to an input connector to pass through the Standby On mode
Related equipment display connections in computer systems. unit and exit from an output connector as One of two conditions in the stop mode.
Output for headphones There are two ways of connecting the input to external equipment. Also called The drum is rotating and the tape is
HEADPHONES Stereo phone jack, –16 dBu ES-7 EditStation reference signal: three-wire and four-wire. bridging connection. wrapped round the drum. The VCR is
+2 dBu/–2 dBu, 8 Ω, unbalanced Linear editing controller (PVE-500, RM-450/450CE, ready for recording or playback, so a still
Component signal (YRB) Luminance signal picture can be obtained.
BVE-600/800/910/2000/9100/9100P, etc.)
Time code output A video signal consisting of a luminance The signal that determines the brightness
DFS-500/500P DME Switcher signal (Y) and two chrominance signals of the picture. Also called Y signal. One Subcarrier
TIME CODE OUT (with optional DSBK-130/130P DXC-D30/D30P Color Video Camera (R–Y, B–Y). of the component signals. A sine wave imposed on the luminance
Time Code Input/Output Board installed) DSR-1/1P Digital Videocassette Recorder portion of a video signal and modulated to
BNC type, SMPTE time code DSR-85/85P Digital Videocassette Recorder Composite signal Non-linear editing carry color information. Its amplitude
(DSR-80), EBU time code (DSR- DSR-60/60P Digital Videocassette Player A composite video signal containing Editing while playing back video and represents color saturation and its phase,
80P), 2.2 Vp-p +3 dBu/–3 dBu, DSR-130/130P Digital Camcorder
video, burst and sync signals. audio signals recorded on hard disks. hue.
600 Ω, unbalanced SVRM-100/100A Remote Control Unit
Video scenes stored on disk can be cued
Condensation up quickly, for increased editing Superimpose
DSRM-10 Remote Control Unit Condensation of moisture on the tape efficiency. See also “Linear editing”. To put a set of characters onto a picture so
Remote control connectors TBC remote controller (UVR-60/60P, BVR-50/50P) transport mechanisms of VCRs including that both can be seen at the same time.
the head drum. If moisture condenses on R–Y signal
the head drum, the tape adheres to the A chrominance signal determined by S-video
REMOTE D-sub 9-pin, for connection of drum and causes malfunction. subtracting the Y (luminance) signal from A signal format in which Y (luminance)
editing controller1), RS-422A Design and specifications are subject to change the R (red) signal. One of the component and C (chrominance) signals are separated
standard without notice. signals. to reduce interference between them so
CONTROL S Stereo minijack, for connection of that noiseless images are reproduced.
SIRCS-system remote control Reference video signal
A video signal consisting of a sync signal Sync signal
unit (SVRM-100/100A and or sync and burst signals, used as a A reference signal consisting of vertical
DSRM-10) reference. and horizontal sync signals used for
synchronizing the scanning patterns of the
video camera and the monitor.
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) ES-7, PVE-500, RM-450/450CE, BVE-600/800/910/ 2) UVR-60/60P, etc.

2000/9100/9100P, etc.
1-41
80 Appendix Appendix 81
1-42
Glossary Index
TBC Cassettes ................................................ 21 DISPLAY INFO (menu) ........................ 44

Abbreviation of Time Base Corrector.
A inserting ........................................... 25 Drop frame mode ................................... 31
Electronic circuits to electrically stabilize A MODE CHANGE (menu) ................. 43 notes on use ..................................... 23 DSBK-120/120P ................................ 7, 17
the playback signals by removing color A/B roll editing system .......................... 59 preventing accidental erasure .......... 27 DSBK-130/130P ...................................... 7
variation and roll in the playback picture
A1 EDIT CH (menu) ............................. 43 REC/SAVE switch .................... 22, 27 DV format .......................................... 5, 22
caused by irregularity in drum rotation and
A2 EDIT CH (menu) ............................. 43 tape slack ......................................... 27 DVCAM format ................................. 5, 22
Appendix
tape movement. Time base correction

reduces deterioration of picture quality AC IN connector .................................... 14 CHARA. DISPLAY (menu) .................. 43
when transmitting or copying playback Accessories .............................................. 7 CHARA. POSITION (menu) ................ 43
signals. AFTER CUE-UP (menu) ...................... 43 CHARA. TYPE (menu) ......................... 44
E
ALARM (menu) .................................... 45 Cleaning, video heads ............................ 70 Editing control unit, setting ................... 63
Threading Alarm messages ..................................... 71 ClipLink function .............................. 6, 57 Editing points, determining ................... 37
See “Loading”. Analog audio signal input/output ClipLink indicator ................................. 11 Editing problems ................................... 72
section ............................................. 18
Index
CNT value, resetting .............................. 32 Editing systems
Time code Analog interfaces ......................... 6, 15, 18 Color difference signal inputs ............... 16 A/B roll editing system ................... 59
Signals recorded on the tape to supply
Analog recording ................................... 65 Color difference signal outputs ............. 16 cut editing system ............................ 58
information on tape position such as the
hour, minute, second and frame, to assist Analog video input/output section ........ 15 COMPONENT VIDEO Y, digital non-linear editing system ..... 57
in setting edit points or searching for Arrow (ı∫◊√) buttons .......................... 13 R–Y, B–Y/RGB IN connectors ....... 15 EditStation ............................................. 57
particular scenes. AUDIO CH1, 1/2 indicators .................. 10 COMPONENT VIDEO Y, EE mode .................................................. 9
AUDIO CH-1, CH-1/2 button ............... 10 R–Y, B–Y/RGB OUT connectors ... 15 EJECT button ........................................ 12
User bits AUDIO CH-2, 3/4 indicators ................. 10 Composite video input ........................... 15 Error messages ....................................... 71
Sections of time code information AUDIO CH-2, CH-3/4 button ............... 10 Composite video output ......................... 15 ES-7 ....................................................... 57
consisting of a total of 32 bits that can be AUDIO CONTROL (menu) .................. 49 Condensation ......................................... 69 External synchronization, time code ..... 34
used for recording information such as
AUDIO IN 600 Ω ON/OFF Switches ... 18 Connections and settings ....................... 57
date, tape ID number, program ID number,
AUDIO IN –6 dBm/0 dBm/+4 dBm A/B roll editing system ................... 61
etc. F, G
Switches .......................................... 18 analog recording .............................. 65
AUDIO IN CH-1 to CH-4 connectors ... 18 audio monitor system ...................... 60 F FWD button ........................................ 12
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL control knobs ... 9 control signals ................................. 59 FREE RUN ............................................ 34
Audio input, selecting ............................ 20 cut editing system ............................ 58 FROM STILL (menu) ........................... 46
Audio level meter .................................... 9 digital non-linear editing system ..... 57 FROM STOP (menu) ............................. 46
AUDIO MODE display ........................... 9 QSDI dubbing ................................. 64 Front panel ............................................... 8
Audio mode indicators ............................ 9 reference video signal ............... 59, 60
Audio monitor system ........................... 60 video monitor .................................. 59
AUDIO MUTE (menu) .......................... 47 video signals .................................... 59 H
AUDIO OUT CH-1 to CH-4 CONTROL S connector .......................... 8 Head cleaning ........................................ 70
connectors ....................................... 18 Control signals ....................................... 59 HEADPHONES connector ...................... 8
Audio problems ..................................... 70 COUNTER indicator ............................. 11 HEADPHONES control knob ................. 8
AUDIO REC SELECT button ................. 9 COUNTER SELECT button ................. 11 High-speed search ................................. 37
Audio recording mode, selecting ........... 21 Cut editing system ................................. 58 High-speed transfer ................................. 6
AUTO EE SELECT (menu) .................. 42
AUTO FUNCTION (menu) .................. 50
Auto mode (AUTO FUNCTION) D I
execution menu ............................... 50 DF MODE (menu) ................................. 45 INPUT MODE display ............................ 9
AUTO REW (menu) .............................. 42 DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) INPUT Input problems ....................................... 71
connectors ....................................... 16 INPUT SELECT buttons ......................... 9
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) OUTPUT
B connectors ....................................... 16
Input setting section ................................. 9
Interfaces ................................................. 6
BRIGHTNESS (menu) .......................... 45 Digital hours meter display menu ... 41, 69 Internal time code generator/
B–Y signal input .................................... 16 Digital hours meter .......................... 41, 69 reader ............................... 6, 31, 33, 34
B–Y signal output .................................. 16 DIGITAL INPUT (menu) ...................... 47 advancement .................................... 34
Digital interfaces ............................... 6, 16 using ................................................ 33
Digital non-linear editing system .......... 57
C
Digital signal input/output section ........ 16
Care ....................................................... 77 Digital slow mode search ...................... 37 J, K
Cassette compartment .............................. 8
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
DISPLAY CONTROL (menu) .............. 44 Jog audio, search ................................... 37

Cassette memory indicator .................... 11 Jog ......................................................... 37
Cassette memory ............................. 11, 22
82 Appendix Index 83
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
Index
Playback ................................................ 28 Settings .................................................. 51 Time data type indicators ...................... 11

L procedure ......................................... 29 menu settings ................................... 51 Time data problems ............................... 71
LOCAL ENABLE (menu) ..................... 42 settings ............................................. 28 See also “Connections and settings”. Time data type indicators ...................... 11
Luminance signal input ......................... 16 POWER switch ........................................ 8 SETUP ADD (menu) ............................. 47 Time data ............................................... 71
Luminance signal output ....................... 16 PREROLL TIME (menu) ...................... 43 Setup menu ............................................ 41 displaying .................................. 31, 32
SETUP REMOVE (menu) ..................... 47 problems .......................................... 71
75Ω termination switch ......................... 15 setting .............................................. 31
M Q Shipping ................................................. 77 Track pitch ............................................... 5
Maintenance .......................................... 69 QSDI AUDIO MON (menu) ................. 43 Shuttle .................................................... 37 Troubleshooting ..................................... 71
MAX SRCH SPEED (menu) ................ 42 QSDI button ........................................... 10 SIRCS ...................................................... 6
Menu ...................................................... 41 QSDI dubbing ........................................ 38 600Ω ON/OFF switches ........................ 18
basic items ................................. 41, 51 QDSI DUBBING (menu) ...................... 50 Specifications ........................................ 78
U
changing menu settings ................... 51
Index
Index
QSDI indicator ...................................... 10 STILL MODE (menu) ........................... 47 UB BINARY GP. (menu) ...................... 45
contents ........................................... 42 QSDI INPUT connector ........................ 16 Still picture ............................................ 37 U-BIT indicator ..................................... 11
digital hours meter display menu .... 41 QSDI interface ....................................... 57 Still search ............................................. 37 User bit data, setting .............................. 33
enhanced items .......................... 41, 53 QSDI OUTPUT connector .................... 16 STOP button .......................................... 12
operation example ........................... 52 Storage ................................................... 77
organization ..................................... 41 SUB STATUS (menu) ........................... 44
V, W, X
returning menu settings to the factory
R Subcarrier phase, adjusting .................... 66 VIDEO button ....................................... 10
defaults ...................................... 54 Rack mounting ........................................ 7 Superimposition ......................... 15, 31, 55 VIDEO CONTROL (menu) .................. 47
setup menu ...................................... 41 Rear panel .............................................. 14 Supplementary status information ......... 55 VIDEO IN 75 Ω termination switch ..... 15
MENU button ........................................ 13 REC button ............................................ 12 SYNC PHASE control .......................... 13 VIDEO IN connectors ........................... 15
Menu control panel ................................ 13 REC INHIBIT indicator .................. 11, 25 Sync phase, adjusting ............................ 66 VIDEO indicators .................................. 10
MENU DISPLAY (menu) ..................... 44 REC POINT MUTE (menu) .................. 47 Video input, selecting ............................ 20
MENU GRADE (menu) ........................ 47 REC RUN .............................................. 34 Video monitor ........................................ 64
–6 dBm/0 dBm/+4 dBm switches ......... 18 Recording .............................................. 19
T VIDEO OUT 1 connector ...................... 15
MONITOR AUDIO connector .............. 18 procedure ......................................... 24 Tape VIDEO OUT 2 (SUPER) connector ..... 15
Monitor problems .................................. 72 settings ............................................. 19 preventing accidental erasure .......... 27 Video signals ......................................... 63
MONITOR SELECT switches .............. 13 REF LEVEL (menu) ............................. 47 problems .......................................... 71
REF. VIDEO IN 75 Ω termination slack ................................................. 27
switch .............................................. 15 See also “Cassettes”.
Y, Z
N REF. VIDEO IN connectors .................. 15 Tape end alarm indicator ....................... 11 Y signal input ........................................ 16
Non-drop frame mode ........................... 31 REF. VIDEO OUT connector ................ 15 TAPE PROTECTION (menu) ............... 46 Y signal output ...................................... 16
Non-linear editing .................................... 5 Reference video signal .................... 59, 60 Tape transport control buttons ............... 12
NOT EDITABLE indicator .............. 11, 26 Regular checks ....................................... 69 TBC REMOTE connector ..................... 14
Notes on use .......................................... 77 REMOTE connector .............................. 14 TBC ................................................... 7, 14
REMOTE/LOCAL switch ....................... 8 TC EE OUT MODE (menu) ............ 46, 48
RESET (NO) button .............................. 13 TC indicator ........................................... 11
O
REW button ........................................... 12 TC INSERT (menu) ............................... 50
Operation mode indications ................... 31 RMM-130 ................................................ 7 TC insert function .................................. 35
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION RUN MODE (menu) ............................. 45 TC MODE (menu) ................................. 45
(menu) ............................................. 42 R–Y signal input .................................... 16 TC PRESET button ............................... 13
Optional accessories ................................ 7 R–Y signal output .................................. 16 Time base corrector ................................. 7
OVER DISP HOLD (menu) .................. 45
TIME CODE (menu) ............................. 45
OVER indicator ....................................... 9
Time code generator ................................ 6
S
TIME CODE IN connector ................... 15
P S VIDEO IN connector .......................... 15 TIME CODE OUT connector ............... 15
S VIDEO OUT connector ...................... 15 Time code reader ..................................... 6
PCM digital audio ................................... 5 SC PHASE control ................................ 13 Time code .............................................. 31
PEAK HOLD (menu) ............................ 44 SDI INPUT connectors ......................... 17 initial value, setting ......................... 33
Picture search ......................................... 37 SDI OUTPUT connectors ..................... 17 rerecording ...................................... 35
PLAY button .......................................... 12 SDI signal input/output section ............. 17 synchronizing ............................ 33, 34
PLAY START (menu) ........................... 43 Search .................................................... 37 Time counter display ............................. 11
Playback compatibility ............................ 5 SET (YES) button .................................. 13 Time data problems ............................... 71
1-43
84 Index Index 85
SECTION 2
INSTALLATION
Be sure to install the DSR-80/80P/60/60P in location satisfying the required operational environment described below to
assure the DSR-80/80P/60/60P superior performance and to maintain the excellent serviceability and accessibility.
2-1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
START
DETERMINATION OF · · · 2-2. OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENT

INSTALLATION PLACE · · · 2-3. OPERATING VOLTAGE
· · · 2-4. INSTALLATION SPACE
UNPACKING · · · 2-5. SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
RACK MOUNTING · · · 2-7. RACK MOUNTING
CONNECTORS · · · 2-8-2. MATCHING CONNECTORS

· · · 2-8-3. INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS OF THE CONNECTORS
INITIAL SETUP · · · 2-9. INSTALLATION SETUP AND ADJUSTMENT
OPERATION CHECK · · · If an error message is shown on the time counter, refer to

“3-3. ERROR MESSAGE” in SERVICE MANUAL VOL. 1.
END
2-2. OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENT
. Operating temperature : +5 dC to +40 dC

. Humidity : 80 % or less
. Storage temperature : _20 dC to +60 dC
. Locations to avoid : . Areas where the unit will be exposed to direct sunlight or any other strong lights.
. Dusty areas or areas where it is subject to vibration.
. Areas with strong electric or magnetic fields.
. Areas near heat sources.
(Good air circulation is essential to prevent internal heat build-up. Place the unit in location
with sufficient air circulation. Do not block the ventilation holes on the cabinet and the rear
panel.)
. Horizontal condition : within ± 30 d
2-3. OPERATING VOLTAGE
. Power voltage : AC 100 V to 120 V / (UC)

AC 200 V to 240 V / (CE)
. Power frequency : 50/60 Hz
. Power consumption : (UC) : 85 W/DSR-60, 140 W/DSR-80/80P
(CE) : 87 W/DSR-60P, 145 W/DSR-80P
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 2-1
2-4. INSTALLATION SPACE
(1) The rear side must be at least 40 cm away from the walls for ventilation and maintenance.
(2) When the unit is operated on a desk or similar condition, assure that the clearance above the unit is at least 40 cm to
provide accessibility to the printed circuit boards and other mechanical parts. Note that it is not necessary to provide the
space when the unit is mounted in a rack since the printed circuit boards can be repaired after it is pulled out.
174 (4U)
191
372 27.5 400 44

427 494
512
( Set’s height at
rack mounting. ) 30 (handle hight) 577 (maximum traveling distance)
174
87
when rack-mounted
(height as slide rail center) Unit : mm
2-5. SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
. AC power cord : (1)

. RCC-5G 9-pin remote cable : (1)
. Operating instructions : (1)
. ClipLink™ Guide : (1)
2-6. OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
. TBC remote control unit : UVR-60/60P

. Rack mount Kit : RMM-130
(The unit can be mounted in a 19-inch standard rack)
. Remote control cable : RCC-5G/10G/30G
. Cleaning cassette tape : PDVM-12CL
. Circus Remote control : SVRM-100A/DSRM-10
. Digital video cassette (Mini size) : PDVM-12ME/22ME/32ME/40ME
. Digital video cassette (Standard size) : PDV-64ME/94ME/124ME/184ME
. SDI output board : DSBK-100/100P (DSR-60/60P)
. QSDI output board : DSBK-110/110P (DSR-60/60P)
. SDI input/output board : DSBK-120/120P (DSR-80/80P)
. Time code input/output board : DSBK-130/130P
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
2-2
2-7. RACK MOUNTING
The unit can be mounted in a 19-inch standard rack. 1. Remove the four screws on right and left side panels.
It is recommended to use the following kit. And install the Inner Members of the rails to the right
and left side panels with the screws removed.
Rack Mount Kit : RMM-130
Screws (B 4x6) Inner memeber
(optional accessory)
or
RACK-MOUNT SLIDES : MODEL 305
slide length 22 inch
(ACCURIDE)
Note for rack mounting :

. When several VTRs are mounted in a rack, it is
recommended to install a fan for ventilation. Good air
circulation is essential to prevent internal heat build-up
in a rack (+5 dC to +40 dC must be met for all units).
. Never remove an upper panel and lower panel during
rack mounting.
. Be sure to secure the rack to the floor to avoid accidents Screws (B 4x6)
Inner member
when a unit is pulled out.
. Connect long enough cables on the connector panel,
considering that the unit is pulled out. 2. Install the Outer Member Brackets of the slide rails to
. This equipment can use with two tiers. the rack. Adjust the distance from the edge of the slide
But with three tiers and more, keep the spaces between rail to the outside of the rack so that it meets the
the each VTRs in the rack 1 unit (about 44 mm) or more. required specification.
L-angle Outer member
Bracket
50 +_ 50 mm
L-angle Rack
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 2-3
3. Remove the two screws (B 4x8) on the right and left
side panels. (Be careful not to lose these four screws.)
Screws (B 4x8)
Screws (B 4x8)
4. Install the L-angles to the holes described in step 3 with

the supplied screws (PSW 4x16) in RMM-130 for
these L-angles.
Screws (PSW 4x16)
L-angle Screws
(PSW 4x16)
L-angle
Note : Never use screws PSW 4x x16 to install the right

and left side panels without L-angles. Be sure
to install the panels with the screws B 4xx8
removed in step 3. Screws for L-angles are
longer than the side panels. Therefore, using
the screws PSW 4x x16 may cause trouble in the
unit.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
2-4
2-8. CONNECTION OF EDITING EQUIPMENT, AND INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS OF
CONNECTORS
2-8-1. Connection of Editing Equipment
Connection for Digital Non-Linear Editing System
The digital non-linear editing system can be configured by connecting between DSR-80/80P/60/60P and the edit station
ES-7.
Use of the QSDI interface (optional board as to DSR-60/60P) enables transfer of the compressed data such as video, audio
and timecode from DSR-80/80P/60/60P to ES-7.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P supports the ClipLink function. The index picture which is recorded on tape and the ClipLink log data
which is stored in the cassette memory can be transferred immediately to ES-7.
. Refer to “ClipLink™ Guide” supplied with the unit for general description of ClipLink functions.
Connection example of digital non-linear editing system when DSR-80/80P is used as a recorder and DSR-60/60P as a
player, is shown below.
. Refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with ES-7 for the connection procedure of the peripheral equipment (such as
control panel ESBK-7011, disk unit ESBK-7045, etc.,) of ES-7.
Note : In this connection example, DSR-80/80P/60/60P is equipped with the optional board DSBK-100/100P/110/
110P/120/120P/130/130P.
1
REF. VIDEO IN QSDI OUT
B B OUT (1/2/3/4)
*
1 QSDI OUT
1 QSDI IN
REMOTE 2 PLAYER
MONITOR VIDEO OUT 2

AUDIO (SUPER) DSR-80/80P (Recorder) Edit station ES-7
DSR-60/60P (Player)
3 1

1 75 Z co-axial cable (optional)
2 9-pin remote cable (5 meter long, supplied)
3 RCA plug (optional)
Video monitor * : DSR-80/80P only
DSR-80/80P/60/60P setting
Switch Setting
REMOTE/LOCAL REMOTE
REF. VIDEO IN terminated in 75 Z ON
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 2-5
Connection for Cut Editing System
Connection example of the cut editing system when DSR-60/60P is connected with DSR-80/80P or DSR-80/80P is
connected with another DSR-80/80P is shown below.
. Refer to the Operating Instructions of other equipment at the same time for connection.
When ASSEMBLE edit or INSERT edit is selected 1 75 Z co-axial cable (optional)

at the editor, the EDIT MODE indicator on the
front panel of DSR-80/80P (recorder) lights, 2 9-pin remote cable (5 meter long, supplied)
entering the editing mode automatically.
1
DSR-60/60P
DSR-80/80P DSR-80/80P
(player) QSDI OUT QSDI IN (recorder)
REF. VIDEO
OUT
MONITOR VIDEO REMOTE MONITOR VIDEO REMOTE

AUDIO OUT 2 AUDIO OUT 2
(SUPER) (SUPER)
3 1 2 3 1 2
Audio input Composite video input Audio input Composite video input
PLAYER REF. VIDEO IN

88:88:88:88 88:88:88:88 888 88:88:88:88
Source monitor Main monitor
RECORDER
Editing control unit

RM-450/PVE-500 (editing side)
Switch setting of DSR-80/80P/60/60P (player) and DSR-80/80P (recorder)
Switch Recorder Player
REMOTE/LOCAL REMOTE REMOTE
. Refer to the Operating Instructions of DSR-80/80P for video/audio input of recorder and for audio mode setting.
Note : When the QSDI interface is used for the connection, monitor of the JOG audio cannot be switched to the
recorder monitor even through recorder enters the E-E mode. Therefore, monitor the JOG audio at the
player side.
About the reference video signal
The reference video signal which is synchronized with the video signal in use, is necessary and must be input to the REF.
VIDEO IN connector for analog signal editing in order that the built-in TBC works correctly and the stable picture and
audio are obtained.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
2-6
Connection for A/B Roll Editing System
Connection example of the A/B roll editing system using a recorder and two players is shown below.
In this example, DSR-80/80P is used as recorder, DSR-60/60P is used as player-1 and an analog betacam video cassette
player UVW-1600/1600P is used as player-2. When you require the completed tape (the tape in which complete packaged
program is stored) in the betacam format, use a betacam VTR as recorder.
The following system configuration diagram is shown with the main emphasis placed on the signal flow. Refer to the
following pages for actual connection procedure and setting of DSR-80/80P (recorder).
Audio monitor system
Source video
Main video monitor monitor
Video signal generator

(Sony Tectronix DSR-80/80P
TSG-130 or equivalent) (recorder)
Delay unit (DPS-D7

or equivalent) a)
SONY
Audio mixer
MXP-290
88:88:88:88 88:88:88:88 888 88:88:88:88
Editing control unit

DME switcher PVE-500 or equivalent (editing side)
DFS-500
SONY
00:00.00.
BETACAM SP
UVW-1600/1600P
DSR-60/60P (player-1)
(player-2)
Video singal a) When the DME switcher DFS-500 is used, video signal phase is
delayed due to processing in DFS-500. A delay unit must be
Audio signal inserted between the audio mixer MXP-290 output and
Reference video signal DSR-80/80P (recorder) audio input.
Control signal
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 2-7
QSDI dubbing
A connection example of QSDI dubbing using DSR-80/80P as a recorder and the DSR-60/60P as a player, is shown below.
1
DSR-60/60P DSR-80/80P
(player) QSDI OUT QSDI IN (recorder)
REMOTE MONITOR VIDEO REMOTE

AUDIO OUT 2
(SUPER)
2 3 1 2
Video monitor
1 75 Z co-axial cable (optional)
2 9-pin remote cable (5 meter long, supplied)
Switch setting of DSR-80/80P (recorder) and DSR-60/60P (player)
Switch Recorder Player
REMOTE/LOCAL LOCAL REMOTE
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
2-8
2-8-2. Matching Connectors
When external cables are connected to the connector on a connector panel during maintenance, the hardware listed below
(or equivalents) must be used.
For DSR-80/80P only DSR-80/80P, 60/60P Side connector Matching Connector/Cable
Panel indication Connector/Cable Sony Part No.
ANALOG IN BNC, MALE 1-560-069-11

O REF. VIDEO IN
O TIME CODE IN
O VIDEO IN
O COMPONENT/RGB VIDEO IN
O S VIDEO IN YC-15 V (1.5 m) optional accessory
O AUDIO IN CH-1/2/3/4 XLR 3P, MALE 1-508-084-11
ANALOG OUT BNC, MALE 1-560-069-11
REF. VIDEO OUT
TIME CODE OUT
VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT/RGB VIDEO OUT
MONITOR AUDIO OUT PIN PLUG Standard Product
S VIDEO OUT YC-15 V (1.5 m) optional accessory
AUDIO OUT CH-1/2/3/4 XLR 3P, FEMALE 1-508-083-11
O QSDI INPUT BNC, MALE 1-560-069-11
QSDI OUTPUT BNC, MALE 1-560-069-11
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) XLR 3P, MALE 1-508-084-11
O INPUT CH-1/2, CH-3/4
O OUTPUT CH-1/2, CH-3/4 XLR 3P, FEMALE 1-508-083-11
TBC REMOTE CONNECTOR, D-SUB 15P, FEMALE 1-561-610-21
and JUNCTION SHELL, 15P 1-561-929-00
REMOTE CONNECTOR, D-SUB 9P, MALE 1-560-651-11
and JUNCTION SHELL, 9P 1-561-749-11
RCC-5G (5 m) supplied accessory
RCC-10G (10 m) optional accessory
RCC-30G (30 m) optional accessory
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 2-9
2-8-3. Input/Output Signals of the Connectors
INPUT
REF.VIDEO : BNCx2 (loop-through)

1.0 Vp-p, 75 Z, sync negative : for composite video signal (black burst signal possible)
VIDEO IN : BNCx2 (loop-through)/DSR-80/80P
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Z, sync negative
COMPONENT/RGB IN VIDEO : BNCx3/DSR-80/80P
Luminance : 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Z, sync negative
R-Y/B-Y : 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Z (NTSC : 75 % PAL : 100 %)
S VIDEO IN : DIN 4Px1/DSR-80/80P
Y : 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Z, sync negative
C : NTSC 0.286 Vp-p (burst level), 75 Z
PAL 0.3 Vp-p (burst level), 75 Z
SDI* : BNCx2 (active-through)/DSR-80/80P
Serial digital interface format (270 Mbps),
SMPTE 259M/ITU-R BT.656
*
Using optional DSBK-120/120P (SDI output board)
QSDI IN : BNCx1/DSR-80/80P
Serial digital interface (DVCAM compression signal : Video + Audio + TC signal)
AUDIO IN : XLR 3Px4/DSR-80/80P
Reference level switchable (_6/0/+4 dBu), 600 Z/10 kZ switchable, balanced
AES/EBU : XLR 3Px2/DSR-80/80P
110 Z, balanced
TIME CODE* : BNCx1/DSR-80/80P
0.5 to 18 Vp-p, 3 kZ, unbalanced
*
Using optional DSBK-130/130P (time code input/output board)
CONTROL-S (SIRCS) : Mini jack (exclusive use)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
2-10
OUTPUT
REF.VIDEO : BNCx1
NTSC 0.286 Vp-p, 75 Z, sync negative (composite sync + burst signal)
PAL 0.3 Vp-p, 75 Z, sync negative (composite sync)
VIDEO OUT : BNCx2
1/2 (SUPER) 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Z, sync negative
COMPONENT/RGB OUT VIDEO : BNCx3
Luminance : 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Z, sync negative
R-Y/B-Y : 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Z (NTSC : 75 % PAL : 100 %)
S VIDEO OUT : DIN 4Px1
Y : 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Z, sync negative
C : NTSC 0.286 Vp-p (burst level), 75 Z
PAL 0.3 Vp-p (burst level), 75 Z
SDI* : BNCx2
Serial digital interface format (270 Mbps),
SMPTE 259M/ITU-R BT.656
*
Using optional DSBK-100/100P (SDI output board)/DSR-60/60P
*
Using optional DSBK-120/120P (SDI input/output board)/DSR-80/80P
*
QSDI OUT : BNCx1
Serial digital interface (DVCAM compression signal : Video + Audio + TC signal)
*
Using optional DSBK-110/110P (QSDI output board)/DSR-60/60P
AUDIO OUT : XLR 3Px4, MALE
+4 dBu, 600 Z load, balanced (low impedance)
MONITOR AUDIO : PHONO JACKx1
_6 dBu, 47 kZ load, unbalanced
HEADPHONES : Stereo phone jackx1
_16 dBu (front VR max.), 8 Z load, unbalanced ø6.3
TIME CODE* : BNCx1
2.2 Vp-p ± 3.0 dB, 75 Z, unbalanced
*
Using optional DSBK-130/130P (time code input/output board)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 2-11
TBC REMOTE (D-sub 15 pin : MALE)
<external view>
Pin No. Signal Operating Voltage IN/OUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 SYNC CONTROL _5 to +5 V IN 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 HUE CONTROL _5 to +5 V IN
3 SC CONTROL _5 to +5 V IN
4 VIDEO LEVEL CONTROL _5 to +5 V IN
5 SET UP CONTROL _5 to +5 V IN
6 CHROMA LEVEL CONTROL _5 to +5 V IN
7 _9 V SUPPLY _9 V OUT
8 GND
9 FRAME GND
10 _ _ _
11 _ _ _
12 _ _ _
13 Y/C DELAY CONTROL _5 to +5 V IN
14 _ _ _
15 +9 V SUPPLY +9 V OUT
REMOTE (D-sub 9 pin : FEMALE)

<external view>
Pin No. Controlling Device Controlled Device 5 4 3 2 1
1 Frame Ground Frame Ground 9 8 7 6
2 Receive A Transmit A
3 Transmit B Receive B
4 Transmit Common Receive Common
5 _ _
6 Receive Common Transmit Common
7 Receive B Transmit B
8 Transmit A Receive A
9 Frame Ground Frame Ground
S VIDEO (Circular 4 pin)

<external view>
Pin No. Output Signal 4 3

1 Y (G) 2 1
2 C (G)
3 Y (X)
4 C (X)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
2-12
2-9. INSTALLATION SETUP AND ADJUSTMENT
2-9-1. Switch Settings on the Connector Panel
When the unit is installed, be sure to perform the following setup and adjustment. If the adjustment is not performed, the
unit may not operate properly.
Refer to the operating instruction “Chapter 1 Editing” for setup and adjustment.
[Connector Panel]
(1) The setting of 75 Z termination switch :
REF VIDEO 75 Z ON/OFF
ON : When the line is terminated in this unit.
OFF : When another unit is connected with this unit.
REMOTE (9P) : LOCAL
RGB OUT : OFF
(2) The setting of audio input level select switch / DSR-80/80P :
+4 dBm : +4 dBu reference level on output side
0 dBm : 0 dBu reference level on output side
_6 dBm : _ 6 dBu reference level on output side
2-9-2. Setting on the Front Panel Unit
[Front Panel] (DSR-80/80P)

(1) AUDIO REC MODE SELECT : Select 2CH/4CH
2CH : FS48 kHz 16 bit
4CH : FS32 kHz 12 bit
(2) VIDEO INPUT select switch setting : COMPOSITE ; Ordinary video signal
S VIDEO ; Y/C separation type S Video signal
COMPONENT ; Component signal (Betacam / RGB)
(SDI)
(3) AUDIO INPUT SELECT : Analog/Digital (AES/EBU) / (SDI)
(4) QSDI : Audio, Video, Time code (EXT. sel) is inputted from QSDI through the 1 BNC Cable.
[MENU Panel]
(1) SYNC PHASE : Adjusts the H sync phase of video output signal with reference to the REF. IN signal.
(2) SC PHASE : Adjusts the subcarrier phase of the composite video output signal with reference to the
REF. IN signal.
(3) MENU : Turns on and off the menu mode.
(4) [(] [)] [&] [*] : Used for item setting in the menu, and for setting the points A and B of REPEAT.
(5) RESET (NO) : Used for the following purposes:
. Initialization of the menu setting
. “No” reply from the DSR-80/80P/60/60P to the inquiry.
. COUNTER reset (on display block)
(6) SET (YES) : Used for the following purposes:
. Storing the menu and setting the points A and B of REPEAT
. “Yes” reply from the DSR-80/80P/60/60P to the inquiry.
(7) TC PRESET / DSR-80/80P : Used for setting the TC initial value and UB data (on display block).
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 2-13
2-9-3. On-board Switch Setting
SV-184
A B C D E F G H J K L M N P
1
S201 S101
2
S101 : 8 bit
Switch No. Description Factory Setting
1 Set this switch to ON in some adjustment modes. OFF

. Search speed in LOCAL is as follows :
PLAY/F.FWD pressed simultaneously : FWD searchx5
PLAY/REW pressed simultaneously : REW searchx5
. HOURS METER can enter reset mode.
2 factory use OFF
3 Use this switch when operating the machine with casseette removed. OFF
4 This defeats an error detection of mechanism and servo system alignment. OFF
5 factory use OFF
6 factory use OFF
7 factory use OFF
8 factory use OFF
S201 : 4 bit
Switch No. Description Factory Setting
1 ITI center shift switch: OFF

Set to ON when playing back the tracking reference tape.
2 factory use OFF
3 factory use OFF
4 factory use OFF
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
2-14
SY-241
1
S201
2
S201 : 4 bit
Destination Code Switch Setting
NTSC PAL
No. 1 OFF ON
*)
No. 2 OFF ON/OFF
*
Note) ON/OFF indicates that either position is
acceptable. Set it to OFF normally.
Function Setting
ON OFF Factory Setting
No. 3 factory use factory use ON

(x1 VTR) (x4 VTR)
No. 4 factory use factory use ON (DSR-60/60P)
(PLAYER) (RECORDER) OFF (DSR-80/80P)
IO-149
1
S601
2
S601 : RGB adjustment switch (factory setting : OFF)

DSR-80/80P/60/60P 2-15
SDI-26
1 S301
S301 : Switch for error check (factory setting : OFF)
2-9-4. System Adjustment After Installation
Observe the following precautions when this equipment is used for editing system.
. The REF. VIDEO INPUT requires video signal which complies with RS-170A and so forth.
. Adjust the sync phase of this equipment to the system sync with [SYNC PHASE] control on the sub
control panel.
. Adjust the SCH phase of this equipment to the system SCH with [SC PHASE] control on the sub
control panel.
. When this equipment is connected to the type of switcher that does not replace the sync signal, the
SYNC/BURST level adjustment is required.
2-9-5. Connection of Editor Controller
When an edit controller is connected, set the edit controller as follows.
1. RM-450
LEFT SWITCH
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OFF _ _ OFF _ _ _ _
RIGHT SWITCH
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NTSC OFF _ OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
PAL ON _ OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
2. PVE-500
No setting is required for equipment connection.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
2-16
3. BVE-600/900/910/2000
NTSC
BLOCK-1 BLOCK-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
DSR-80 80 11 00 96 05 05 03 80 0A 08 FE 00 80 5A FF
DSR-60 80 12 00 96 05 05 03 80 0A 08 FE 00 80 5A FF
DSR-85 80 10 00 96 05 05 03 80 0A 08 FE 00 80 5A FF
PAL
BLOCK-1 BLOCK-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
DSR-80P 81 11 00 7D 05 05 02 80 0A 07 FE 00 80 4C FF
DSR-60P 81 12 00 7D 05 05 02 80 0A 07 FE 00 80 4C FF
DSR-85P 81 10 00 7D 05 05 02 80 0A 07 FE 00 80 4C FF
4. FXE-100/100P/120/120P
NTSC
BLOCK-1 BLOCK-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
DSR-80 80 11 00 96 05 05 03 80 0A 08 FE 00 80 5A FF
DSR-60 80 12 00 96 05 05 03 80 0A 08 FE 00 80 5A FF
DSR-85 80 10 00 96 05 05 03 80 0A 08 FE 00 80 5A FF
PAL
BLOCK-1 BLOCK-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
DSR-80P 81 11 00 7D 05 05 02 80 0A 07 FE 00 80 4C FF
DSR-60P 81 12 00 7D 05 05 02 80 0A 07 FE 00 80 4C FF
DSR-85P 81 10 00 7D 05 05 02 80 0A 07 FE 00 80 4C FF
5. BVE-800
SW2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NTSC ON OFF ON ON _ ON ON _
PAL ON OFF ON ON _ ON ON _
SW3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NTSC OFF ON OFF ON _ ON OFF OFF
PAL ON ON OFF ON _ ON OFF OFF
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 2-17
2-10. SETUP CHECK SHEET
Write down the setup information (setup menu and switch positions on board) before starting to repair the equipment. Use
it for re-setup.
For an editing room where system connection is frequently changed, copy this sheet and write the several types of setup.
. Setup menu information can be saved separately from record area in this equipment. But some repair work can destroy
the saved information. This sheet is effective for the backup.
CONNECTOR PANEL
AUDIO IN CH-1 600 Z / DSR-80/80P [|] ON [|] OFF

REF. VIDEO IN 75 Z [|] ON [|] OFF
VIDEO IN 75 Z / DSR-80/80P [|] ON [|] OFF
FRONT PANEL
AUDIO REC MODE SELECT / DSR-80/80P [|] 2CH [|] 4CH

VIDEO IN / DSR-80/80P [|] Y-R, B [|] COMPOSITE [|] S VIDEO [|] SDI
AUDIO IN / DSR-80/80P [|] ANALOG [|] DIGITAL (AES/EBU) [|] SDI
REMOTE/LOCAL [|] REMOTE [|] LOCAL
COUNTER/TC/U-BIT [|] COUNTER [|] TC [|] U-BIT
HEADPHONES
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
2-18
SETUP MENU
* **
: DSR-80/80P only : DSR-60/60P only
Menu Level 1 Menu Level 2/3 Factory Setting Setting

**
REPEAT FUNCTION REPEAT MODE OFF
REPEAT TOP TAPE TOP
REPEAT END VIDEO END
A PRESET 00 : 00 : 00 : 00
B PRESET 00 : 00 : 00 : 00
*
OPERATIONAL FUNCTION AUTO EE SELECT CASSETTE OUT EE
F. FWD/REW PB
STOP PB
STANDBY OFF PB
LOCAL ENABLE STOP & EJECT
MAX SEARCH SPEED x32
AUTO REW ENABLE
PREROLL TIME 5 SEC
AFTER CUE-UP STOP
PLAY START NTSC : 5 FRAME DELAY
PAL : 4 FRAME DELAY
*
A1 EDIT CH CH-1
*
A2 EDIT CH CH-2
*
A MODE CHANGE OFF
*
QSDI AUDIO MON QSDI
DISPLAY CONTROL CHARA.DISPLAY ON
CHARA. POSITION
CHARA. TYPE WHITE (with BKGD)
DISPLAY INFO TIME DATA & STATUS
SUB STATUS OFF
MENU DISPLAY WHITE (with BKGD)
PEAK HOLD OFF
OVER DISP HOLD OFF
BRIGHTNESS 100 %
ALARM ON
REF. ALARM ON (LIMITED) /DSR-80/80P
OFF/DSR-60/60P
*
TIME CODE TC MODE INT. PRESET
*
RUN MODE FREE RUN
DF MODE (NTSC only) ON (DF)
*
UB BINARY GP. 000 : NOT SPECIFIED
TAPE PROTECTION FROM STOP STOP TIMER 8 MIN
NEXT MODE STANDBY OFF
FROM STILL STILL TIMER 8 MIN
NEXT MODE STEP FWD
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 2-19
Menu Level 1 Menu Level 2/3 Factory Setting Setting
VIDEO CONTROL STILL MODE FIELD 1 STILL

*
SETUP REMOVE OFF
SETUP ADD (NTSC only) OFF
SYNC ON GREEN ON
CC (F1) BLANK (NTSC only) OFF
CC (F2) BLANK (NTSC only) OFF
*
AUDIO CONTROL DIGITAL INPUT VARIABLE
REC POINT MUTE OFF
REF LEVEL NTSC : _20 dB
PAL : _18 dB
OUTPUT LEVEL +4 dB
MENU GRADE BASIC
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
2-20
SECTION 3
SERVICE OVERVIEW DSR-60 / 60P DSR-80 / 80P
3-1. LOCATION OF MAIN PARTS
3-1-1. Location of Printed Circuit Boards
1 1
2 2
!\ 3
3 4
4 !'
5
5 6 !;
6 !] 7
8 !\
9
7
8 !/
![ !]
!=
9 !-
!- ![
!/ !=
Board Name Circuit Configuration Board Name Circuit Configuration
1 SDI-26A board (DSBK-110/110P) QSDI OUTPUT INTERFACE 1 DA-119 board AUDIO ANALOG/DIGITAL IN/OUT PROCESS
2 DV-17/17A board VIDEO DIGITAL OUT PROCESS 2 SDI-26 board QSDI INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE
AUDIO ANALOG/DIGITAL OUT PROCESS 3 DV-15/15A board VIDEO DIGITAL IN/OUT PROCESS
3 IO-149B/149C VIDEO ANALOG OUT PROCESS, REF SIGNAL GEN 4 SDI-27 board (DSBK-120/120P) SDI INPUT INTERFACE
VIDEO OUT DRIVER 5 IO-149/149A board VIDEO ANALOG IN/OUT PROCESS, REF SIGNAL GEN,
4 SY-241B board SYSTEM CONTROL VIDEO IN/OUT DRIVER
5 SV-184 board SERVO MAIN, CONTROL 6 SY-241 board SYSTEM CONTROL
6 TC-90 board (DSBK-130/130P) EXTERNAL TIME CODE IN/OUT 7 TC-90 board (DSBK-130/130P) EXTERNAL TIME CODE IN/OUT
7 SDI-28 board (DSBK-100/100P) SDI OUTPUT INTERFACE 8 SV-184A board SERVO MAIN CONTROL
8 HP-73 board HEADPHONE VOLUME/CONNECTOR, SIRCS CONNECTOR 9 SDI-28 board (DSBK-120/120P) SDI OUTPUT INTERFACE
9 FP-75 board SUB PANEL MENU KEY/AUDIO MONITOR SWITCH, !/ HP-73 board HEADPHONE VOLUME/CONNECTOR, SIRCS CONNECTOR
SYNC/SC PHASE ADJUST !- FP-75 board SUB PANEL MENU KEY/AUDIO MONITOR SWITCH,
!/ KY-336B board KEY SWITCH, FL DISPLAY/DRIVE SYNC/SC PHASE ADJUST
!- PRE-39 board PB DIGITAL PROCESS != KY-336 board KEY SWITCH, AUDIO REC VOLUME, FL DISPLAY/DRIVE
!= MB-713 board MOTHER BOARD, REMOTE CONNECTOR ![ PRE-34 board REC/PB HEAD AMP
![ RP-103 board PB HEAD AMP, RF A/D !] MB-712 board MOTHER BOARD
!] CP-276B board ANALOG VIDEO IN/OUT, TC OUT, AUDIO MONITOR !\ CP-276A board ANALOG VIDEO IN/OUT, TC IN/OUT, AUDIO MONITOR
!\ CP-281B board ANALOG AUDIO OUT !; RP-101 board REC/PB HEAD AMP, RF A/D
!' CP-281 board ANALOG AUDIO IN/OUT, AES/EBU IN/OUT, BAL→UNBAL,
AUDIO IN LEVEL SELECT
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-1 3-1

3-1-2. Location of Main Mechanical Parts
Board Locations of Mechanism Deck
Board Name Circuit Configuration

1 1 PTC-87 board TAPE TOP/END LED
2 !=
2 TR-93 board TEN-REG ARM POSITION SENSOR
3 3 PTC-86 board TAPE END SENSOR, TENSION SENSOR CONNECTION
4 SE-315 board S REEL FG SENSOR
4
5 RM-159 board S REEL MOTOR/BRAKE SOL/FG SENSOR CONNECTION
6 FP-90 board CONNECTION
!- 7 RM-160 board T REEL MOTOR/BRAKE SOL/FG SENSOR CONNECTION
8 SE-361 board T REEL FG SENSOR
9 PTC-85 board TAPE TOP SENSOR
!/ MS-43 board DRUM/CAPSTAN MOTOR DRIVE, CAPSTAN FG AMP,
TAPE TOP/END SENSOR AMP, REEL POSITION SENSOR,
SV DATA MEMORY
!- PTC-88 board THREADING FG SENSOR, THREADING MOTOR CONNECTION
!= PTC-84 board THREAD/UNTHREAD END SENSOR,
PINCH SOL/CLEAN SOL/DEW CONNECTION
![ CC-75 board CASSETTE COMPARTMENT DOWN 1/2/3 SENSOR
!/
CC UP/DOWN MOTOR CONNECTION
5 !] CC-76 board CASSETTE IN 1/2/3 SENSOR

9
8
7
![
!]
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-2 3-2
SECTION 3
SERVICE OVERVIEW DSR-60 / 60P DSR-80 / 80P
3-1. LOCATION OF MAIN PARTS
3-1-1. Location of Printed Circuit Boards
1 1
2 2
!\ 3
3 4
4 !'
5
5 6 !;
6 !] 7
8 !\
9
7
8 !/
![ !]
!=
9 !-
!- ![
!/ !=
Board Name Circuit Configuration Board Name Circuit Configuration
1 SDI-26A board (DSBK-110/110P) QSDI OUTPUT INTERFACE 1 DA-119 board AUDIO ANALOG/DIGITAL IN/OUT PROCESS
2 DV-17/17A board VIDEO DIGITAL OUT PROCESS 2 SDI-26 board QSDI INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE
AUDIO ANALOG/DIGITAL OUT PROCESS 3 DV-15/15A board VIDEO DIGITAL IN/OUT PROCESS
3 IO-149B/149C VIDEO ANALOG OUT PROCESS, REF SIGNAL GEN 4 SDI-27 board (DSBK-120/120P) SDI INPUT INTERFACE
VIDEO OUT DRIVER 5 IO-149/149A board VIDEO ANALOG IN/OUT PROCESS, REF SIGNAL GEN,
4 SY-241B board SYSTEM CONTROL VIDEO IN/OUT DRIVER
5 SV-184 board SERVO MAIN, CONTROL 6 SY-241 board SYSTEM CONTROL
6 TC-90 board (DSBK-130/130P) EXTERNAL TIME CODE IN/OUT 7 TC-90 board (DSBK-130/130P) EXTERNAL TIME CODE IN/OUT
7 SDI-28 board (DSBK-100/100P) SDI OUTPUT INTERFACE 8 SV-184A board SERVO MAIN CONTROL
8 HP-73 board HEADPHONE VOLUME/CONNECTOR, SIRCS CONNECTOR 9 SDI-28 board (DSBK-120/120P) SDI OUTPUT INTERFACE
9 FP-75 board SUB PANEL MENU KEY/AUDIO MONITOR SWITCH, !/ HP-73 board HEADPHONE VOLUME/CONNECTOR, SIRCS CONNECTOR
SYNC/SC PHASE ADJUST !- FP-75 board SUB PANEL MENU KEY/AUDIO MONITOR SWITCH,
!/ KY-336B board KEY SWITCH, FL DISPLAY/DRIVE SYNC/SC PHASE ADJUST
!- PRE-39 board PB DIGITAL PROCESS != KY-336 board KEY SWITCH, AUDIO REC VOLUME, FL DISPLAY/DRIVE
!= MB-713 board MOTHER BOARD, REMOTE CONNECTOR ![ PRE-34 board REC/PB HEAD AMP
![ RP-103 board PB HEAD AMP, RF A/D !] MB-712 board MOTHER BOARD
!] CP-276B board ANALOG VIDEO IN/OUT, TC OUT, AUDIO MONITOR !\ CP-276A board ANALOG VIDEO IN/OUT, TC IN/OUT, AUDIO MONITOR
!\ CP-281B board ANALOG AUDIO OUT !; RP-101 board REC/PB HEAD AMP, RF A/D
!' CP-281 board ANALOG AUDIO IN/OUT, AES/EBU IN/OUT, BAL→UNBAL,
AUDIO IN LEVEL SELECT
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-1 3-1

3-1-2. Location of Main Mechanical Parts
Board Locations of Mechanism Deck
Board Name Circuit Configuration

1 1 PTC-87 board TAPE TOP/END LED
2 !=
2 TR-93 board TEN-REG ARM POSITION SENSOR
3 3 PTC-86 board TAPE END SENSOR, TENSION SENSOR CONNECTION
4 SE-315 board S REEL FG SENSOR
4
5 RM-159 board S REEL MOTOR/BRAKE SOL/FG SENSOR CONNECTION
6 FP-90 board CONNECTION
!- 7 RM-160 board T REEL MOTOR/BRAKE SOL/FG SENSOR CONNECTION
8 SE-361 board T REEL FG SENSOR
9 PTC-85 board TAPE TOP SENSOR
!/ MS-43 board DRUM/CAPSTAN MOTOR DRIVE, CAPSTAN FG AMP,
TAPE TOP/END SENSOR AMP, REEL POSITION SENSOR,
SV DATA MEMORY
!- PTC-88 board THREADING FG SENSOR, THREADING MOTOR CONNECTION
!= PTC-84 board THREAD/UNTHREAD END SENSOR,
PINCH SOL/CLEAN SOL/DEW CONNECTION
![ CC-75 board CASSETTE COMPARTMENT DOWN 1/2/3 SENSOR
!/
CC UP/DOWN MOTOR CONNECTION
5 !] CC-76 board CASSETTE IN 1/2/3 SENSOR

9
8
7
![
!]
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-2 3-2
Locations of Main Parts
1
2
3
4 @=
5
6
7
8
9
!/
!-
@-
!= @/
!.
![ !,
!]
!'
!\
!;
1 Capstan Motor != S Brake Solenoid

2 Pinch Press Assembly ![ RS Motor
3 Pinch Solenoid !] T Reel Motor
4 Pinch Roller Arm Assembly !\ T Brake Solenoid
5 S Tension Regulator Arm (TG-3) !; Reel Block (T) Assembly
6 S Drawer Arm (TG-2) !' Reel Brake (T) Assembly
7 S Arm Base (TG-1) !, Reel Table (T) Assembly
8 Reel Table (S) Assembly !. T Drawer Arm (TG-11)
9 Reel Brake (S) Assembly @/ Threading Ring Assembly
!/ S Reel Motor @- Gear Box Motor
!- Reel Block (S) Assembly @= Drum Assembly
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-3
3-1-3. Location of Sensors (1)
!=
1
2 !-
3
!/
4
8
7
6
1 Tape beginning / end detect LED 7 Record proof sensor (common to standard and mini
This sensor detects the beginning and end of the tape. size cassettes)
Switch protecting S cassette metal tape from recording.
2 Tension sensor
A tension arm operates to keep the tape tension 8 Take-up reel table rotation sensor
constant during recording and playing. The tension This sensor detects the rotation of the take-up reel
sensor detects the position of the tension arm. table.
The FG output of this detection sensor is input to the
3 Tape end sensor servo circuit to control the speed and torque of rotation
This sensor detects the end of the tape running in the of the reel motor.
FWD direction.
9 Tape beginning sensor
4 Supply reel table rotation sensor This sensor detects the beginning of the tape running in
This sensor detects the rotation of the supply reel table. the FWD direction.
The PG output of this sensor is input to the servo
circuit to control the speed and torque of the reel motor !/ Gear box motor rotation sensor
rotation. This sensor detects the rotation speed of the gear box
motor.
5 Reel L/S position sensor The FG output of this detection sensor is input to the
This sensor detects whether the reel table is at the servo circuit to control the threading speed so that too
specified position in accordance with the size of the much force is not applied to the tape during threading.
inserted cassette tape.
!- Condensation sensor
6 Cassette memory terminal This sensor detects condensation generated in the set.
This terminal performs reading and writing of the data
in the cassette memory, and checks the presence of the != Threading end/unthreading end sensor
cassette memory. This sensor detects whether the threading ring is at the
position of the threading end or unthreading end.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-4
Location of Sensors (2) ..... Cassette compartment
CC-75 board
1
2
3
CC-76 borad
1, 2, 3 Cassette down sensor

The combination of sensors 1, 2 and 3 detects movement of the cassette
compartment.
4 Left side in-sensor for standard and mini cassettes

5 Right side in-sensor for mini cassette
6 Right side in-sensor for standard cassette
The combination of sensors 4 and 5 detects insertion of a mini cassette.
The combination of sensors 4 and 6 detects insertion of a standard cassette.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-5
3-2. FUNCTIONS OF RECORD PROOF HOLE AND RECORD PROOF PLUG OF CASSETTE
Standard cassette
Cassette cover release claw
Record proof
hole
4 3 2 1
Reel rotation stopper
Record proof plug
Hole and plug for record proof
Mini cassette
Record enable Record protect
REC REC
SAVE SAVE
. This plug controls the record proof

switch according to open or close
position.
Cassette cover release claw
Record proof
hole
4 3 2 1 Reel rotation stopper

Record proof plug
Pin No. Function
Equipped with built-in memory Not equipped with built-in memory
1 +DC Detecting tape thickness

2 DATA Detecting tape type (Example: ME/MP)
3 CLOCK Detecting tape application (Example: consumer/professional)
4 GND _
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-6
3-3. ERROR MESSAGES
3-3-1. Alarm Display
This unit has an alarm display function.

When a problem is detected, an alarm is displayed immediately in the timer counter block. The alarm and a message
describing the countermeasure are displayed on a video monitor.
The alarm and message can be displayed on a monitor by connecting a monitor to the VIDEO 2 (SUPER) OUTPUT
connector, and by turning on the CHARA. DISPLAY item on the SETUP menu using the DISPLAY CONTROL.
This unit has two types of alarms: one is for operators while the other is for service persons. This manual describes only
the alarms for service persons. For details of alarms for operators, refer to the operating instruction or overview in this
manual. Activating the alarm display may influence the system, such as when the reference video signal is not used.
Therefore, you can select whether or not to display the alarm from the Setup menu selection. However, the alarms for
service persons are displayed regardless of the Setup menu setting.
1. Alarm display when the main power is turned on
Detection : Checks the settings of switch S201 on

the SY-241 board and the contents of ALARM
non-volatile memory (EEPROM).
SETTING HAS BEEN
Operation after detection : Set the switch S201 to the factory use. CHANGED TO
(Refer to Installation Manual.) X1 FEEDER NTSC (UC)
Display : The alarm is displayed until any key is CHECK THE S201 SWITCH
pressed. ON THE SY BOARD.
Detection : Checks the version of the Setup menu.

Operation after detection : The Setup menu operates using the ALARM
factory settings. The contents of the THE SETUP MENU SOFTWARE
non-volatile memory (EEPROM) HAS BEEN UPGRADED.
remain unchanged. Therefore, if the SET THE SETUP MENU ITEMS
setting of the Setup menu is not TO THE DESIRED SETTINGS
changed, the same alarm will appear OR ACTIVATE THE ’ LOAD
MENU DATA ’ (MAINTENANCE
when the main power is turned on. MENU) FUNCTION.
Display : The alarm is displayed until any key is
pressed.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-7
Detection : Checks that switch S101, S201 on the
ALARM
SV-184 board is set to ON.
Operation after detection : None THE UNIT IS IN
Display : The alarm is displayed until any key is ADJUSTMENT MODE.
pressed. SET THE SWITCHES OF
S101 AND S201 ON THE
SV BOARD TO OFF.
Detection : Checks that the FACTORY USE item

of the Setup menu is changed. ALARM
Operation after detection : None SELECTIONS OF THE SETUP

Display : The alarm is displayed until any key is MENU’S FACTORY USE
ITEMS HAVE BEEN CHANGED.
pressed.
SET THESE ITEMS TO
FACTORY PRESET VALUES.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-8
3-3-2. Error Codes
This unit has a self diagnostics function which detects internal

abnormalities. When a problem is detected, an error code is ERROR
displayed immediately in the time counter block, and details of the AN ERROR HAS BEEN
error appear on the video monitor. DETECTED INDORM SERVICE
OF FOLLOWING CODE :
An error code can be displayed on a monitor by connecting a XX-XXX
monitor to the VIDEO 2 (SUPER) OUTPUT connector, and by
turning on the CHARA. DISPLAY item on the SETUP menu PRESS EJECT KEY
TO EJECT TAPE.
using the DISPLAY CONTROL.
Note : An error code appears in the column shown by XX-

XXX on the video monitor.
When detected, some errors turn this unit to AUTO OFF.

(See from page 3-14 of item “3. Error Codes”, excluding error
code 08-032.)
This error is kept in memory even after the main power of this unit
is turned off. In other words, the error code or the contents of the
detected error appear even when the main power of this unit is
turned off and then back on again, so this unit enters AUTO OFF
mode again.
The machine enters the emergency EJECT mode when the

[EJECT] key is pressed at this moment. In the emergency
EJECT mode, the tape is ejected gently by the motor (if working)
assuming that the tape is slack or a device may be faulty.
The following message appears on the video monitor when the

ERROR
machine enters the emergency EJECT mode.
The error code is displayed on the time counter. TAPE IS BEING EJECTED.
WAIT UNTIL THIS
INDICATION GOES OFF.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-9
The following message appears on the video monitor when a
cassette tape is ejected in the emergency EJECT mode. ERROR
The error code is displayed on the time counter. AN ERROR HAS BEEN
DETECTED INFORM SERVICE
OF FOLLOWING CODE :
XX-XXX
The following message appears on the video monitor when a

cassette tape cannot be ejected with the emergency EJECT mode. ERROR
The error code is displayed on the time counter. TAPE CANNOT BE EJECTED.
INFORM SERVICE
OF FOLLOWING CODE :
XX-XXX
Perform step 3-10 when a cassette tape cannot be ejected with the
emergency EJECT mode.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-10
1. Main codes and sub codes
. Main codes
The main code is a two-digit number that indicates the system which sensed the error.
Main code 0X : Servo and tape pass system error
Main code 2X : Mechanism control system error
Main code 3X : Sensor error
Main code 91 : Communication system and interface system error
Main code 92 to 94 : Sync. system error
Main code 95 : Digital signal process system error and communication error with ICs
. Sub codes
The sub code is a three-digit number. Each digit has the following meaning.
When the main code is 0X or 2X :
X X X Second digit : Device which senses abnormality

0 : Mode cannot be identified, or mode identification is
Third digit : Error symptom not necessary.
Second digit : Device which senses abnormality 1 : Cassette up/down motor/sensor
First digit : Mode which senses abnormality. 2 : Threading motor/FG/sensor
3 : Drum motor/FG
First digit : Mode which senses abnormality. 4 : Capstan motor/FG
0 : Mode cannot be identified, or mode identification is 5 : Supply reel motor/FG
not necessary. 6 : Supply reel brake solenoid
1 : Cassette down mode 7 : Takeup reel motor/FG
2 : Threading mode 8 : Takeup reel brake solenoid
3 : STOP mode 9 : Supply and takeup reel motor/FG
4 : F. FWD or REW mode A : Tension regulator
5 : SEARCH mode B : Pinch solenoid
6 : PLAY or RECORD mode C : Reel position motor/sensor
7 : STANDBY-OFF mode D : Cleaning solenoid
8 : Unthreading mode
9 : Cassette up mode Third digit: Error symptom
10 : Cassette out mode 0 : Mode identification is not necessary.
(State that a cassette is ejected.) 1 : Operation could not be completed within the specified
time.
2 : Abnormal speed detected.
3 : Tape slack detected.
4 : FG cannot be detected.
5 : FG detected.
6 : Rotating direction error detected.
7 : Excessive tension detected.
8 : Abnormal current detected.
9 : The full top or full end of a tape cannot be released.
A : Retry in progress
(Unthreaded once than back to threading again)
When the main code is 3X :
DSR-80/80P/60/60P All sub codes are 000. 3-11

When the main code is 91: When the main code is from 92 to 94 :
X X X X X X
Third digit : Error symptom Third digit : Abnormal signal

Second digit : CPU (microprocessor) or IC of the Second digit : IC to which the signal is input
communication counterpart. First digit :CPU (microprocessor) which detects the
First digit :CPU (microprocessor) or IC which detects the abnormality
abnormality. . . . . .Same as the main code 91
First and second digits: CPU (microprocessor) code. Third digit : Abnormal signal
1 : System control main CPU 1 : Reference frame pulse of the output signal (RSG OE)
2 : Keyboard microprocessor 2 : Reference track pulse of the playback side (P-TRKT1)
3 : Memory 3 : Reference frame pulse of the playback side (P-FLTT1)
4 : Servo main CPU 4 : Reference track pulse of the record side (R-TRKT1)
5 : Servo sub microprocessor 5 : Reference frame pulse of the record side (R-FLTT1)
6 : TBC microprocessor
7 : SPCON microprocessor When the main code is 95 :
8 : TC IC
E : QSDI interface microprocessor X X X
F : SDI OUT microprocessor
Second and third digits : IC of the communication
Third digit : Error symptom (when the communication counterpart.
counterpart is other than memory) (The second digit
1 : Abnormal checksum indicates the
2 : Abnormality of overrun communication line
3 : Abnormal parity number and the third
4 : Abnormal framing digit indicates the CS
5 : Communication could not be completed in the number.)
specified time. First digit : CPU (microprocessor) or IC which detects the
6 : Abnormality in the servo adjustment data area of abnormality.
EEPROM . . . . .Same as the main code 91
7 : Abnormality in the setup menu area of EEPROM
8 : Abnormality in the hours meter area of EEPROM
Third digit : Error symptom (when the communication

counterpart is memory)
1 : Abnormality in the external data area
2 : Abnormality in the internal data area
3 : Abnormality in the common memory-1 area
4 : Abnormality in the common memory-2 area
5 : Abnormality in the external serial memory-1 area
6 : Abnormality in the external serial memory-2 area
9 : Abnormality in the EEPROM area
A : Abnormality in the NVRAM area
F : Abnormality of CM
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-12
2. Display of previously detected error codes
When this unit detects an internal abnormality, the error code is memorized in EEPROM.
(Excluding error code 9X-XXX)
A maximum of 8 error codes detected previously, starting from the latest error code, can be displayed.
The error code history can be displayed.
1. While pressing the [&] key, press the [MENU] key.

MAINTENENCE MENU
MENU DATA CONTROL ➜
EDIT CHECK
SERVO CHECK
SERVO ADJUST
PLL ADJUST
SERVICE SUPPORT
OTHERS
2. Move the cursor to SERVICE SUPPORT so that the letters are

highlighted using the [(], [)] keys, then press the [*] key. MAINTENENCE MENU
SERVICE SUPPORT
➜
ERROR LOG ➜
MANUAL EJECT
DIAGNOSTICS CONTROL
MAINTENENCE MENU
SERVICE SUPPORT
ERROR LOG
➜
➜
ERROR-08-03A
ERROR-02-674
ERROR-02-603
ERROR-08-03A
ERROR-02-674
ERROR-02-603
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-13
3. Error codes
. Main code 0X: abnormality of servo and tape run system
1 Main code 02
Operation after
Sub
Detected contents detecting an Operable mode Display period
code
abnormality
058 Detected an abnormal current in the S reel motor.
068 Detected an abnormal current in the S reel brake solenoid.
EJECT
078 Detected an abnormal current in the T reel motor. AUTO OFF
(Emergency EJECT)
088 Detected an abnormal current in the T reel brake solenoid.
0B8 Detected an abnormal current in the Pinch solenoid.
Failed to detect the S reel FG by the FG check during
154
cassette tape insertion.
Failed to detect the T reel FG by the FG check during Eject the cassette
174 _
cassette tape insertion. tape.
Failed to detect both S and T reel FGs by the FG check
194
during cassette tape insertion.
255 Detected the S reel FG during threading.
274 Failed to detect the T reel FG during threading.
275 Detected the T reel FG during threading.
291 Failed to complete winding a tape.
355 Detected the S reel FG during STOP and STILL.
375 Detected the T reel FG during STOP and STILL.
Displayed until the
395 Detected both S and T reel FGs during STOP and STILL.
next cassette tape
402 Detected an abnormal tape speed during F. FWD and REW. is inserted.
403 Detected slack tape during F. FWD and REW.
454 Failed to detect the S reel FG during F. FWD and REW.
474 Failed to detect the T reel FG during F. FWD and REW.
Failed to detect both S and reel FGs during F. FWD and
494 EJECT
REW. AUTO OFF
Detected the abnormal direction of S and T reel rotation (Emergency EJECT)
496
during F. FWD and REW.
503 Detected slack tape during search.
554 Failed to detect the S reel FG during search.
574 Failed to detect the T reel FG during search.
594 Failed to detect the S and T reel FGs during search.
Detected the abnormal direction of S and T reel rotation
596
during search.
603 Detected slack tape during PLAY and REC.
654 Failed to detect the S reel FG during PLAY and REC.
674 Failed to detect the T reel FG during PLAY and REC.
694 Failed to detect both S and reel FGs during PLAY and REC.
Detected the abnormal direction of S and T reel rotation
696
during PLAY and REC.
803 Detected slack tape during unthreading.
855 Failed to detect the S reel FG during unthreading.
874 Failed to detect the T reel FG during unthreading.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-14
Operation after
Sub
code
abnormality
A55 Detected the S reel FG during cassette eject.
A75 Detected the T reel FG during cassette eject. Insertion of a cassette is inhibited until the error is solved.
A95 Detected both S and T reel FGs during cassette eject.
2 Main code 06
Operation after
Sub
code
abnormality
The mode at the The machine
time of detection is operates normally
kept continued. (If after the error is
the mode is PLAY, solved. The PLAY Displayed until the
Detected the abnormal tape tension during PLAY and PLAY continues.) and RECORD error is solved and
6A7
RECORD. If mode is changed modes continue any key is
to other than PLAY but other modes pressed.
and RECORD, are changed to
machine enters STOP then EJECT
AUTO OFF. (Emergency
EJECT).
3 Main code 07
Operation after
Sub
code
abnormality
The machine
operates normally Displayed until any
042 Detected the abnormal capstan speed. STOP
after the error is key is pressed.
solved.
Displayed until the
Failed to detect the capstan FG by the FG check during Ejects a cassette
144 _ next cassette is
cassette tape insertion. tape.
inserted.
4 Main code 08
Operation after
Sub
code
abnormality
Detected the abnormal drum speed.
Video monitor display
ERROR
Retry (The
DRUM SPEED ERROR mechanism
Displayed until the
03A HAS BEEN DETECTED unthreads once EJECT
error is solved.
WAIT UNTIL THIS then threads
INDICATION GOES OFF. again.)
Displayed until the

032 The abnormal speed error is not solved. AUTO OFF EJECT next cassette is
inserted.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-15
5 Main code 09
Operation after
Sub
code
abnormality
028 Detected the abnormal threading motor current.
The full top or full end of a tape cannot be released
209 during threading even though short FF or short REW is
performed. EJECT Displayed until the
AUTO OFF next cassette is
221 Failed to complete threading within the specified time (Emergency EJECT)
inserted.
224 Failed to detect the threading FG during threading.
821 Failed to complete unthreading within the specified time
824 Failed to detect the threading FG during unthreading.
. Main code 2X: Abnormality related to the mechanism control
1 Main code 20
Operation after
Sub
code
abnormality
Detected the abnormal current in the cassette up/down
018
motor.
Displayed until the
Failed to complete the cassette down motion within the EJECT
111 AUTO OFF next cassette is
specified time. (Emergency EJECT) inserted.
Failed to complete the cassette up motion within the
911
specified time.
2 Main code 21
Operation after
Sub
code
abnormality
EJECT
0C8 Detected the abnormal current in the reel position motor. AUTO OFF Displayed until the
(Emergency EJECT)
next cassette is
Failed to complete the reel position movement within the Eject a cassette
1C1 _ inserted.
specified time. tape.
3 Main code 22
Operation after
Sub
code
abnormality
Displayed until the
Detected an abnormal current flowing through the
0D8 AUTO OFF EJECT next cassette is
cleaning solenoid.
inserted.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-16
. Main code 3X: Sensor trouble
Sub codes are all 000.
Operation after
Sub
code
abnormality
30 Detected the tape top and tape end at the same time. STOP play, EJECT
31 Failed to release the tape top. STOP play, FF, EJECT
32 Failed to release the tape end. STOP play, REW, EJECT
The reel position sensor detected the large and small Insertion of cassette
33 _
positions at the same time. tape is inhibited. Displayed until the
The threading end sensor and the unthreading end Insertion of cassette error is solved.
34 _
sensor have detected the end at the same time. tape is inhibited.
Detected abnormality of the cassette compartment
35 EJECT _
position sensor.
36 Detected that the fan motor has stopped. _ All mode
37 Detected an abnormality of temperature sensor. _ All mode
. Main code 91: Abnormality of communication system or interface system
Main Sub
Contents
code code
215 Communication error between system control and keyboard
145 Communication error between system control and servo
165 Communication error between system control and TBC
175 Communication error between system control and SPCON
1E5 Communication error between system control and QSDI interface
1F5 Communication error between system control and SDI OUT
455 Communication error between main servo and drum
131 System control detected abnormality of external memory.
132 System control detected abnormality of internal memory.
133 System control detected abnormality of common memory with servo.
91 System control detected abnormality of common memory with
134
SPCON.
431 Servo detected abnormality of external memory.
731 SPCON detected abnormality of external memory.
732 SPCON detected abnormality of internal memory.
SPCON detected abnormality of common memory with system
733
control.
735 SPCON detected abnormality of SCOM1 memory.
736 SPCON detected abnormality of SCOM2 memory.
139 Detected abnormality in the setup menu data area.
439 Detected abnormality in the servo adjustment data area.
539 Detected abnormality in the EQ data area.
13F Communication error with CM
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-17
. Main code 92 to 94: Abnormality of sync system
Main Sub
Contents
code code
101 System control detected abnormality in RSG OE.
102 System control detected abnormality in P-TRKT1.
702 SPCON detected abnormality in P-TRKT1.
92
703 SPCON detected abnormality in P-FLTT1.
704 SPCON detected abnormality in R-TRKT1.
705 SPCON detected abnormality in R-FLTT1.
93 403 Servo detected abnormality in P-FLTT1.
94 405 Servo detected abnormality in R-FLTT1.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-18
. Main code 95: Communication error with digital process system IC
Main Sub
Contents
code code
121 Communication error between system control and CTLG-R MOD
124 Communication error between system control and CTLG-P MOD
126 Communication error between system control and CTLG 2
522 Communication error between drum and CHCD-P1
523 Communication error between drum and CHCD-P2
531 Communication error between drum and HSSQ
532 Communication error between drum and CHCD-R1
533 Communication error between drum and CHCD-R2
711 Communication error between SPCON and NFIL-R
712 Communication error between SPCON and V1-R
713 Communication error between SPCON and CC-DECODER
714 Communication error between SPCON and SFY-R1 MS
718 Communication error between SPCON and QSDI-R
721 Communication error between SPCON and SFY-R1 SP
731 Communication error between SPCON and AV EDIT
732 Communication error between SPCON and Fs CONT-R
733 Communication error between SPCON and DSP-R1
95 734 Communication error between SPCON and DSP-R2
735 Communication error between SPCON and AUD-R1
736 Communication error between SPCON and AUD-R2
737 Communication error between SPCON and Fs CONT QSDI
738 Communication error between SPCON and AU EDIT PLD
739 Communication error between SPCON and QSDI CORE R1
73A Communication error between SPCON and QSDI CORE R2
741 Communication error between SPCON and NFIL-P
742 Communication error between SPCON and V1-P
743 Communication error between SPCON and JUST-P
744 Communication error between SPCON and SFY-P1 MS
748 Communication error between SPCON and QSDI-P
751 Communication error between SPCON and SFY-P1 SP
761 Communication error between SPCON and AU SFY
762 Communication error between SPCON and JOG
763 Communication error between SPCON and AU-P1
764 Communication error between SPCON and AU-P2
765 Communication error between SPCON and Fs CONT P
766 Communication error between SPCON and DSP-P1
767 Communication error between SPCON and DSP-P2
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-19
4. Possible causes of errors
. Possible causes of errors
Main code 02 06
403 574 554 402 355 058 154 274 594 494 395 496 6A7
503 674 654 454 375 078 174 874 694 596
Sub code 603 803 474 194 696
255
855
Possible causes A55
A75
A95
1. Tape is stuck to the tape running mechanism. O O O O O O O
2. Tape is loosely wound in the cassette. O O O O O O O
3. Cassette tape is not confined properly.
O O O O O O O O O
(Cassette compartment is unlocked.)
4. Reel motor does not generate the correct torque. O O O O O O O O O O O O O
5. Abnormality of reel FG O O O O O O O O O O O O
6. Tension regulator is defective. O
7. Cut-and-spliced tape is used. O O O O O O
8. Top detector and end detector are defective. O O O O O
9. Pinch roller has insufficient pressure against capstan. O O
. Check procedure for the possible causes, and the related circuit boards and devices
Possible causes Check items and check procedure Related circuit boards and devices
1. Tape is stuck to the tape running . Check if tape is stuck to tape guides or drum.
mechanism. . Check if foreign material is adhered to tape.
. Tape is dirty. . Check if tape is damaged.
. Tape run mechanism is dirty. . Check if foreign material is adhered to tape run
. Humidity or condensation mechanism and drum.
2. Tape is loosely wound in the . Check if tape has severe non-uniform winding.
cassette.
. A tape which has been used for
many times, is used.
. A damaged tape is used.
3. Cassette tape is not confined Check that the four pins of the cassette
properly. compartment are inserted into the holes of the slant
(Cassette compartment is table.
unlocked.) Check that the cassette compartment retainer is
securely fastened.
↓
If a cassette compartment is unlocked when a
cassette compartment is inserted, exchange the
cassette compartment.
↓
When a cassette compartment is lock after it is
exchanged, the trouble is caused by the cassette
compartment. Otherwise the trouble is caused by
the defective drive circuit. SV-184 board
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-20
Possible causes Check items and check procedure Related circuit boards and devices
4. Reel motor does not generate the . When the S and T reel brakes are considered to When the S reel brake is considered to
correct torque. be the cause of trouble: be the cause of trouble:
. Reel brake has mechanical Check the S and T reel brakes. SV-184 board, RM-159 board
defect. Check that the S and T reel brakes are released. S reel brake solenoid
. Reel brake solenoid is open. . When the S and T reel motors are considered to
. Reel brake solenoid drive IC is be the cause of trouble: When the T reel brake is considered to
defective. Perform the servo adjustment. be the cause of trouble:
. Reel motor is defective. Confirm that the servo adjustment is completed in SV-184 board, RM-160 board
. Reel motor drive circuit is success. T reel brake solenoid
defective.
. Harness is defective.
When the S reel motor or the S reel FG
5. Abnormality of reel FG Perform the reel FG adjustment. is considered to be the cause of trouble:
. Reel FG photo sensor is Confirm that the reel FG adjustment is completed in SV-184 board, MS-43 board,
defective. success.
RM-159 board, SE-315 board,
. Harness is defective.
S reel motor,
S reel FG sensor GP1A30R
When the T reel motor or the T reel FG

is considered to be the cause of trouble:
SV-184 board, MS-43 board,
RM-160 board, SE-316 board,
T reel motor, T reel FG sensor
GP1A30R
6. Tension regulator is defective. Perform the hook adjustment. TR-93 board, PTC-86 board, MS-43 board,
Confirm that OK appears on display. SV-184 board, tension sensor DM230
7. Cut-and-spliced tape is used.
8. Top detector and end detector are Check the tape top and tape end. When the tape top sensor is considered
defective. The top and end sensor must turn on and off to be the cause of trouble:
correctly. PTC-85 board, PTC-87 board,
MS-43 board, SV-184 board,
tape top sensor
When the tape end sensor is considered
to be the cause of trouble:
PTC-86 board, MS-43 board,
PTC-87 board, SV-184 board,
tape end sensor
9. Pinch roller has insufficient Check the pinch roller. PTC-84 board, MS-43 board, SV-184
pressure against capstan. Pinch roller must be pressed against the capstan board, pinch solenoid
. Pinch roller has mechanical shaft correctly.
defect.
. Pinch solenoid is open.
. Pinch solenoid drive IC is
defective.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-21
3-4. REMOVAL AND ATTACHMENT OF THE CABINET
Be sure to remove the cabinet after turning off the power switch.
Top panel
1. Loosen the four fixing screws. Move the
top panel in the direction of arrow and remove it.
Fixing screw
(The screws have the drop-protector so that they
(with drop-protector)
cannot fall out of the upper cover.)
Fixing screw
(with drop-protector)
Front panel
1. Remove the top panel.
2. Remove the controls of HEADPHONE and
VOLUME.
3. Remove the two fixing screws (PWH 3x6) in
the right and left. Insert a finger tip into the
clearance between the front panel and chassis
as shown in Fig.-1. While lifting up the edges
of the panel in teh direction of arrow A, open
the edges of the panel in the direction of
arrow B, and remove the front panel.
PWH 3x6
Volume For PWH 3x6

DSR-80/80P only
PWH 3x6
A
B 4x6
B
B 4x6
Fig.-1
B 4x6
U case
1. Remove the six fixing screws (B 4x6) in the
direction of arrow and remove the U case.
B 4x6
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-22
3-5. REMOVAL AND ATTACHMENT OF THE CASSETTE COMPARTMENT
Removal Attachment
1) Remove the top panel. (Refer to section 3-4.) 6) Insert the front side of the cassette compartment from
2) Pull the flexible card wire out of the connector (CN50) the angled B direction, and down the rear side of the
on the CC-75 board. cassette compartment.
3) Remove the cassette compartment retainer assembly by 7) Reverse the removal procedure from steps 3) to 1) to
loosing the 2 screws. attach the cassette compartment.
The screw cannot fall out of the cassette compartment . The cassette compartment is positioned by the four
retainer assembly because it has a drop-protector. positioning pins. Tighten the screws after ensuring
4) Loosen the four screws fixing the cassette that these pins are correctly inserted in each hole.
compartment.
The screw cannot fall out of the cassette compartment
because it has a drop-protector.
5) Rotate the gear of the cassette compartment in the
direction of arrow C and back the rack about 5 mm.
Remove the cassette compartment in the direction of
arrow A.
Fixing screw (with drop-protector) Cassette compartment retainer assembly
Fixing screw (with drop-protector)
CC-75 board
Rear
Flexible card wire
CN50
Fixing screws (with drop-protector)
C
Gear
Front
Cassette compartment
Positioning hole
Positioning pin Positioning pin
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-23
DSR-60 / 60P
3-6. REMOVAL OF THE SWITCHING REGULATOR
Note : The switching regulator is in the primary circuit. Take care to avoid electric shocks when removing the
switching regulator for replacement or other reasons.
Wait for at least 10 minutes after turning the power off before starting work to avoid the risk of electric
shock.
1. Remove the two connectors (8 pins and 5 pins)

of the switching regulator. Connector 5P
2. Remove the seven fixing screws (BVTT 3x6) Connector 8P
and raise both sides of the rear panel assembly
CN600
firmly in the direction of the arrow A Switching regulator CN601
simultaneously to remove the switching
CN602
regulator. Rear panel assembly
CN603
3. Remove the two fixing screws (BVTT 3x6), pull BVTT
BVTT 3x6 B
out the switching regulator in the direction of the 3x6
arrow B and remove the connector (4 pins). A

Remove the switching regulator. BVTT
3x6 Connector
4P
CN604
Note : Make sure that the connectors on the
BVTT 3x6 CN605
board of the rear panel are inserted CN606
into 7 connectors (CN600 to CN606) MB-713 board
BVTT 3x6
on the MB-713 board when
ATTACHMENT the rear panel. BVTT 3x6
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-24
DSR-80 / 80P
3-6. REMOVAL OF THE SWITCHING REGULATOR
Note : The switching regulator is in the primary circuit. Take care to avoid electric shocks when removing the
switching regulator for replacement or other reasons.
Wait for at least 10 minutes after turning the power off before starting work to avoid the risk of electric
shock.
1. Remove the two connectors (8 pins and 5 pins)

of the switching regulator. Connector 5P
2. Remove the seven fixing screws (BVTT 3x6) Connector 8P
and raise both sides of the rear panel firmly in
the direction of the arrow A simultaneously to CN601
Switching regulator
remove the switching regulator.
CN602
3. Remove the two fixing screws (BVTT 3x6), pull Rear panel assembly
CN603
out the switching regulator in the direction of the BVTT 3x6 BVTT B
arrow B and remove the connector (4 pins). 3x6
A
Remove the switching regulator.
BVTT
3x6 Connector
Note : Make sure that the connectors on the 4P
CN604
board of the rear panel are inserted CN605
BVTT 3x6
into 6 connectors (CN601 to CN606) CN606
on the MB-712 board when MB-712 board
BVTT 3x6
ATTACHMENT the rear panel.
BVTT 3x6
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-25
3-7. REPLACEMENT OF THE FUSE
Note : A fuse is mounted on the circuit board in the switching regulator.

If this unit has abnormality and excessive current flows, the fuse may blow. Replace the fuse after checking
the cause of the abnormality.
1. Remove the switching regulator.

(Refer to section 3-6.) Switching regulator
2. Remove the fixing screws (PWH 3x6 2 pieces,
PSW 3x8 3 pieces and K 3x6 1 piece) and
remove the cover of the switching regulator in PSW 3x8
the direction of the arrow.
3. Remove the fuse from the fuse holder and Fuse K 3x6
replace it with a new fuse.
SONY parts No. :

1-532-748-11 6.3A, 125 V for NTSC
1-532-325-00 T6.3A, 250 V for PAL PSW 3x8
PWH 3x6
Cover
3-8. EXTENSION BOARD
An optional extension board is supplied to check and adjust the card boards. Attach the extension board to this unit and
attach the board to be checked and adjusted to the top of the extension board.
DSR-60/60P
Extension board Card boards which can be connected
DJ-259 RP-103
DJ-260 SDI-26A, DV-17, IO-149B/C, SY-241B, SV-184
DSR-80/80P
Extension board Card boards which can be connected
DJ-260 SDI-26, DV-15/15A, IO-149/149A, SY-241, SV-184A
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-26
3-9. REMOVAL AND ATTACHMENT OF THE BOARDS
Be sure to remove the board after turning off the power.
3-9-1. Removal of the Card Boards
1. Remove the top panel. (Refer to section 3-4.)

2. Loosen the screws shown in the figure and Board retainer (LA) assembly
Board retainer (LB)
remove the board retainer fixtures. assembly Fixing screw
. The screw has a drop-protector so that it (B 3x6)
cannot fall out of the board retainer fixtures.
3. Push up the board lever in the direction of the
Hook
arrow and raise it upwards.
Note when attaching board :

. Insert the board along the board guide rails Square slot
until it connects firmly with the connector of

the mother board.
. Set the board to claws of board retainer firmly.
Board lever
Card board
Board lever
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-27
DSR-60 / 60P
3-9-2. Removal of the CP-276B Board

2. Remove the following connectors ; one From the SDI-26A board
connector (yellow) coming from the SDI-26A Yellow
board and two connectors (black, red) coming
Black
from the SDI-28 board. (*SDI-26A/28 boards Red
are option.)
From the
3. Remove the seven fixing screws (BVTT 3x6) to SDI-28 board
remove the rear panel assembly in the direction
of the arrow.
4. Remove the nine fixing screws (BVTT 3x6) to
remove the CP-276B board in the direction of the
arrow.
Square slot
Rear panel assembly
BVTT 3x6
Hook
BVTT 3x6
BVTT 3x6
BVTT 3x6
CP-276B board
Rear panel assembly
BVTT 3x6
BVTT 3x6 BVTT 3x6
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-28
DSR-80 / 80P
3-9-2. Removal of the CP-276A Board

2. Remove the following connectors ; two Orange
From the SDI-26 board
connectors (orange, yellow) coming from the Yellow
From the SDI-27 board Green
SDI-26 board, two connectors (green, blue) Blue Black
coming from the SDI-27 board and two
Red
connectors (black, red) coming from the SDI-28
From the
board. ( *SDI-27/28 boards are option.) SDI-28 board
3. Remove the seven fixing screws (BVTT 3x6) to
of the arrow.
4. Remove the fourteen fixing screws (BVTT 3x6)
to remove the CP-276A board in the direction of
the arrow.
Square slot
Rear panel assembly
BVTT 3x6
Hook
BVTT 3x6
BVTT 3x6
BVTT 3x6
CP-276A board
Rear panel assembly
BVTT 3x6
BVTT 3x6
BVTT 3x6 BVTT 3x6
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-29
DSR-60 / 60P
3-9-3. Removal of the CP-281B/C Board

2. Remove the following connectors ; one From the
SDI-26A board Yellow
connector (yellow) coming from the SDI-26A
board and two connectors (black, red) coming
Black
from the SDI-28 board. (*SDI-26A/28 boards are
Red
option.) From the
3. Remove the seven fixing screws (BVTT 3x6) to SDI-28 board
of the arrow.
4. Remove the four fixing screws (BVTT 3x6) to
remove the CP-281B/C board in the direction of
the arrow.
Square slot
Rear panel assembly
BVTT 3x6
Hook
BVTT 3x6
BVTT 3x6
BVTT 3x6
Rear panel assembly

CP-281B/C board
BVTT 3x6
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-30
DSR-80 / 80P
3-9-3. Removal of the CP-281 Board

2. Remove the following connectors ; two From the Orange
SDI-26 board Yellow
connectors (orange, yellow) coming from the
From the
SDI-26 board, two connectors (green, blue) Green
SDI-27 board
Blue Black
coming from the SDI-27 board and two
Red
connectors (black, red) coming from the SDI-28 From the
board. ( *SDI-27/28 boards are option.) SDI-28 board
3. Remove the seven fixing screws (BVTT 3x6) to
of the arrow.
4. Remove the twelve fixing screws (BVTT 3x6) to
remove the CP-281 board in the direction of the
arrow. Square slot
Note : Remove the eight switch adapters Rear panel assembly
attached to the old board and attach BVTT 3x6

them again to the new board. Hook
BVTT 3x6
BVTT 3x6
BVTT 3x6
Rear panel assembly CP-281 board
Switch adapter
Switch adapter
BVTT 3x6
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-31
DSR-60 / 60P
3-9-4. Removal of the KY-336B Board
1. Remove the front panel assembly.

(Refer to section 3-4.)
2. Remove one connector (CN713) on the
Flexible card wires
KY-336B board and the flexible card wires KY-336B board
CN712 and CN714.
3. Remove the six fixing screws (PWH 3x6) and
PWH 3x6
remove the KY-336B board in the direction of
arrow.
CN713
PWH 3x6
CN712
CN714
PWH 3x6
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-32
DSR-80 / 80P
3-9-4. Removal of the KY-336 Board

2. Remove one connector (CN713) on the KY-336 Flexible card wires
board and the flexible card wires CN712 and KY-336 board
CN714.
3. Remove the six fixing screws (PWH 3x6) and PWH 3x6
remove the KY-336 board in the direction of
arrow.
CN713
PWH 3x6
CN712
CN714
PWH 3x6
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-33
3-9-5. Removal of the HP-73 Board

(Refer to section 3-4)
2. Remove one fixing screw (BVTT 3x6) and
remove the HP plate assembly in the direction of
the arrow.
Protrusion
3. Remove the two connectors (CN731 and CN733)
on the HP-73 board. HP plate assembly HP-73 board
CN731
4. Remove the fixing nut and washer of the mini Volume
Connector
jack. Washer CN733 12P
5. Remove the fixing nut and washer of the volume Fixing nut
control.
6. Remove the fixing nut of the head phone jack.
BVTT 3x6
Headphone jack
Fixing nut
Mini jack
Washer
Connector 3P
Fixing nut
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-34
3-9-6. Removal and Attachment of the FP-75 Board
Removal
2. Open the MP case sub assembly. Menu panel key assembly
3. Unlock the left and right hooks of the menu
Hook
panel key assembly and remove it from the case.
4. Pull out the flexible card wire (CN704)
Hook Hook
connected with the FP-75 board.
5. Remove the two fixing screws (BVTP 2x4) to SWITCH plate
remove the FP-75 board.
CN704
Note : Remove the two SWITCH plates
attached on the old board and FP-75 board
attached them to the new board.
BVTP 2x4
Hole
Attachment
6. Reverse the removal procedure of steps 5 and 4 .
Flexible card wire
7. While attaching the four hooks on the front of
the menu panel key assembly to the recessed
portion of the MP case sub assembly, and attach
Dents
the menu panel key assembly.
Hole
MP case sub assembly
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-35
3-10. EJECT PROCEDURE OF A CASSETTE TAPE WHEN THERE IS TAPE SLACK
(MANUAL EJECT)
Be careful not to damage the tape when taking the cassette tape out.
. If an error is detected:
1. Press the [EJECT] key to enter Emergency EJECT mode (Refer to section 3-3.) and take the cassette tape out.
. If the cassette tape cannot be taken out with the procedure described above:
1. Enter the SERVICE SUPPORT mode and select
MANUAL EJECT referring to section 4,
“Maintenance menu.”
2. Follow the instructions on the monitor to take out
the cassette tape.
1 When the following message appears, turn

the rotation detection pulley of the gear box
assembly by hand in the direction of the
arrow.
Rotation detection
pully
Gear box assembly
2 When the following message appears, turn

the motor pulley in the direction of the arrow
Motor pulley
and raise the cassette compartment to take the
tape out.
Stage block
(Cassette-up condition)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-36
. The procedure to take out the cassette Cassette compartment stay
tape after removing the cassette
CC-75 board
compartment
1. Turn the power switch off. Motor pulley
3. Remove the cassette compartment stay.
CN50
4. Remove the one connector (CN50) from the Cassette compartment
CC-75 board in the cassette compartment. B
5. Turn the motor pulley in the direction of the A
Stage block
arrow A until the rack enters inside the rack
(Cassette-up condition)
cover.
6. While taking care not to close the cassette lid,
raise the rear of the cassette compartment and
remove the cassette compartment in the direction
of the arrow B. Rack
Rack cover
7. While releasing the reel rotation stopper of the

cassette, turn the reel hub with (_) driver to (_) driver
rewind the tape and shut the cassette cover.
Reel hub
Note : Be careful that the cassette must not
slide in the direction of the arrow C
when releasing the reel rotation Reel rotation stopper
stopper. Cassette cover
8. Take the cassette tape out of the cassette

compartment.
9. Turn the motor pulley mentioned in the above C
step 5 so that the cassette is completely out of the
cassette compartment.
10. Attach the cassette compartment to the unit.
Cassette tape
11. Connect the connector (CN50) and attach the (Cassette-up condition)
cassette compartment stay. Tape
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-37
3-11. HEAD CLEANING WHEN HEAD 3-12. OPERATING THE VTR WITHOUT A
CLOGGING OCCURS CASSETTE TAPE
Clean the video head as follows when the head gets dirty. When adjusting the mechanical block, the VTR is
sometimes operated without a cassette tape. This section
. Procedure to use the cleaning cassette describes how to do this.
1. Insert the cleaning cassette DVM12CL in this unit and 1. Remove the cassette compartment from this unit or
press the [PLAY] key immediately (within 1 second). remove the connector of the cassette compartment.
Make sure that the [EJECT] key flashes, the 2. Turn on switches S101-3 and 4 of the SV-184 board,
[PLAY] key lights and the display appears. then turn on the main power.
Note : . Use only the DVM12CL cleaning cassette Note : If switch S101-3 of the SV-184 board is not
tape. on, an error will occur.
If another cleaning cassette tape is used,
abnormal abrasion or breakage of the The operating method of each mode is as follows.
video head could occur. . THREADING
. Press the [PLAY] key immediately after After the reel motor and the upper drum rotate, the
inserting the cleaning cassette tape. threading ring rotates to enter the threading mode.
The tension arm and the threading ring move to the
2. The cleaning cassette tape is automatically ejected after specified position, then the threading is completed.
running for 10 seconds. This condition in which the threading is completed is
Note : Do not rewind the cleaning cassette tape to referred to as the STOP status.
use it again.
. PLAY
3. Make sure that the head is no longer dirty. Press the [PLAY] key.
If the video head is still dirty after step 2 above, clean The pinch roller is pressed against the capstan shaft
the video head as follows. to enter the PLAY status.
When the [PLAY] key is pressed during threading,
. Procedure to use the cleaning cloth the pinch roller is pressed against the capstan shaft to
enter the PLAY status after the threading has
1. Soak the cleaning cloth with cleaning liquid and bring completed.
it into contact lightly with the video head.
2. Turn the upper drum slowly by hand in the rotating . FF
direction of the head (counterclockwise when viewed Press the [F|FWD]
. key.
from the top) to clean the video head. The pinch roller is pressed against the capstan shaft
Note : . Never move the cleaning cloth in the to set the FWD.SEARCH to five-times speed.
vertical direction against the video head
because it may break the head. . REW
. Turn the power switch off when cleaning Press the [REW] key.
the video head. The pinch roller is pressed against the capstan shaft
to set REV.SEARCH to five-times speed.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-38
. REC
. When the reel table is on the S position:
While pressing the record proof switch on the right
side of the T side reel table, press both the
[PLAY] key and the [REC] key.
The pinch roller is pressed against the capstan shaft
to enter REC status.
When the record proof switch is released, the REC
status is released and the recorder returns to PLAY
status.
. When the reel table is on the standard position:
While pressing the record proof switch on the right
side of the T side reel table, press both the
[PLAY] key and the [REC] key.
The pinch roller is pressed against the capstan shaft
to enter REC status.
When the record proof switch is released, the REC
status is released and the recorder returns to PLAY
status.
. UNTHREADING
Press the [EJECT] key.
The threading ring rotates to enter the unthreading
mode.
The threading ring moves to the specified position to
complete the unthreading.
Note : Make sure to turn off switches S101-3 and 4 on

the SV board after the adjustment.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-39
3-13. NOTES ON REPAIR PARTS . Resistor and Capacitor Replacement
(1) Place the soldering-iron tip onto the chip part and heat
3-13-1. Notes on Repair Parts it up until the solder melts.
When the solder melts, slide the chip part aside.
(1) Safety Related Components Warning (2) Make sure that there is no pattern peeling, damage and/
Components marked ! are critical to safe operation. or bridging around the desoldering position.
Therefore, specified parts should be used in the case of
(3) After removing the chip part, presolder the area in
replacement.
which the new chip is to be placed with a thin layer of
(2) Standardization of Parts solder.
Repair parts supplied from Sony Parts Center may not (4) Place new chip part in position and solder both ends.
be always identical with the parts which actually in use Note : Once a chip part has been removed never use
due to “accommodating the improved parts and/or
it again.
engineering changes” or “standardization of genuine
parts”.
This manual's exploded views and electrical spare parts . Transistors and Diodes Replacement
list are indicating the part numbers of “the standardized (1) Cut the terminals of the chip part with nippers.
genuine parts at present” . (2) Remove the cut leads as above.
(3) Make sure that there is no pattern peeling, damage and/
(3) Stock of Parts
or bridging around the desoldering positions.
Parts marked with “o” SP (Supply Code) column of the
spare parts list are not normally required for routine (4) After removing the chip part, presolder the area in
service work. Orders for parts marked with “o” will be which the new chip part is to be placed, with a thin
processed, but allow for additional delivery time. layer of solder.
(5) Place new chip part in position and solder the
(4) Units for Capacitors, Inductors and Resistors
terminals.
The following units are assumed in schematic diagrams,
electrical parts list and exploded views unless otherwise
specified.
Capacitors : uF
Inductors : uH
Resistors : Z
Nipper
3-13-2. Replacement Procedure for Chip Parts

Transistor
Tools required
Soldering iron : 20 W
If possible, use a soldering-iron tip
heat-controller set to 270 ± 10 dC.
Braided wire (Desodering metal braid) :
SOLDER TAUL or equivalent
Sony part No. 7-641-300-81 . IC Replacement
Solder : 0.6 mm dia. is recommended. (1) Use the braided wire, remove the solder around the pins
Sharp-pointed tweezers of the IC-chip.
(2) While heating up the pins, remove them one by one
Soldering conditions using sharp-pointed tweezers.
Soldering iron temperature : 270 ± 10 dC (3) Make sure that there is no pattern peeling, damage and/
Soldering time : two seconds per pin or bridge around the desoldering position.
(4) After removing the chip part, presolder the area in
Capacitor Resistor Transistor, which the new chip part is placed with a thin layer of
Diode solder.
Terminal
(5) Place new chip part in the desired position and solder
the pins.
Terminals Terminals Terminals
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-40
3-13-3. Replacement of the Flexible Card Wire
The following flexible card wires are used in this unit. < ZIF type connector >
Take utmost care when handling the flexible card wires
because their life is extremely shortened by folding. Removal of the ZIF type connector
DSR-60/60P Raise the marked portions of the connector and unlock the
lock to pull out the flexible card wires.
Destination Number Number of
of pins flexible
card wires Connection of the ZIF type connector
CC-75 board _ MB-713 board 13 pins a piece Insert the flexible card wires fully up to the marked line
and push up the marked portions of the connectors.
CC-75 board _ CC-76 board 5 pins a piece
*
Make sure to insert and remove the wires that have no
KY-336B board _ FP-75 board 11 pins a piece
locking mechanism according to the above described
KY-336B board _ MB-713 board 36 pins a piece
procedure.
MS-43 board _ MB-713 board 36 pins two pieces
MS-43 board _ RM-159 board 9 pins a piece Flexible card wire
MS-43 board _ RM-160 board 9 pins a piece *

Flexible card wire
MS-43 board _ capstan motor 15 pins a piece
*
MS-43 board _ drum 15 pins a piece
MS-43 board _ 6 pins a piece
cassette memory terminal assembly *
PRE-39 board _ MB-713 board 14 pins a piece

PRE-39 board _ drum 8 pins a piece *
Connector
DSR-80/80P
Locked status
Destination Number Number of
of pins flexible Connector
card wires Unlocked status
CC-75 board _ MB-712 board 13 pins a piece
CC-75 board _ CC-76 baord 5 pins a piece Note : The flexible card wire has the conduction part
KY-336 board _ FP-75 board 11 pins a piece and the insulation part. Connect the flexible
KY-336 board _ MB-712 board 36 pins a piece card wire after checking them as shown in the
MS-43 board _ MB-712 board 36 pins two pieces figure.
MS-43 board _ RM-159 board 9 pins a piece If the conduction part and insulation part are
connected in the wrong direction, the circuit
MS-43 board _ RM-160 board 9 pins a piece
will not operate.
MS-43 board _ capstan motor 15 pins a piece
MS-43 board _ drum 15 pins a piece
MS-43 board _ 6 pins a piece V groove
cassette memory terminal assembly
PRE-34 board _ MB-712 board 22 pins two pieces
Insulation part
PRE-34 board _ drum 18 pins a piece
Conduction part
Blue
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-41
3-14. TOOLS FOR ADJUSTMENT
Drawing No. Parts No. Name Uses
1 J-6080-029-A Small Dental Mirror Tape pass adjustment

2 J-6082-373-A DV torque cassette FWD/REV back tension adjustment
3 J-6325-400-A Torque Driver (3 kg/cm) Fixing screws
4 J-6440-850-A Tape Guide Adjustment Driver Tape guide height adjustment
5 J-6441-560-A Extension Board, DJ-156 (DSR-85) Adjusting the SV/EQ/RP boards
6 J-6441-570-A Extension Board, DJ-157 (DSR-85) Adjusting the AU/DA/DD/DDA/SDI/DV/DEN/SY boards
7 J-6442-570-A Reel Table Height Gauge Reel table adjustment
8 J-6442-470-A Reel Table Reference Plate Reel table adjustment
9 J-6442-170-A Break Torque Gauge (CW) Brake torque adjustment
!/ J-6442-460-A Break Torque Gauge (CCW) Brake torque adjustment
!- J-6442-610-A Extension Board, DJ-259 (DSR-60) Adjusting the RP board
!= J-6442-620-A Extension Board, DJ-260 (DSR-60/80) Adjusting the DA/DV/IO/SY/SV boards
![ 3-184-527-01 Cleaning Cloth Cleaning (15x15 cm)
!] 7-651-000-10 Grease, SGL-601 (NET 50 g) For lubrication of general mechanism parts
!\ 7-661-018-18 DIAMOND OIL NT-68 For lubrication of general mechanism parts
!; 7-700-736-06 L Shaped Hexagon Wrench (S=0.89 mm) Reel table adjustment
!' 7-700-751-01 Nutdriver (S=4.5 mm) Tape path adjustment
!, 8-967-999-02 Alignment Tape, XH2-1AST Tape path adjustment
!. 8-967-999-21 Alignment Tape, XH5-1A Electrical adjustment (NTSC)
@/ 8-967-999-25 Alignment Tape, XH5-1AP Electrical adjustment (PAL)
@- 9-911-053-00 Thickness Gauge Thickness adjustment
@= 9-919-573-01 Cleaning LIQUID Cleaning
@[ J-6443-360-A D Cover For protect drum
S = double width (width across flat)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-42
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 !/ !- != ![
!] !\ !; !'
re ase
yG 01
Son
L-6
SGNET 50g Y
N00-10
S-6O
51-0 S
7
!, !. @/ @- @= @[
S = double width (width across flat)

DSR-80/80P/60/60P 3-43
3-15. SAFETY CHECK-OUT
(UC MODEL ONLY)
After correcting the original service problem, perform the

following safety checks before releasing the set to the
customer :
Check the metal trim, “metallized” knobs, screws, and all

other exposed metal parts for AC leakage. Check leakage
as described below.
LEAKAGE TEST
The AC leakage from any exposed metal part to earth

ground and from all exposed metal parts to any exposed
metal part having a return to chassis, must not exceed
0.5 mA (500 microampers). Leakage current can be
measured by any one of three methods.
1. A commercial leakage tester, such as the Simpson 229

or RCA WT-540A. Follow the manufacturers’
instructions to use these instruments.
2. A battery-operated AC milliammeter. The Data
Precision 245 digital multimeter is suitable for this job.
3. Measuring the voltage drop across a resistor by means
of a VOM or battery-operated AC voltmeter. The
“limit” indication is 0.75 V, so analog meters must
have an accurate low-voltage scale. The Simpson 250
and Sanwa SH-63Trd are examples of a passive VOM
that is suitable. Nearly all battery operated digital
multimeters that have a 2 V AC range are suitable.
(See Fig. A)
To Exposed Metal
Parts on Set
AC
0.15 uF 1.5 kZ voltmeter
(0.75 V)
Earth Ground
Fig A. Using an AC voltmeter to check AC leakage.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
3-44
SECTION 4
MAINTENANCE MENU
This unit has a maintenance menu which is used during maintenance.

The maintenance menu has a hierarchical structure through which you move to perform the various checks, setting and
adjustment using the specified menu items. The contents of the respective maintenance menu items are displayed on the
video monitor and time counter of this unit.
*
mark are DSR-80/80P only. / Values in parenthesis ( ) are time counter display.
MENU, First layer MENU, Second layer MENU, Third layer
MENU DATA CONTROL MENU STATUS DISPLAY (>MENU STA) _

(MENU CNT) SAVE MENU DATA (>Save MENU)
LOAD MENU DATA (>Load MENU)
*
EDIT CHECK VIDEO INSERT (>VIDEO INS) _
(EDIT Check) A1 INSERT (>A1 INS)
A2 INSERT (>A2 INS)
TC INSERT (>TC INS)
ASSEMBLE (>ASSEMBLE)
SERVO CHECK SENSOR CHECK (>Sensor) CASS-COMPARTMENT (>>Cass-COM)
(SV check) TAPE TOP/END (>>Top/End)
HUMID [MOISTURE] (>>HUMID)
*
REC INHIBIT (>>REC INHI.)
MOTOR CHECK (>Motor) S-REEL (>>S-Reel)
T-REEL (>>T-Reel)
THREADING (>>Threading)
CASS-COMPARTMENT (>>Cass-COM)
CAPSTAN (>>Capstan)
DRUM (>>Drum)
REEL POSITION (>>Reel POS.)
PLUNGER CHECK (>Plunger) PINCH (>>Pinch)
S-REEL BRAKE (>>S-Brake)
T-REEL BRAKE (>>T-Brake)
HEAD CLEANER(>>H-Cleaner)
SERVO ADJUST S/T REEL & CAPSTAN FG (>Reel&Cap.) _
(SV Adjust) S-REEL ONLY (>S-Reel)
T-REEL ONLY (>T-Reel)
CAPSTAN ONLY (>Capstan FG)
CAPSTAN FREE SPEED (>Free Speed) AUTO (>>Auto)
DVCAM X1 MANUAL (>>15 um x1)
DV X1 MANUAL (>>10 um x1)
TENSION (>Tension) _
RF SWITCHING POSITION (>Switching) X1 MANUAL (>>x1 manual)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-1
MENU, First layer MENU, Second layer MENU, Third layer
SERVO ADJUST SAVE/LOAD CONTROL (>Save/Load) SAVE ADJUSTING DATA (>>Save)

(SV Adjust) LOAD ADJUSTING DATA (>>Load)
INITIALIZE (>>Initial)
ELECTRICAL ADJUST PLL F0 (>PLL f0) _
*
(EL Adjust) DVCAM EQ ADJ (>15 um EQ)
*
DV EQ ADJ (>10 um EQ)
*
REC CURRENT (>REC cur)
SERVICE SUPPORT ERROR LOG (>Error LOG) _
(Support) MANUAL EJECT (>Manu. Eject)
DIAGNOSTICS CONTROL (>DIAG CHT) CLEAR ERROR LOG (>>Clear LOG)
OTHERS (Others) SOFTWARE VERSION (>Version) _
KEYBOARD CHECK (>KY Check)
MEMORY DISPLAY (>MEM. Check) SY MEMORY DISPLAY (>>SY MEM.)
SV MEMORY DISPLAY (>>SV MEM.)
SP MEMORY DISPLAY (>>SP MEM.)
KY MEMORY DISPLAY (>>KY MEM.)
CM DISPLAY (>>CM DISP.)
DATA DISPLAY (>Data Check) SP DATA DISPLAY (>>SP DATA)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-2
4-1. HOW TO OPERATE MAINTENANCE MENU
Use the following switches to execute the maintenance menu.
MONITOR SELECT A B
TC PRESET SET(YES)
CH- CH- CH- CH-
1/2 3/4 1/3 2/4
MIX MARK
Use the [MENU], [(], [)], [&], [*], [SET] ([YES]) and [RESET] ([NO]) switches on the sub control panel.
The maintenance menu has a hierarchical structure through which you move to perform the various checks, setting and
adjustment using the specified menu items.
[(], [)] key : .... Use these keys to move within the same layer.
[&], [*] key : .... Use these keys to move to higher or lower layers. (Ignored in the third layer)
*
Indication : ...... Video monitor : The displayed digit is shifted down. 
 Indicates depth of layer.
Time counter : “>” is added to the top. 
How to enter the maintenance menu

This unit enters the maintenance menu. The maintenance menu appears on the display.
2. Select an item to modify using the [(], [)] keys.
Move the cursor shown with a white background to any of the items displayed on the monitor.
3. When an item is selected, press the [*] key.
Thus, items with a white background can be selected.
How to exit the maintenance menu

Press the [MENU] key.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-3
4-2. MENU DATA CONTROL
The MENU DATA CONTROL item provides a SETUP MENU

data display which is used to save and load the SET UP MENU
data.
This item is used to return the settings to their original values after
maintenance is complete or ROM upgrading is complete.
Operating procedure
1. Enter the maintenance menu.
2. Move the cursor to “MENU DATA CONTROL” which is
displayed with a white background, using the [(], [)] keys.
3. Press the [*] key.

“MENU DATA CONTROL” is selected and its lower layer
submenu appears.
4. Move the cursor displayed with a white background to a

desired item using the [(], [)] keys.
5. When an item is selected, press the [*] key. The contents of
the selected item appear.
6. Press the [&] key to exit MENU DATA CONTROL and return
to the main menu.
7. Press the [MENU] key to exit the maintenance menu.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-4
[MENU|STATUS|DISPLAY]
Displays the current status of the SET UP MENU data.
MENU VERSION : Version number of the SET UP MENU

NUMBER OF ITEM : Numbers of the SET UP MENU items
CHANGED ITEM : Numbers of the items which were
changed from the factory default
settings
DATA CHECK SUM : Data check sum
[SAVE|MENU|DATA]
This is used to temporarily save the user’s setup data of the SET
UP MENU and set it at a later time.
1. The version number of the current SET UP MENU is

displayed, and input is prompted by the [SET] ([YES]) key.
*
Pressing the [MENU] or [&] key returns to the main menu.
2. Press the [SET] ([YES]) key.

The SET UP MENU data is stored in EEPROM.
Confirm that COMPLETE appears and data save is complete.
Notes : . Data which has once been saved will not be deleted
by turning the main power on and off, or by
upgrading the ROM version. However, the saved
data is deleted when the MS board or the EEPROM
is replaced because the data is saved in the
EEPROM in the MS board.
. An alarm message appears when the SET UP
MENU is upgraded by a version upgrade, or when
the ROM is replaced. Either initialize the SET UP
MENU or execute “LOAD MENU DATA” when an
alarm appears.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-5
[LOAD|MENU|DATA]
The saved data is stored as ordinary SET UP MENU data when it

is loaded.
1. The version number of the current SET UP MENU and that of

the SET UP MENU to load are displayed, and input is
prompted by the [SET] ([YES]) key.
*
Pressing the [MENU] or [&] key returns to the main menu.
2. Press the [SET] ([YES]) key.

The SET UP MENU data is stored in EEPROM.
Confirm that COMPLETE appears and data save is complete.
In case of trouble :
Loading of the data will not start if SET UP MENU data has not
been saved or the saved SET UP MENU data contains an error.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-6
DSR-80 / 80P
4-3. EDIT CHECK
Enables the editing function to be checked without using a remote

controller.
Operating procedure
2. Move the cursor to “EDIT CHECK” which is displayed with a
white background using the [(], [)] keys.

“EDIT CHECK” is selected and its lower layer submenu
appears.

5. When an item is selected, press the [*] key. The contents of
the selected item appear.
6. Press the [&] key to exit EDIT CHECK and return to the main
menu.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-7
DSR-80 / 80P
Enables the MANUAL EDIT by selecting each mode.
[VIDEO|INSERT]
Pressing the [REC] and [PLAY] keys simultaneously enters the

VIDEO INSERT mode.
[A1|INSERT]

AUDIO CH-1 INSERT mode.
[A2|INSERT]

AUDIO CH-2 INSERT mode.
[TC|INSERT]

TIME CODE INSERT mode.
[ASSEMBLE]

ASSEMBLE mode.
Note: When the AUDIO REC MODE is set to 4 channel, A1

and A2 are assigned to channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 in
accordance with the A1 EDIT CH and A2 EDIT CH
of the setup menu.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-8
4-4. SERVO CHECK
Checks the servo system automatically or semi-automatically.
Operating procedure

2. Move the cursor to “SERVO CHECK” which is displayed with
a white background using the [(], [)] keys.

“SERVO CHECK” is selected and its lower layer submenu
appears.

The lower layer submenu appears.

7. Press the [&] key to execute the selected item.
(Refer to the respective menu description for the check
procedure after execution.)
8. After completing the check, press the [MENU] key to return to
the main menu.
9. To check other menus and submenus, repeat steps 4 to 8.
Note : If the [MENU] key is pressed while the check is in

progress, the check operation is forcibly ended and
the system returns to the main menu.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-9
[SENSOR|CHECK]
The respective items of the SENSOR CHECK are described

below:
(1) CASS-COMPARTMENT
Checks the respective switches of the cassette compartment.
1 CASSETTE IN sensor 3 CASSETTE IN sensor

(Standard/Mini cassette) (Standard cassette)
2 CASSETTE IN sensor
(Mini cassette)
1. Press the 1 CASSETTE IN switch with your finger or the like.

Confirm that “1” appears in the area shown by the asterisk on
the monitor.

the monitor.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-10
the monitor display.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-11
(2) TAPE TOP/END
Check the tape top and tape end sensors.

Pressing the [SET] ([YES]) key moves down the cassette
compartment and the display shown in the right appears.
Tape top/end detect LED
1. Interrupt the tape top sensor by inserting finger or the like in

between the light emitter and receptor of the tape top sensor.
Confirm that the TOP SENSOR display changes from OFF to
ON on the monitor display.
2. Interrupt the tape top sensor by inserting finger or the like in

between the light emitter and receptor of the tape top sensor.
Confirm that the TOP SENSOR display changes from OFF to
ON on the monitor display.
If the display does not change from OFF to ON, check whether the
tape top sensor or the tape end sensor itself is defective.
Check also the tape top/tape end sensor circuit (PTC-85/86/87
board).
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-12
(3) HUMID (MOISTURE)
Checks the HUMID (condensation) sensor.
Condensation sensor
1. Bring a cotton swab moistened with water in contact

with the HUMID sensor.
Confirm that DRY changes to WET! on the monitor
display.
2. Blow wind onto the HUMID sensor to evaporate any

water.
Confirm that the display changes to DRY on the
monitor.
If the display does not change from DRY to WET!, check
whether the HUMID sensor itself is defective.
Check also the HUMID sensor amplifier (SV-184 board).
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-13
DSR-80 / 80P
(4) REC INHIBIT
Checks the REC INHIBIT switch (Miss-REC sensor).
Record proof sensor

(common to standard and mini size cassette)
1. Press the METAL REC INHIBIT switch.

Confirm that OFF is displayed on the monitor display.
If OFF is not displayed on the specified position, check the sensor
on the MIC arm board.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-14
[MOTOR|CHECK]
The respective items of “MOTOR CHECK” are described below :
(1) S-REEL
Checks the S-reel motor.
Select the S REEL MOTOR from the submenu and press the
[SET] ([YES])key. Press the [(] then [)] keys (note: keep
pressing for one to two seconds) and turn the S reel motor in the
FWD then REV directions. Confirm that the S reel motor rotates
in the specified direction while pressing the [(] or [)] key after
releasing the reel brake by activating the brake solenoid.
If the brake solenoid cannot be heard to operate or the S reel motor
does not rotate in the specified direction even though the key is
pressed, check the S reel motor assembly and the reel motor driver
circuit (RM-159 board, SV-184 board).
(2) T-REEL
Checks the T-reel motor.
Select the T REEL MOTOR from the submenu and press the
[SET] ([YES]) key. Press the [(] then [)] keys (note: keep
pressing for one to two seconds) and turn the T reel motor in the
FWD then REV directions. Confirm that the T reel motor rotates
in the specified direction while pressing the [(] or [)] key after
releasing the reel brake by activating the brake solenoid.
If the operating sound of the brake solenoid cannot be heard or the
T reel motor does not rotate in the specified direction even though
the key is pressed, check the T reel motor assembly and the reel
motor driver circuit (RM-160 board, SV-184 board).
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-15
(3) THREADING
Checks the threading motor, the thread-end sensor and the

unthread-end sensor.
1. Select the THREADING MOTOR from the submenu and press

the [SET] ([YES]) key. Keep pressing the [(] key to rotate
the threading motor in the FWD direction.
Confirm that the threading ring completes threading and
THREAD END appears on the monitor display.
2. Keep pressing the [)] key to rotate the threading motor in the
REV direction.
Confirm that the threading ring completes unthreading and
UNTHREAD END appears on the monitor display.
If the threading motor does not rotate, or if dots [.......] keep
appearing on the video monitor, or if “UNTHREAD END” does
not appear even though unthreading is complete, check whether
the threading motor (on the PTC-88 board), the driver circuit (SV-
184 board) and the sensors on the PTC-84 board are defective.
Check also the threading FG amplifier circuit (SV-184 board) and
the sensor (on the PTC-88 board).
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-16
(4) CASS-COMPARTMENT
Check the cassette compartment motor.
Select CASS-COMPARTMENT and press the [SET] ([YES])

key.
Press the [*] key.

Confirm that the cassette compartment moves down.
Confirm that pressing the [*] key again moves up the cassette
compartment.
(The monitor display changes in order of reversing the steps of
moving down the cassette compartment.)
If the monitor display does not change, check the cassette
compartment motor and the sensor input circuit (SV-184 board).
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-17
(5) CAPSTAN
Checks the capstan motor.

Select CAPSTAN MOTOR and press the [SET] ([YES]) key.

Confirm that [FORWARD ... OK] appears on the monitor
display.
2. Press the [*] key again.

Confirm that [REVERSE ... OK] appears on the monitor
display.
If the monitor display does not change, check the capstan motor
and the capstan motor driver circuit (MS-43/SV-184 board)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-18
(6) DRUM
Checks the drum motor.
When the [SET] ([YES]) key is pressed, confirm the following:

SPEED : The monitor display changes to [OK].
PHASE : The monitor display changes to [LOCK].
PG : The monitor display changes to [EXIST].
If the monitor display does not change, check the drum motor, the
drum motor driver circuit, the drum FG amp. circuit and the drum
PG amp. circuit. (MS-43 board)
Note : This check is available for the unit which has the DR
micro controller, IC 201 on the SV-184 board of the
version 1.02 and higher.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-19
(7) REEL POSITION
Check the reel position motor and the reel L/S position sensor.
Press the [SET] ([YES]) key, then press the [*] key.
Confirm that the reel table moves from the S-position to the L-
position and the monitor display changes.
If the reel table does not move or the monitor display does not
change, check the reel position motor, the reel L/S position sensor
(MS-43 board) and reel position motor driver circuit (SV-184
board).
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-20
[PLUNGER|CHECK]
The respective items of “PLUNGER CHECK” are described

below.
(1) PINCH
Checks the pinch roller solenoid.
Pressing the [SET] ([YES]) key starts threading and activates

the pinch solenoid.
Pressing the [MENU] key releases the pinch solenoid and starts
unthreading. The monitor display returns to the main menu.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-21
(2) S-REEL BRAKE
Checks the S-reel brake solenoid.
1. Pressing the [SET] ([YES]) key activates the S-reel brake

solenoid.
2. Pressing the [MENU] key releases the S-reel brake solenoid.

The monitor display returns to the main menu.
If the S-brake solenoid cannot be heard to operate, check the S reel
brake solenoid and its driver circuit (SV-184 board, RM-159
board).
(3) T-REEL BRAKE
Checks the T-reel brake solenoid.
1. Pressing the [SET] ([YES]) key activates the T-reel brake

solenoid.
2. Pressing the [MENU] key releases the T-reel brake solenoid.

The monitor display returns to the main menu.
If the T-brake solenoid cannot be heard to operate or the monitor
display does not change, check the T reel brake solenoid and its
driver circuit (SV-184 board, RM-160 board).
(4) HEAD CLEANER
Checks the head cleaner solenoid.
1. Pressing the [SET] ([YES]) key activates the head cleaner.

2. Pressing the [MENU] key releases the head cleaner. The
monitor display returns to the main menu.
If the head cleaner solenoid cannot be heard to operate, check the
head cleaner solenoid and its driver circuit (SV-184 board).
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-22
4-5. SERVO ADJUST
Checks the servo system automatically or semi-automatically.
Operating procedure
2. Move the cursor to “SERVO ADJUST “ which is displayed
with a white background using the [(], [)] keys.

“SERVO ADJUST “ is selected and its lower layer submenu
appears.

DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-23
7. Press the [*] key to execute the selected item.
(Refer to the respective menu description for the adjustment
8. After completing the adjustment, press the [&] key to return to
the main menu.
10. After completing all checks, execute “SAVE/LOAD
CONTROL” to save all adjustment data into EEPROM.
Note : Execute “SAVE/LOAD CONTROL” after completing

an adjustment to save the adjustment data into
EEPROM. You can also save all adjustment data at
once after completing the multiple adjustments.
Execute “SAVE/LOAD CONTROL” after completing
all adjustments.
Do not turn off the main power while the saving is in
progress.
If the main power is turned off while the saving is in
progress, all of the adjustment data will be lost.
Note : If the [MENU] key is pressed while the check is in

progress, the check operation is forcibly ended and
the system returns to the main menu.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-24
S/T REEL & CAPSTAN FG
Executes the automatic adjustment of the S and T reels and,

capstan systems.
After completing adjustment, confirm that “COMPLETE” appears.
Adjustment items
s reel fg check
s reel offset/friction
s reel torque
t reel fg check
t reel offset /friction
t reel torque
capstan fg duty
After COMPLETE appears, execute SAVE ADJUSTING DATA

from the menu display SAVE/LOAD CONTROL to save the
adjustment data to EEPROM.
In the case of trouble :

When “ADJUST INCOMPLETE” and a trouble indication appear
on monitor display, check the reel FG amplifier circuit, reel motor
driver circuit, capstan motor and capstan FG circuit/motor driver
circuit. (MS-43, SV-184 board)
.
.
.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-25
[S-REEL|ONLY]
Executes the automatic adjustment of the S reel only.

Adjustment items
s reel fg check
s reel offset/friction
s reel torque


on monitor display, check the reel FG amplifier circuit and reel
motor driver circuit. (SV-184 board)
.
.
.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-26
[T-REEL|ONLY]
Executes the automatic adjustment of the T reel only.

Adjustment items
t reel fg check
t reel offset/friction
t reel torque


on monitor display, check the reel FG amplifier circuit and reel
motor driver circuit. (SV-184 board)
.
.
.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-27
[CAPSTAN|FG|ONLY]
Executes the automatic adjustment of the capstan FG only.

Adjustment items
capstan fg duty


on monitor display, check the capstan FG amplifier circuit (MS-43
board) and capstan motor driver circuit (SV-184 board).
.
.
.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-28
[CAPSTAN|FREE|SPEED]
1. Move the cursor displayed with a white board to a desired item

using the [(], [)] keys.
2. Press the [*] key and then, press the [SET] ([YES]) key.
3. Play back the tape.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-29
4. Make adjustment until the “DATA” value becomes minimum
using the [(] , [)] keys.
[TENSION]
Refer to section 6-23-1 for “TENSION” adjustment.
[RF|SWITCHING|POSITION]
Refer to section 7-6 for “RF SWITCHING POSITION”

adjustment.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-30
[SAVE/LOAD|CONTROL]
The respective items of “SAVE/LOAD CONTROL” are described

below.
(1) SAVE ADJUSTING DATA
Saves the adjustment data to EEPROM.

Confirm that “COMPLETE” appears after completing saving data.
Note : Be sure to save data using this mode after completing

adjustment.
(2) LOAD ADJUSTING DATA
Loads the adjustment data from EEPROM.

Confirm that “COMPLETE” appears after completing loading
data.
(3) INITIALIZE
Use INITIALIZE only when the MS-43 board or the IC1 on either
MS-43 board is replaced.
Loads the initial data of the adjustment data from ROM.
Confirm that “COMPLETE” appears after completing
initialization.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-31
4-6. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT
Executes the electrical adjustment of this unit.
Operating procedure
2. Move the cursor to “ELECTRICAL ADJUST” which is
displayed with a white background using the [(], [)] keys.

“ELECTRICAL ADJUST” is selected and its lower layer
submenu appears.
*
Alignment Tape
XH5-1A2 ; 8-967-999-22
for NTSC
XH4-1A ; 8-967-999-31
XH5-1AP2 ; 8-967-999-26
for PAL
XH4-1AP ; 8-967-999-35
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-32
[PLL|F0]
The PLL adjustment is described below:

“PLL F0” is selected and executes the adjustment of PLL.
2. After completing adjustment, confirm that “COMPLETE”

appears.
3. Press the [SET] ([YES]) key to return to the main menu.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-33
[DVCAM|EQ|ADJ]
Move the white background cursor to “DVCAM EQ ADJ” on the

display using the [(], [)] keys.
1. Press the [*] key to enter the ADJUSTMENT mode.
2. Playback the alignment tape XH5-1A2/XH5-1AP2. Select

“15E” in the parentheses ( ) in the top right with the [*] key
and select PHASE with the [*] key at the same time. Perform
adjustment until the data becomes nearly the minimum value
(000X) using the [(], [)] keys.

and select COS with the [*] key at the same time. Perform

and select AGC with the [*] key at the same time. Perform
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-34
and select DELAY with the [*] key at the same time. Perform

“15O” in the parentheses ( ) in the top right with the [*] key
and select PHASE with the [*] key at the same time. Perform

and select COS with the [*] key at the same time. Perform
DSR-80/80P (Skip this step in the DSR-60/60P.)

and select AGC with the [*] key at the same time. Perform
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-35
DSR-80/80P (Skip this step in the DSR-60/60P.)
and select DELAY with the [*] key at the same time. Perform
10. Playback the alignment tape XH4-1A/XH4-1AP. Select “10E”

in the parentheses ( ) in the top right with the [*] key and
select PHASE with the [*] key at the same time. Perform

select COS with the [*] key at the same time. Perform

select AGC with the [*] key at the same time. Perform
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-36
select DELAY with the [*] key at the same time. Perform
14. Playback the alignment tape XH4-1A/XH4-1AP. Select “10O”

select PHASE with the [*] key at the same time. Perform
15. Playback the alignment tape XH4-1A/XH4-1AP. Select “10O”

select COS with the [*] key at the same time. Then set the
value “DE” with the [(], [)] keys and press the [SET]
([YES]) key to save the data.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-37
[DV|EQ|ADJ]
Move the white background cursor to “DV EQ ADJ” on the

display using the [(], [)] keys.
2. Playback the alignment tape XH4-1A/XH4-1AP. Select “E” in

the parentheses ( ) in the top right with the [*] key and select
PHASE with the [*] key at the same time. Perform adjustment
until the data becomes nearly the minimum value (000X) using
the [(], [)] keys.

COS with the [*] key at the same time. Perform adjustment
the [(], [)] keys.

AGC with the [*] key at the same time. Perform adjustment
the [(], [)] keys.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-38
DELAY with the [*] key at the same time. Perform
6. Playback the alignment tape XH4-1A/XH4-1AP. Select “O” in

PHASE with the [*] key at the same time. Perform adjustment
the [(], [)] keys.
7. Playback the alignment tape XH4-1A/XH4-1AP. Select “O” in

COS with the [*] key at the same time. Then set the value
“40” with the [(], [)] keys, and press the [SET] ([YES])
key to save the data.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-39
DSR-80 / 80P
[REC|CURRENT]
Move the cursor to “REC CURRENT” which is displayed with a

white background using the [(], [)] keys.

2. Press the [(], [)] keys and the [&], [*] keys to adjust the data
to “A8”.
or
Press the [SET] ([YES]) key to save the data.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-40
DSR-80 / 80P
[FE|CHECK]
Move the cursor to “FE CHECK” which is displayed with a white

background using the [(], [)] keys.
1. Insert the alignment cassette.

(Operation is facilitated by setting TC to 00, by pressing the
following keys in this order : [TC|PRESET], [RESET]
and [SET] keys.)
2. Connect an oscilloscope as follows :
E-ch check ; TP402/RP-101 board
O-ch check ; TP502/RP-101 board
GND : E701
TRIG : TP308
4. Press the [(] key to select recording and press the [PLAY]
and [REC] keys.
After recording of 30 to 60 seconds at the specified TC value,
press [STOP].
5. Playback the recorded segment and note down the waveform
level.
6. Press the [(] key to select FE ONLY (VIDEO) and press the
[PLAY] and [REC] keys at the segment that was recorded in
step 4.
Record (erase) 30 seconds.
7. Playback the segment recorded in step 6. and confirm that the
waveform level is 30% or less.
B
A
B < Ax0.3
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-41
4-7. SERVICE SUPPORT
Displays the error codes and error contents which occurred in the
past and diagnoses the system and devices.
Operating procedure
2. Move the cursor to “SERVICE SUPPORT” which is displayed
with a white background using the [(], [)] keys.

“SERVICE SUPPORT” is selected and its lower layer
submenu appears.

the main menu.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-42
[ERROR|LOG]
The errors which occurs in the past in this machine are displayed.
(A maximum of 8 errors are displayed starting from the most
recent error.)
*
The error which occurs most recently is displayed on the top.
Note : The servo system errors only are stored here. The
ERROR-91, 92, 93, 94 and 95 are not stored.
[MANUAL|EJECT]
When a tape cannot be ejected by the normal EJECT operation, the

operating procedure how to take the tape out is displayed.
Press the [*] key to enter “MANUAL EJECT”.

Take the tape out in accordance with the instruction given on the
display.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-43
4-8. OTHERS
Enables to check the software version, keyboard and others.
Operating procedure
2. Move the cursor to “OTHERS” which is displayed with a white
background using the [(], [)] keys.

“OTHERS” is selected and its lower layer submenu appears.

the main menu.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-44
[KEYBOARD|CHECK]
Checks the keys, slide switches and display system (time counter),
and displays the CM information.
1. Pressing the [SET] ([YES]) key enters the KEYBOARD

CHECK.
Note : Once the machine enters the KEYBOARD
CHECK, the machine cannot exit the
KEYBOARD CHECK without turning off the
main power.
Insert a tape before entering the KEYBOARD
CHECK in order to display the CM information.
2. Setup of all switches on the sub control panel are shown on the
monitor. All indications on the time counter turn on at the
same time..
3. Pressing any key or changing the switch setup releases the all
indications turning-on condition. Information of the changed
switch or information of the pressed key is displayed.
However, when two more keys are pressed simultaneously, the
display “DOUBLE KEYIN” appears.
*
Turn off the main power to exit the KEYBOARD CHECK
mode.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-45
4. Pressing the [MENU] key while depressing the [&] key
displays the CM information.
When a tape includes CM, the display “CM FOUND” appears.
When a tape does not include CM, the display “ID BOARD”
appears.
(The time counter displays “ 4 4 4”.)
In the case when a tape other than the DVCAM or DV VTR is

inserted, the display “ILLEGAL TAPE” appears.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-46
Symptoms which are suspected as failure
1 When the time counter display function is defective

. There are some segments which do not turn on even in the
all-indication turning-on mode of the counter.
. There are some segments which are abnormally bright or
dark.
. There are some segments which turn on when fingers are
removed from the keys. All segments must illuminate as
shown in the right when fingers are removed from the keys.
2 When input key is defective

. A key name of indication “DOUBLE” is displayed even
when any keys are not pressed.
(The switch name keeps appearing when a switch setting is
modified. This is normal.)
. The key name is not displayed even though the
corresponding key is pressed.
3 When key illumination is defective

. The key does not turn on even though the corresponding key
is pressed.
. The key turns on even though any keys are not pressed.
4 When input switches are defective

. The setup name is not displayed even though the switch
setting is modified.
5 When CM communication function is defective

. The indication “ID BOARD” appears when CM information
is expected to display using a tape including CM.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 4-47
[SOFTWARE|VERSION]
Displays the model-wise information and software version number.
DSR-60/60P
SY : Version of ICs102 and 103 on the SY-241B board.
SP : Version of ICs316 and 317 on the SY-241B board.
SV : Version of ICs5 and 6 on the SV-184 board.
DR : Version of IC201 on the SV-184 board.
KY : Version of IC1 on the KY-336B board.
TBC : Version of IC605 on the IO-149B/149C board.
DIF : Version of IC300 on the SDI-26A board.
SDI : Version of IC301 on the SDI-28 board.
MENU : Version of the setup menu.
*
The DSR-60/60P indicates NONE for the SDI version when the optional board DSBK-100/100P (SDI
output) is not installed.
NONE is indicated for the DIF version when the optional board DSBK-110/110P (QSDI output) is not
installed.
DSR-80/80P
SY : Version of ICs102 and 103 on the SY-241 board.
SP : Version of ICs316 and 317 on the SY-241 board.
SV : Version of ICs5 and 6 on the SV-184A board.
DR : Version of IC201 on the SV-184A board.
KY : Version of IC1 on the KY-336 board.
TBC : Version of IC605 on the IO-149/149A board.
DIF : Version of IC300 on the SDI-26 board.
SDI : Version of IC301 on the SDI-28 board.
MENU : Version of the setup menu.
*
The DSR-80/80P indicates NONE for the SDI version when the optional board DSBK-120/120P (SDI
input/output) is not installed.
*
Contents which are shown in the display can be changed when you press [(], [)] keys.
Press the [&] key or the [MENU] key to return to the maintenance menu.
[MEMORY|DISPLAY]
*
This menu is prepared for production in the factory.
[DATA|DISPLAY]
*
This menu is prepared for production in the factory.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
4-48
SECTION 5
PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
5-1. HOURS METER
The hours meter data is displayed on the monitor display and the time counter display area.
Therefore, the hours meter data cannot be checked without turning on the main power to the unit.
Periodic inspection is recommended to be performed using the hours meter reading.
HOURS METER
The hours meter has the four types of display mode. The accumulated elapsed hours of operation or accumulated times of
operation are displayed in the respective modes. The T2, T3 and CT modes have both of resettable accumulation counter
and un-resettable accumulation counter.
Note : The actual hours and times are obtained by multiplying the displayed number by 10.
Modes Contents of display
T1 : OPERATION Accumulated hours of power on

T2 : DRUM ROTATION Accumulated hours of drum rotation at the threaded-end position
T3 : TAPE RUNNING Accumulated hours of tape running in the respective modes of fast forward, rewind, playback, search,
record and edit (except for the still mode during search)
CT : THREADING Numbers of times of threading and unthreading
Example : The following display indicates that the accumulated hours of drum rotation at the threaded-end position is
1500 hours.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 5-1
5-1-1. Displaying Hours Meter Information
1. Open the menu panel in the front bottom as

shown.
[RESET] ([NO]) key
[(] key
[MENU] key
Menu panel
[&] key
[)] key
[*] key
[SET] ([YES]) key
2. Press the [MENU] key. [Monitor screen]

3. Select HOURS METER and press the [*] key.
4. All of the hours meter information of T1, T2, T3 and CT
appear on the monitor screen.
5. Either one of T1, T2, T3 or CT is displayed on the time counter
display area. Select another item using the [(], [)] keys.
6. When the mode of T2, T3 or CT is selected, the resettable
hours meter value appears first.
7. The un-resettable hours meter value is displayed while the [*]
key is kept pressed.
Note : When the hours meter value becomes larger and

exceeds the limit of display, “ — —” will appear.
8. Press the [MENU] key again to return to the original mode.
[Counter display area]
Or
Or
Or
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
5-2
5-1-2. How to Reset Hours Meter
1. Set the switch S201-1 on the SY board to ON.

2. Press the [MENU] key.
3. Select HOURS METER using [(], [)] keys.
4. Select the desired item to reset using [(], [)] keys.
5. When the [RESET] key is pressed, the display changes to
“0000” which blinks.
6. When the [SET] key is pressed, a message appears requesting
approval to reset, on the monitor.
7. To reset the memory, press the [SET] key again to exit the
hours meter display mode.
Note : The following message appears while saving data into

memory during reset.
If the main power is turned off while the message
appears, the memory will not be reset correctly. Do
not turn off the main power while the display appears.
8. Set the switch S201-1 on the SY board to OFF.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 5-3
5-2. MAINTENANCE UPON 5-2-2. Tape Running Path Cleaning
COMPLETION OF REPAIR
Clean the tape guide, drum, capstan, pinch roller, tape
Whenever repairing a unit is completed, perform the cleaner and other parts which contact with video tape, with
following maintenance work regardless of the elapsed cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
operating hours of the unit.
Note : . Be careful of the tape cleaner during
1. Video head cleaning cleaning because it has sharp edge.
(Refer to section 5-2-1 for cleaning procedure.) . After cleaning, wipe off moisture using a dry
2. Tape running path cleaning cleaning cloth.
(Refer to section 5-2-2 for cleaning procedure.)
Note : After a unit is cleaned, insert a cassette after Tape cleaner

(Sharp edge)
cleaning fluid is dried completely.
5-2-1. Video Head Cleaning Procedure

Tape cleaner assembly
Bring a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid in
contact with the head tip gently, and rotate the drum slowly
with hand for cleaning.
5-2-3. Cassette Compartment Entrance

Cleaning
Cleaning cloth
Clean the area around the cassette guide of the front panel
and entire surface of the stage of the cassette compartment as
Video head Drum shown using cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
Note : Remove the cassette compartment when

cleaning a unit to prevent foreign materials
from dropping into a unit.
Entire surface of stage

(Cleaning)
Video head
Note : . Never move the cleaning cloth in vertical

direction with respect to the drum rotating
direction (up and down direction with
respect to drum) during cleaning, or never
clean it vertically.
. After cleaning, wipe off moisture using a dry
cleaning cloth.
. Turn off the main power when cleaning a
unit.
Area around cassette guide

(Cleaning)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
5-4
5-3. PERIODIC INSPECTION LIST
The following table shows the reference parts replacement time which is not the warranty time of parts. Refer to the
following table to establish the periodic inspection schedule which realizes the full performance and function of a unit and
to extend life of a tape.
The actual parts replacement period depends on the operating environment and conditions of a unit.
: Part replacement : Check (adjustment) O : Cleaning
Periodic inspection items Hours meter Inspection time (hours) Note 1: Life of a head can be shortened in the
Remarks
Inspection items Part number Name Quantity Display mode 1500 3000 4500 6000 atmosphere of high humidity, high temperature
A-8315-156-A Drum assembly (DEH-05A-R) For DSR-60/60P or in dusty area. Use of the unit in an
Drum assembly 1 T2
A-8315-493-A Drum assembly (DEH-06A-R) For DSR-80/80P atmosphere which is air-conditioned and dust
Pinch solenoid 1-454-337- Solenoid plunger 1 T2 _ _ _ is less, is recommended. Storage of tape under
Tape drive system
Reel motor (S) A-8311-188- RS table (S) assembly 1 T2 _ _ constant temperature and constant humidity is
Reel motor (T) A-8311-189- RS table (T) assembly 1 T2 _ _ recommended.
Limiter rubber of gear box 3-604-442- Limiter rubber 1 CT Replace every 200,000 times.
Fan motor 1-698-785- DC fan motor 1 T1 Replace every 30,000 hours.
Brake shoe (S) X-3678-873- Brake (S) assembly 1 T2
Brake shoe (T) X-3678-874- Brake (T) assembly 1 T2
Head cleaner solenoid 1-454-337- Solenoid plunger 1 T2 _ _ _
Capstan motor 1-698-881- DC motor (capstan) 1 T2 _ _

Pinch roller X-3678-746- Pinch roller arm assembly 1 T2
Guide roller TG-1 X-3678-723- Guide roller assembly 1 T2 _ _
Guide roller TG-2 X-3678-762- TG-2 guide roller assembly 1 T2 _ _
Guide roller TG-3 X-3678-711- TR roller assembly 1 T2 _ _
Tape run path
Guide roller TG-6 X-3678-723- Guide roller assembly 1 T2 _ _

Guide roller TG-7 X-3678-718- Leading roller assembly 1 T2 _ _
Guide roller TG-8 A-8278-414- Loading ring assembly 1 T2 _ _
Guide roller TG-12 X-3604-922- TG-12 assembly 1 T2 _ _
Tape running surface
_ _ _ _ O O O O
(including tape cleaner)
Others Cleaner
Head cleaner A-8312-011- HC assembly 1 T2 For DSR-60/60P

Head cleaner A-8316-539- HC assembly (2) 1 T2 For DSR-80/80P
Cassette compartment block A-8312-671- Cassette compartment assembly 1 CT Replace every 100,000 times.
Cassette memory terminal A-8311-617- MIC holder (E) assembly 1 T2 O O O O
T1 : OPERATION T2 : DRUM ROTATION T3 : TAPE RUNNING CT : THREADING
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 5-5 5-5

SECTION 6
REPLACEMENT OF MECHANICAL PARTS
6-1. GENERAL INFORMATION FOR PART REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
6-1-1. Preparation Before Starting Part Replacement
. When performing part replacement or mechanical adjustment, remove the cassette compartment from the unit unless
otherwise specified.
. When the connector of the cassette compartment is removed, the protection circuit starts functioning.
Refer to section “3-10. OPERATING THE VTR WITHOUT A CASSETTE TAPE” when operating the unit without
inserting a cassette tape.
Removal
1) Remove the top cover. (Refer to section 3-7.) 5) Rotate the gear of the cassette compartment in the
2) Pull the flexible card wire out of the connector (CN50) direction of arrow and back the rack about 5 mm.
on the CC-75 board. 6) Remove the cassette compartment in the direction of
3) Remove the cassette compartment retainer assembly by arrow A by lifting up the rear side of the cassette
loosening the 2 screws that hold it. compartment slightly.
. The screws cannot fall out of the cassette
compartment retainer assembly because they have a
drop-protector. Attachment
4) Loosen the four screws fixing the cassette compartment. Refer to section “3-5. REMOVAL AND ATTACHMENT
. The screws cannot fall out of the cassette OF THE CASSETTE COMPARTMENT” for details on
compartment because they have a drop-protector. how to attach the cassette compartment.
Cassette compartment retainer assembly
Fixing screw (with drop-protector) Fixing screw (with drop-protector)
CC-75 board
Rear
Flexible card wire CN50
Gear
Fixing screws
Cassette compartment (with drop-protector)
Positioning hole
Positioning pin
Positioning pin Rack
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-1
6-1-2. Head Cleaner and Drum Assembly 6-1-3. Oil and Grease
1. Head Cleaner Assembly 1. Oil

When replacing the mechanical parts, remove the head Sony part number : 7-661-018-18
cleaner assembly as needed. (Refer to section 6-30.) Be sure to use only the specified oil when oil is
required during part replacement. If other than the
2. Drum Assembly specified oil is used, major malfunctions may result
When replacing the drum assembly or the respective due to differences in oil viscosity and its components.
tape guides or other mechanical parts, perform the If an oil containing dirt is used, the shafts and bearings
replacement work with the D cover attached to protect may be damaged and major malfunctions may result.
the tape running surface from scars. One drop of oil is defined as follows:
The amount of oil which will adhere to the end of a
Tool rod of 2 mm diameter, as shown.
D cover : J-6443-360-A
D cover 2 mm diameter rod
TG-4
Oil
2. Grease
Sony part number : 7-651-000-10 (Grease SGL-601)
Be sure to use the specified grease when applying it to
the moving parts.
If other than the specified grease is used, major
malfunctions may result due to differences in oil
viscosity and its components.
If a grease containing dirt is used, the shafts and
bearings may be damaged causing major malfunctions.
Amount of Grease to be Coated

Coat just enough grease to leave a thin film on the surface.
Wipe off any grease that oozes out into the surrounding
parts with gauze or a soft cloth.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-2
6-2. DRUM ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
. The drum assembly is a periodic replacement part. Replace in accordance with the periodic replacement list.
. The drum assembly must be replaced in the following cases:
(1) The rabbet guide surface of the lower drum wears out such that the correct RF envelope cannot be obtained, even
after performing the tape path adjustment for best tracking.
(2) When the rabbet guide surface or tape running surface of the lower drum is damaged.
(3) If the drum rotation is abnormal and the VTR does not work properly due to noise or jitter.
Tools
Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
Removal
1. Place this unit with its left side down.
2. Remove the three fixing screws (PWH 3x6)
from the MD chassis, and remove the bottom Flexible card wire
case in the direction of arrow.
CN202
3. Remove the flexible card wire (green) from the
connector (CN202) on the MS-43 board.
CN202 (DSR-60/60P)
DSR-60/60P CN1 (DSR-80/80P)
4. Remove the two flexible card wires (brown) MS-43 board

from the connector (CN202) on the PRE-39
PRE-39 board
board.
(DSR-60/60P)
DSR-80/80P PRE-34 board
4. Remove the two flexible card wires (brown) (DSR-80/80P)
Flexible card wire
from the connector (CN1) on the PRE-34 board.
Bottom case
MB shield
holder
case assembly
Fixing screws
Bottom case PWH 3x6
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-3
5. Place the unit horizontally.
Fixing screws
PS 2x6
Note : Be careful not to damage the tape guides
in the vicinity of the drum assembly, or Dew sensor
Positioning hole
the tape running surfaces of the drum
assembly. Drum assembly
Mounting surface
6. Remove the three screws (PS 2x6) securing the (rear)
drum assembly from the MD chassis, and Positioning hole
remove the drum assembly and dew sensor while
MD chassis
taking care not to let it touch the various guides. Mounting surface
Tape guide
Positioning pin
Attachment
7. Clean the mounting surface of the new drum and
the mounting surface of the MD chassis using the
cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
Note : Be careful not to scratch the tape

running surface of the drum assembly or
the guides during cleaning.
8. Align the two positioning pins of the MD chassis

with the positioning holes in the bottom of the
drum assembly, then insert the drum assembly
into the MD chassis.
9. While pushing the drum assembly in the
direction of arrow (turning clockwise), fix the
drum assembly and dew sensor with the three
screws.
10. Connect the connectors and attach the
disassembled parts by reversing the removal
procedure from steps 6 to 1.
11. Clean the tape running surface of the drum
assembly using the cleaning cloth moistened
with cleaning fluid.
12. After cleaning, wipe the cleaned surface two or
three times with a dry cloth.
Adjustment After Replacement

13. Perform the Tape Path Adjustment.
14. Perform the RF Adjustment.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-4
6-3. REEL TABLE REPLACEMENT
. The reel table replacement procedure is the same for both the supply side and the takeup side.
Tools
L shaped hexagon wrench (width across flat 0.89 mm) :
7-700-736-06
Removal
1. Insert an L-shaped hexagon wrench into the
<Supply side>
round holes (two holes) on the sides of the reel
table when viewing the reel table from the side. Reel table assembly
Loosen the two set screws (WP 2x3) of the reel
table, then remove the reel table. Set screws
2. Loosen the two set screws of the other reel table WP 2x3
in the same manner as step 1, then remove the
Polyslider washer
reel table assembly.
Reel block (S) assembly Motor shaft
Brake (S) assembly
Note : A polyslider washer of 2 mm dia. is
inserted beneath the reel table
bearing for adjusting the height of
the reel table.
Be careful not to lose the polyslider
washer when removing the reel table
as the bent polyslider washer may
stick to the bottom of the reel table.
Also take care not to let the mirror
block at the bottom of the reel table
assembly become dirty, and take care
not to touch the brake surface of the
reel table assembly. Mirror surface
Attachment
Brake surface of
3. Clean the motor shaft with the cleaning cloth reel table assembly
moistened with cleaning fluid.
4. Insert the new reel table assembly into the motor
shaft.
Note : Tighten the set screws of each reel table

assembly after checking the height of
each reel table.

5. Adjust the reel table height.
(Refer to section 6-3-1.)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-5
6-3-1. Checking and Adjusting the Reel Table Height
. Be sure to perform this check and adjustment after replacing the reel block assembly, or after removing or replacing the
reel table.
. Pay particular attention when adjusting the reel table height as it is used as the reference of the tape running system.
Tools
Reel table height gauge : J-6442-570-A
<Standard cassette>
Reel table reference plate : J-6442-470-A
Cleaning cloth : 7-741-900-53 Reel table reference plate
Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01 Reel table height gauge
L shaped hexagon wrench
(width across flat 0.89 mm) : 7-700-736-06
Check Procedure
1. Confirm that the unit is in the unthreaded-end state.
2. Turn the gear of the reel position motor assembly
until the reel table is moved to the standard
cassette position.
3. Clean the surface of the reel table reference plate with
the cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
4. Place the reel table reference plate in the position S reel table
where a cassette must be placed. Remove play Gear
using the adjustment screws. Reel position motor
5. Clean the surface of the reel table height gauge with assembly
T reel table Adjustment screw
the cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
6. Move the reel table height gauge from the three
directions as shown by the arrow, toward the <Mini-cassette>
supply or takeup reel table. Confirm that the
Reel table reference plate
respective specifications are satisfied.
Reel table height gauge
Specification : The reel table height must be

in between the passing
surface and stopping surface
of the reel table height gauge.
7. Remove the reel table reference plate.

8. Turn the gear of the reel position motor assembly until
the reel table is moved to the mini-cassette position.
9. Remove the stop washer 2.3 and the spring, and S reel table
move the cassette memory terminal assembly in Gear
the direction of the arrow. Reel position motor
10. Change position of the reel table reference plate assembly
and select its mini-cassette position. Repeat step 4. Spring
11. Repeat step 6 and confirm that the specification Shaft T reel table
is satisfied.
12. If either specification is not satisfied, proceed to step Adjustment screw
13 for adjustment. Repeat the adjustment until the Stop washer
specifications are satisfied at both of the standard 2.3
Cassette memory terminal
cassette position and the mini cassette position. assembly
When the specifications are satisfied, proceed to Fig.-1
step 15.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-6
Adjustment Procedure
13. Remove the reel table.
14. Increase or decrease the number of polyslider washers
which are inserted into the reel motor shaft until the
specifications are satisfied.
Adjustment polyslider washers (diameter : 2 mm)

0.13 mm thickness : 3-701-437-01
0.25 mm thickness : 3-701-437-11
0.5 mm thickness : 3-701-437-21
0.05 mm thickness : 3-701-437-91
15. While gently pressing the supply or takeup reel table

downward, tighten the two set screws of the reel table
with the L-shaped hexagon wrench.
16. Confirm again that the specifications are satisfied.
<Standard cassette>
Specification : The reel table height must be in between the

passing surface and stopping surface of the
reel table height gauge.
<Supply reel table height> <Take-up reel table height>
Reel table height gauge Standard cassette Reel table height gauge Standard cassette
supporting surface supporting surface
Reel table reference Passing surface
Reel table reference Passing surface
plate plate
T
S
S T
Stopping surface Stopping surface

Brake surface Brake surface
Reel table Reel table
<Mini-cassette>
Specification : The reel table height must be in between the
passing surface and stopping surface of the
reel table height gauge.
<Supply reel table height> <Take-up reel table height>

Reel table height gauge Mini-cassette Reel table height gauge Mini-cassette
supporting surface supporting surface
Reel table reference Passing surface Reel table reference Passing surface
plate plate
T S
S T
Stopping surface Stopping surface

Brake surface Brake surface
Reel table Reel table
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-7
6-4. BRAKE ASSEMBLY (SUPPLY AND TAKEUP) REPLACEMENT
. The brake assembly replacement procedure is the same for both the supply side and the takeup side.
. The brake (S) assembly and the brake (T) assembly are pressed against the S and T reel tables when the main power is on
or off.
. When a cassette is inserted while the power is turned on, the S-side and the T-side brake assemblies are detached from
the reel tables. The brake (S) assembly is pressed against the S reel table during threading and unthreading when the
threading ring is revolving.
. The T and the S reel brake linings are kept detached from the reel tables during the PLAY, STOP, REW, FFWD,
SEARCH and REV modes.
. Press the [EJECT] key to let the unit enter the EJECT mode. When the EJECT mode is completed, the S-side and the
T-side brake assemblies are pressed against the reel tables in a few seconds.
Removal
1. Remove the spring from the brake assembly.
<Supply side>
2. While slanting the claw of the reel motor plate in
the direction of arrow A, remove the brake (S) Brake (S) assembly
assembly. Be careful not to break the claw Brake lining
during removal.
Reel table assembly
Attachment
3. Attach a new brake (S) assembly by reversing Spring
the removal procedure from steps 2 to 1. (Fig.-1.)
A
Claw
. Perform the Reel Brake Release Check.
Shaft
. Perform the Reel Brake Release Adjustment.
. Perform the Brake Torque Adjustment.
(Refer to sections 6-4-1 and 6-4-2.)
Reel block (S) assembly
Fig.-1
Claw Brake arm
Brake release arm
Iron core
Brake solenoid
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-8
6-4-1. Brake Torque Adjustment and Knob
Check (Supply) A Brake torque gauge
(CW)
Tools Reel table (S) assembly
Brake torque gage (CW) : J-6442-170-A
Brake (S) assembly
Brake torque gage (CCW) : J-6442-460-A
Adjustment Procedure
1. Move the reel block (S) assembly to the standard
cassette position.
2. Place the brake torque gauge (CW) to the reel
table assembly.
3. Revolve the knob of the brake torque gauge
(CW) in the “A” direction at the speed of 1
revolution/1 to 3 seconds. Confirm that the Reel block (S) assembly
specification A is satisfied. (standard cassette position)
<If the unit is out of specification>
Make adjustment by changing the hooking
Specification : A = 2.0~3.0 mN.m
position of the tensile coil spring on the brake (S)
(20~30 g.cm)
assembly. (Fig.-1) Tension coiled spring
Brake (S) assembly
Hole
Fig.-1
4. Place the brake torque gauge (CCW) to the reel

table assembly. Specification : B = 1.0~2.5 mN.m
(10~25 g.cm)
5. Revolve the knob of the brake torque gauge Knob
B
(CCW) in the “B” direction at the speed of 1
Brake torque cassette
revolution/1 to 3 seconds. Confirm that the (CCW)
specification B is satisfied. Reel table (S) assembly
Brake (S) assembly

(standard cassette position)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-9
6-4-2. Brake Torque Adjustment and
Check (Takeup) Roller block
Brake torque gauge

Tools (CCW)
Brake torque gauge (CW) : J-6442-170-A Knob
Brake torque gauge (CCW) : J-6442-460-A A
Adjustment Procedure Fig.-1

1. Move the reel block (T) assembly to the standard
cassette position.
2. Place the brake torque cassette (CCW) to the reel
table assembly.
3. While pushing down the roller block of the CR
push arm assembly with hand or driver, evolve
the knob of the brake torque cassette (CCW) in
the “A” direction at the speed of 1 revolution/1 Reel table (T)
to 3 seconds. Confirm that the specification A assembly
is satisfied. (Fig.-1) Reel block (T) assembly

<If the machine is out of specification>
Brake (T) assembly
Make adjustment by changing the hooking
position of the tension coil spring on the brake Specification : A = 2.0~3.0 mN.m
(T) assembly. (Fig.-2) (20~30 g.cm)
Tension coiled
Brake (T) assembly

Hole
Fig.-2
4. Place the brake torque cassette (CW) to the reel Specification : B = 1.0~2.5 mN.m
table assembly. (10~25 g.cm)
5. Revolve the knob of the brake torque cassette
Knob
(CW) in the “B” direction at the speed of 1 Brake torque gauge (CW)
B
revolution/1 to 3 seconds. Confirm that the
specification B is satisfied.
Reel table (T) assembly
Reel block (T) assembly

Brake (T) assembly
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-10
6-4-3. Reel Brake Release Check and Adjustment
. When the brake assembly or the reel table assembly is replaced, be sure to confirm that the brake (S/T) assembly is
released from the reel table.
. When the brake solenoid is replaced or removed, be sure to confirm that the brake (S/T) assembly is released from the
reel table.
Tools
Vernier calipers
Check Procedure
1. Turn off the main power switch.
<Supply side>
2. Confirm that the T-side brake assembly does not
contact with the T reel table while the T reel Reel table assembly
table is rotating.
If the above specification is not satisfied, check
Brake (S) assembly
the condition of the brake assembly and the
brake solenoid assembly.
(Refer to sections 6-4 and 6-8.)
3. Confirm that the S-side brake assembly does not
Lock
contact with the S reel table while the S reel table Release
is rotating.
If the above specification is not satisfied, check
the condition of the brake assembly and the
brake solenoid assembly.
(Refer to sections 6-4 and 6-8.)
Adjustment Procedure Specification : A = 3.2~3.4 mm

4. Adjust the distance between the end of the Top surface (U rib around the hole)
solenoid’s iron core and the top surface of the
reel motor plate. A
Reel motor plate

Brake solenoid
Brake solenoid Screws
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-11
6-5. REEL ROTATION SENSOR REPLACEMENT
. The reel rotation sensor replacement procedure is

the same for both the supply side and the take up
side.
. Replace the reel rotation sensor as the SE-315 or Connector
SE-361 board. CN61 (SE-361 board)
It is impossible to replace the reel rotation T-SIDE
sensor singly.
CN61 (SE-315 board)

Removal S-SIDE
2. Remove the three fixing screws (PWH 3x6) MB shield case
from the MD chassis and remove the bottom case assembly
in the direction of arrow.
3. Remove the connector either from the SE-315
board (CN61.S side) or the SE-361 board
(CN61.T side).
Bottom case
MD chassis Fixing screws

PWH 3x6

<Supply side>
5. Remove the reel table assembly.
Reel table assembly
6. Remove the spring from the reel block assembly
and move the brake assembly in the direction of Set screw WP 2x3
the arrow.
7. Remove the fixing screw (PTP 2x5), and remove Rotation sensor
Polyslider washer 2ø
(IC HEDR-8000)
either SE-315 board (S side) or SE-361 board PTP 2x5
(T side). SE-315 board (S-SIDE) Holes
Motor shaft
Attachment CN61
Connector Positioning pins
8. Insert the two positioning holes of the new either
Spring
SE-315 board (S side) or SE-361 board (T side),
into the positioning pins of the reel block
assembly. Fix them with a screw.
9. Attach the disassembled parts by reversing the
removal procedure from 7 to 1.
Brake (S) assembly Reel block (S) assembly

Brake assembly
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-12
6-6. REEL BLOCK ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
. The reel block assembly replacement procedure is the same for both the supply side and the takeup side.
Mode
Unthreaded-end state Bottom case holder
MS-43 board
Tools
MB shield
(width across flat 0.89 mm) : 7-700-736-06 case assembly
Sony grease (SGL-601) : 7-651-000-01
Removal
2. Revolve the gear of the reel position motor with
hand until the reel table comes to the center
position between mini cassette position and
standard cassette position. PWH 3x6
. The reel table moves closer to the mini cassette Bottom case
position as viewed from the front when the
gear is rotated in clockwise direction. T reel table
The reel table moves closer to the standard (center position between the
Flexible card wire mini cassette position and the
cassette position when the gear is rotated in the standard cassette position)
CN208
counter-clockwise direction.
3. Remove the three fixing screws (PWH 3x6)
from the MD chassis and remove the bottom case
in the direction of the arrow. Gear
4. Remove the flexible card wire from CN11 CN11 RM-159 board
(T side) on the RM-159 board or CN15 (S side) to
standard
on the RM-160 board of the reel block assembly. cassette
To replace the reel block assembly in the T side,
remove the flexible card wire of the cassette to mini S reel table
cassette (center position between
memory terminal assembly from the connector the mini cassette position
and the standard cassette
(CN208) on the MS-43 board. Reel position position)
motor CN15
Flexible card wire RM-160 board
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-13
PWH 2.6x6 Plate guide
6. Remove the stop washer 2.3 which fixes the
crank rod assembly of the reel block (S)
assembly to the crank arm (S) assembly. Stop washer 2.3
To replace the reel block assembly in the T side,
remove the stop washer 2.3 and raise the cassette Slide shaft
Crank rod assembly
memory terminal assembly out of the crank arm shaft.
7. Remove the fixing screw (PWH 2.6x6) and
PWH 2.6x6
remove the plate guide. Stop washer 2.3
8. Loosen the screw of the shaft retainer B by
Reel rock
rotating it 1 to 2 turns. releasing claw
9. Lift up the reel lock releasing claw until it is
Reel rock
locked. Remove the fixing screw (PWH 2.6x6) releasing assembly
and remove the reel lock releasing assembly. Screw
Note : Be careful not to give scars on the slide Shaft retainer B
shaft when removing and inserting the
slide shaft.
10. Remove the reel block assembly together with
Crank arm (S)
the slide shaft. assembly
11. Remove the slide shaft from the reel block Mini
assembly by pushing the slide shaft in the direction cassette
Standard
of arrow as shown. cassette
Cassette memory T reel block

Attachment Reel motor gear
terminal assembly assembly
12. Clean the hole through which the slide shaft of
Crank arm shaft
the new reel block assembly passes through, with
cleaning cloth moistened with the cleaning fluid.
Clean the convex area of the projection with <Supply side>
cleaning piece moistened with the cleaning fluid. Reel block (S) assembly
13. Clean the slide shaft with cleaning cloth Fig.-1
moistened with the cleaning fluid.
14. Insert the slide shaft into the hole of the reel
block assembly. area Projection
Grease
15. Coat the slide shaft, MD chassis and convex area Hole
with grease. (Refer to Fig.-1 and 2.) Slide shaft
16. While passing the crank rod assembly of the reel
block (S) assembly into which the slide shaft has
already been inserted through the crank arm (S)
assembly, place the crank rod assembly on the
MD chassis. Insert the slide shaft into the shaft Fig.-2 Grease
retainer B.
17. Attach the reel lock release assembly using a
screw, fix the slide shaft and lower the reel lock
release assembly in the direction of arrow.
18. Tighten the screw of the shaft retainer B.
19. Attach the plate guide with the screw.
20. Confirm that the reel block (S) assembly moves Grease
smoothly with hand. MD chassis
removal procedure from steps 7 to 1.

22. Perform the Reel Table Height Check.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-14
6-7. REEL MOTOR REPLACEMENT
. Replace the reel motor as the RS table (S or T) assembly. The replacement procedure is the same for both the supply
side and the takeup side. (It is impossible to replace the reel motor singly.)
Tools
(width across flat 0.89 mm) : 7-700-736-06
Removal
1. Remove the reel block assembly from the unit.
<Supply side>
2. Remove the reel table assembly.
Reel table assembly
Attachment
3. Attach the reel table assembly to the new RS Polyslider washer 2ø
table assembly (S or T). (Refer to section 6-3.)
4. Attach the block assembly which is attached in RS table (S) assembly
the step 3 to the unit. (Refer to section 6-6.)

5. Perform the Reel Table Height Check. Reel motor
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-15
6-8. BRAKE SOLENOID REPLACEMENT
. The brake solenoid replacement procedure is the same for both the supply side and the takeup side.
Removal
1. Remove the reel block assembly from the
<Supply side>
machine according to the reel block assembly
replacement procedure. (Refer to section 6-6.)
2. Remove the two fixing screws (PSW 2.6x6) Brake release arm
securing the brake solenoid to the reel block
assembly, and remove the brake solenoid
Iron core
assembly together with either RM-159 board (S
side) or RM-160 board (T side).
3. Remove the connector CN13 (S side) on the RM- Groove
159 board, or CN17 (T side) on the RM-160
board.
Attachment
4. Insert the groove of the iron core of the new
brake solenoid, into the brake release arm, and
attach the brake solenoid with two screws
temporarily. Reel block (S) assembly
removal procedure from steps 3 to 1. Brake solenoid

6. Perform the Reel Brake Release Check and
Adjustment. (Refer to section 6-4-3.)
Connector Fixing screws

PSW 2.6x6
S-SIDE : CN13
(T-SIDE : CN17)
S-side : RM-159 board

(T-side : RM-160 board)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-16
6-9. CAPSTAN MOTOR REPLACEMENT
Tools
Removal
1. Place this unit with its left side down. Capstan motor
MS-43 board
2. Remove the three fixing screw screws (PWH Flexible card wire
3x6) as shown, and remove the bottom case
from the MD chassis in the direction of arrow.
MB shield
3. Remove the flexible card wire of the capstan case assembly
motor from CN201 of the MS-43 board.
4. While holding the capstan motor from the rear
side of the MD chassis with hand, remove the
two fixing screws (PWH 2.6x6) as shown from
the front side of the chassis assembly, and CN201
remove the capstan motor.
Note 1 : Hold the capstan motor with hand Fixing screws
so as not to drop the capstan motor. PWH 3x6
Note 2 : Be careful not to give any scars on Bottom case
the tape guides in the vicinity of the

capstan motor.
Attachment
5. Clean the mounting surface of the new capstan
motor and the mounting surface of the MD Capstan motor
chassis with the cleaning cloth moistened with
Mounting surface
the cleaning fluid.
6. Insert the capstan motor from the rear side of the
chassis assembly, and fix it with the two fixing Rear of MD chassis
screws from the front side.

Note 1 : Be careful not to give any scars on
the capstan shaft.
Note 2 : Be careful not to give any scars on
the tape guides in the vicinity of the
capstan motor. Capstan motor shaft
7. Insert the flexible card wire of the capstan motor
to CN201 of the MS-43 board.

9. Perform the RF Adjustment.
Fixing screws
PWH 2.6x6
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-17
6-10. PINCH PRESSURE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
Removal
1. Remove the connector (3P) CN223 from the
PTC-84 board. Fixing screws
2. Remove the two screws (PWH 2.6x6) and PWH 2.6x6
Positioning holes
remove the pinch pressure assembly in the
Pinch pressure
direction of arrow. assembly
Attachment Harness
3. Insert the positioning pins (at two positions) of Connector (3P)
the MD chassis into the positioning holes of the Hook block
new pinch pressure assembly, and fix the pinch CN223
pressure assembly with two screws. Positioning pin PCT-84 board
4. Insert the connector (3 pins) to CN223 on the MD chassis
PTC-84 board.
5. Route the harness of CN220 and that of the pinch
pressure assembly together through the hook of
the MD chassis.
Check After Replacement
Mode
Let the mechanism perform threading motion
Specifications : Pinch pressure lever
without inserting a cassette, and enter the PLAY A>0
mode (in which the pinch is pressed). B>0
6. Confirm that the pinch pressure lever so that the

clearance between the pinch pressure lever and
the pinch limiter satisfies the specification.
(Fig.-1)

Pinch limiter B
A
Fig.-1
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-18
6-11. PINCH SOLENOID REPLACEMENT
Tools
Clearance gauge : 9-911-053-00
Removal
1. Remove the pinch pressure assembly.
Stop washer 2.3
Poly washer 3ø
2. Remove the two screws (PSW 2.6x5) fixing the
pinch solenoid to the pinch base assembly, and
remove the pinch solenoid.
Note : Because the screw A is coated by
screw locking compound (red), do not
loosen it. Square hole
Pinch solenoid
Iron core
Pinch base assembly
Screw A
(PSW 2.6x5)
Fixing screws
PSW 2.6x5
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-19
Attachment
3. Insert the head of iron core of the new pinch
solenoid into the square hole of the pinch limiter, Pinch solenoid Pinch limiter
and fix the pinch solenoid to the pinch base Spring
assembly temporarily. (Fig.-1) Pinch base assembly
Head block
Square hole
Iron core
Spring
Fig.-1
4. Insert the clearance gauge (2.5 mm) between the

solenoid’s iron core and the stopper, and slide
the pinch solenoid as far it can go. Tighten the Pinch solenoid
two screws.
After tightening the two screws, remove the
clearance gauge. Iron core
5. Check that the clearance between the iron

solenoid core and the stopper satisfies the Stopper
specification.
Fixing screws
6. Check position of the pinch pressure assembly.
(Refer to section 6-10.) A
7. Perform the Tape Path Adjustment. Specifications :

A = 2.4~2.6 mm
Clearance gauge (2.5 mm)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-20
6-12. GEAR BOX MOTOR REPLACEMENT
Tools
Sony grease (SGL-601) : 7-651-000-10
Fixing screws Gear box assembly
PWH 2.6x6 CN21
Mode
EJECT mode Connector (5 pins)
PTC-88 board
Removal
1. Remove the two connectors (CN21 and CN22)
CN22
on the PTC-88 board of the gear box assembly.
Note : Be careful not to break the harness
Connector Gear shaft
holders. (2 pins)
Harness
2. Remove the two screws (PWH 2.6x6) fixing the holder
gear box assembly to the MD chassis, and
Positioning pin
remove the gear box assembly.
Hole for gear shaft
Positioning hole
MD chassis
3. Let the motor assembly protrude from the hole of Square hole block
the gear box base assembly, and remove the gear Bearing
box assembly in the angled direction of arrow A. Motor joint
4. Remove the motor assembly from the worm gear
Motor assembly
block.
Worm gear
Attachment
5. Clean the motor joint of the new motor assembly with Grease A
a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
6. Coat the motor joint of the new motor assembly
Gear shaft
and the square hole of the worm gear with grease. B
7. Insert the motor joint into the square hole of the Claw
worm gear.
Positioning pin
8. While taking care not to drop the PTC-88 board, push
in the motor assembly from the direction of the arrow Hole
B until the gear box motor assembly is locked by the
Claw Claw
two claws of the gear box base assembly.
Gear box base assembly
At this time, push in the bearing block
simultaneously until the bearing block is locked
by the two claws. (Refer to Fig.-1)
Fig.-1
9. Insert the positioning pins of the gear box Bearing
assembly and the gear shaft into the holes (two
holes) of the MD chassis.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-21
6-13. WORM GEAR REPLACEMENT (GEAR BOX)
Tools
Sony grease (SGL-601) : 7-651-000-10
Sony oil (NT-68) : 7-661-018-18
Removal
1. Remove the gear box assembly.
Bearing Stop washer
2. Let the motor assembly protrude from the hole of Worm gear Oil 1.5
the gear box base assembly, and remove the gear Square hole block
box assembly in the angled direction of arrow A. Motor joint
3. Remove the worm gear by pulling it from the 2ø Polyslider
Motor assembly
motor assembly in the direction of arrow. Shaft washers
4. Remove the stop washer 1.5 from the worm gear,
and remove the bearing and 2 ø polyslider Grease
A
washers (2 pieces).
Attachment B
5. Clean the shaft of the new worm gear with the
cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning liquid.
6. Apply a drop of oil to the shaft of the worm gear
as shown. Insert the shaft of the worm gear
Hole
through the two pieces of 2 ø polyslider washer
and the bearing, and fix them with a stop washer. Gear box base assembly
7. Coat thin the worm gear, square hole and the

motor joint with grease.
8. Insert the motor joint to the square hole of the
worm gear.
9. Push in the motor assembly from the direction of
arrow B until the motor assembly is locked by
the two claws of the gear box base assembly.
10. Attach the gear box assembly to the gear box
base assembly referring to section 6-12.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-22
6-14. GEAR BOX MOTOR ROTATION SENSOR REPLACEMENT
Note : Be careful not bend the top two claws of the gear box assembly when attaching and removing the PTC-88
board. (This prevents the two claws from breakage.)
Removal
2. Release the claw of the gear box assembly Claw
securing the PTC-88 board in the direction of
affow A, and remove the PTC-88 board in the
direction of arrow B. Positioning pin
3. Remove the photo interrupter which is connected Photo interrupter
to the PTC-88 board by soldering.
A
Attachment
4. Attach the new photo interrupter to the PTC-88 Claw Hole
board by soldering. B
Positioning pin
5. Align the holes of the PTC-88 board with the Hole
two positioning pins of the gear box assembly, PTC-88 board
and push in the PTC-88 board until it is engaged
with the three claws.
6. Attach the gear box assembly referring to section
6-12.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-23
6-15. PINCH ROLLER ARM ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Revolve the worm gear of the gear box assembly
with hand in the direction of arrow until the
Stop washer 1.5
pinch roller arm assembly comes to the position
as shown.
Threading ring Pinch roller arm assembly
2. Remove the stop washer 1.5 from the pinch assembly
roller arm assembly. Worm gear
3. While pressing the pinch return spring with hand,
remove the pinch arm assembly from the pinch
roller shaft.
Attachment
4. Hook the “A” portion of the pinch return spring
on the spring stay of the threading ring assembly.
5. Insert the new pinch roller arm assembly through
the pinch roller shaft and the spring. Fix them
using the stop washer 1.5. Gear box assembly
6. Hook the “B” portion on the spring stay of the
Spring stay
pinch roller arm assembly.
Stop washer 1.5 Pinch roller arm
7. Confirm that the pinch roller arm assembly assembly
Pinch roller shaft
returns smoothly to the original position when
Threading ring
the pinch roller arm assembly is moved in the assembly
direction of arrow by hand then the hand is
removed.

Spring stay
“A” portion “B” portion

Pinch return spring
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-24
6-16. PRECEDING ROLLER (TG-7) ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
Tools
Tape guide adjustment driver : J-6440-850-A
Removal
1. Revolve the worm gear of the gear box assembly
with hand in the direction of arrow until the
Preceding roller assembly
preceding roller assembly comes to the position Threading ring assembly
as shown. Worm gear
2. Revolve the top flange in the direction of arrow,
and remove the top flange.
Note : Do not revolve the fixing screws
which are painted by screw locking
compound.
3. Remove the preceding roller assembly.

4. Remove the bottom flange and the compression
coil spring.
Gear box assembly
Attachment
5. Clean the outer circumference of the shaft of the
threading ring assembly with the cleaning cloth Fixing screw (P 1.4x2.5) (Top)
Diameter of hole
moistened with the cleaning fluid. Top flange is smaller
6. Insert the compression coil spring into the shaft. Preceding roller assembly
While aligning the recessed part of the bottom
Bottom flange
flange with the protruded portion on the Compression coil spring
threading ring, insert the bottom flange. (Fig.-1)
Pinch arm assembly
7. Inert the new preceding roller assembly into the Diameter of hole
is larger
shaft in the direction as shown. (Fig.-2)
(Bottom)
8. Attach the top flange.
Fig.-2

Shaft
Bottom flange
Recessed ( )
portion of
loading ring
Protruded ( ) portion of
loading ring
Fig.-1
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-25
6-17. THREADING RING ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
Note : When attaching/removing of threading

ring assembly, be careful not to touch
Fig.-1 Dents Threading ring
the peripheral tape guides, drum and assembly
capstan shaft.
A
Removal
Ring roller a
Stop washer 1.5
2. Remove the S arm assembly. Gear box assembly
(Refer to section 6-23.) Ring roller a
3. Revolve the cam gear in the direction of arrow D C Threading ring assembly
A
by hand until the roller block of the T drawer
T drive arm assembly
arm is locked with the stepped portion of the cam
gear. (Fig.-2) B
4. Turn the threading ring with hand in the direction T drawer arm
of arrow A until the recessed portion comes to
“a” position of the ring roller. (Fig.-1)
D
5. Remove the stop washer 1.5 of the ring roller “a”.
6. While lifting the threading ring assembly slightly
up in the direction of arrow C, remove the ring
Ring roller c
roller “a”.
7. While pressing the T drive arm assembly in the
direction of arrow B, remove the threading ring Cam gear
assembly from the grooves of the ring rollers “b”
and “c”, lift the threading ring up in the direction
of arrow C to remove it. (Fig.-3) Ring roller b
Note : At this time, the T drawer arm could go
out of the joint of the T drive arm
assembly and return to the EJECT T drawer arm Treading ring
position. assembly
Ring roller
Attachment Stepping b, c
D portion
8. Revolve the cam gear in the direction of arrow D
with hand until the roller block of the T drawer Roller Groove
Cam gear
arm is locked with the stepped portion of the cam
Fig.-2 Fig.-3
gear. (Fig.-2)
9. Hold the new threading ring assembly in the Dents Treading ring assembly
angled posture. While pushing the T drive arm
assembly in the direction of arrow B as shown, Ring roller a
insert the new threading roller into the grooves of
the ring rollers “b” and “c”.
10. While inserting the ring roller “a” into the Shaft
recessed portion of the threading ring assembly, Fig.-4
insert the ring roller “a” into the shaft. (Fig.-4)
11. Attach the stop washer 1.5 to the ring roller “a”. Tooth
12. Unlock the roller of the T drawer arm. root B
13. Confirm that the cam gear of the T drawer arm of
the T drive arm assembly is engaged correctly. Tooth A
(Fig.-5)
14. Attach the S arm assembly. (Refer to section 6-23.)
15. Confirm that the S arm assembly and the T
drawer arm work correctly when the threading
Cam gear Fig.-5
ring assembly is turned with hand.
16. Attach the gear box assembly. (Refer to section 6-12.)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-26
6-18. RING ROLLER REPLACEMENT
Note : When attaching/removing of threading

ring assembly, be careful not to touch
the peripheral tape guides, drum and Fig.-1 Dents Threading ring
capstan shaft. assembly
A
Removal
Ring roller a
Stop washers 1.5
2. Remove the S arm assembly. Ring roller c
(Refer to section 6-23.) Ring roller b
3. Revolve the cam gear in the direction of arrow D Stop washer 1.5
by hand until the roller block of the T drawer
arm is locked with the stepped portion of the cam Ring roller a
gear. (Fig.-2) A C Threading ring assembly
4. Revolve the threading ring with hand in the T drive arm assembly
direction of arrow A until the recessed portion
B
comes to “a” position of the ring roller. T drawer arm
(Refer to Fig.-1)
5. Remove the stop washer 1.5 of the ring roller “a”.
6. While lifting the threading ring slightly up in the D
direction of arrow C, remove the ring roller “a”.
7. While pressing the T drive arm assembly in the
direction of arrow B, remove the threading ring
Cam gear
assembly from the grooves of the ring rollers “b”
and “c”. (Fig.-3) T drawer arm
8. Remove the two stop washers 1.5 from the ring
roller “b” and “c”, and remove the ring roller.
Stepping
D portion
Attachment
Cam gear Roller
9. Put the new ring rollers b and c through the
shafts of threading ring, attach the two stop Fig.-2
washers 1.5 to them.
Treading ring
10. Assemble the parts by reversing the removal Treading ring Dents assembly
procedure of step 8. assembly
Ring roller a
11. While inserting the new ring roller “a” into the Ring roller b, c
recessed portion of the threading ring assembly,
insert the ring roller “a” into the shaft. (Fig.-4)
Groove
12. Attach the stop washer 1.5 to the ring roller “a”. Shaft
13. Unlock the roller of the T drawer arm. Fig.-3 Fig.-4
14. Confirm that the cam gear of the T drawer arm of
the T drive arm assembly is angaged correctly. Tooth
(Fig.-5) root B
15. Attach the S arm assembly. (Refer to section 6-23.)
Tooth A
16. Confirm that the S arm assembly and the T
drawer arm work correctly when the threading
ring assembly is turned with hand.
17. Attach the gear box assembly. Cam gear
Fig.-5
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-27
6-19. RING POSITION SENSOR REPLACEMENT
Mode
EJECT mode
Removal
2. Remove the S arm assembly.
Fixing screw
(Refer to section 6-23.) PWH 2.6x6
3. Remove the ring rollers and the threading ring Photo interrupter
assembly. (Refer to section 6-17.) CN223 CN220
4. Remove the four connectors (CN220, CN222 to CN222 CN224

CN224) on the PTC-84 board. Stop washer 1.5 PTC-84 board
5. Remove the fixing screw (PWH 2.6x6) on the Ring roller B Hole Threading ring
PTC-84 board. assembly
A
6. While lifting up the threading ring in the
direction of arrow A so that the shutter of the
threading ring is not caught by the PTC-84
board, remove the PTC-84 board in the direction
of the arrow B.
7. Remove the photo interrupter soldered on the
PTC-84 board.
Attachment
8. Connect the new photo interrupter to the PTC-84 Threading ring assembly
board by soldering.
9. Align the holes of the PTC-84 board with the
positioning pins of the MD chassis (at two Photo interrupter
positions), and fix the PTC-84 board with the
screw.
Shutter

11. Check the ring position sensor for correct
operation. (Refer to section 4.)
Positioning pin PTC-84 board
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-28
6-20. RS MOTOR ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
Removal
2. Remove the three screws (PWH 3x6) fixing the
bottom case to the MD chassis, remove the
bottom case in the direction of arrow.
3. Remove the connector (CN210) on the MS-43 MS-43 board
board. MB shield
4. While pulling the RS motor assembly in the case assembly
direction of arrow A remove the gear block in

the direction of arrow B.
Attachment
5. Insert the new RS motor assembly in the
direction as shown, and insert the protruded part
into the recessed part of the worm gear case
assembly. Attach the new RS motor assembly so
that the gear block “A” is engaged with the gear
Fixing screws
“B” block. PWH 3x6
Note : Confirm that the “C” surface of the Bottom case
motor is contacted to worm gear case
assembly tight.
6. Pass the harness through the worm gear case CN210 (MS-43 board) Recessed part
assembly and connect the 2-pin connector to the
MS-43 board (CN210). (Fig.-1) Protruded part
7. Attach the bottom case to MD chassis with three

fixing screws as shown by Fig.-2.
B A
Gear block A
Gear block B
Worm gear case assembly

Connector
Motor C surface Printed (2 pins)
RS motor assembly surface
Worm gear case assembly Worm gear case
Harness
Bottom case
Fig.-1 Fig.-2
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-29
6-21. WORM GEAR (REEL SHIFT) REPLACEMENT
Tools
Sony grease (SGL-601) : 7-651-000-10
Sony oil (NT-68) : 7-661-018-18
Removal
1. Remove the cassette memory terminal assembly.
(Refer to section 6-28.) Worm gear case assembly
2. Remove the reel block assembly.
3. Remove the RS motor assembly.
(Refer to section 6-20.) Protrusion
Fixing screw Fixing screw
4. Place the unit horizontally. PWH 2.6x6 PWH 2.6x6
5. Remove the two screws (PWH 2.6x6) fixing the
worm gear case assembly, and remove it.
Rib
Shaft
Worm wheel (S)
Hole b
Worm wheel (T)
Shaft
Rib
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-30
6. Remove the worm gear by pulling it out in the
order shown by arrows A and B from the worm
gear case assembly.
7. Remove the bearing, the bearing (S) and the two
polyslider washers from the worm gear.
Polyslider washer ø2
Shaft Bearing (S)
Grease B
Attachment Worm gear
8. Clean the new shaft of worm gear with the Shaft
Polyslider Oil
cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid. washer ø2
9. Apply a drop of oil to the shaft of the worm gear,
Oil
attach the bearing, the bearing (S) and the two Bearing A
polyslider washers to the shaft. Attach the
assembled new worm gear shaft into the worm Worm gear case
gear case assembly until they are set as shown in assembly
Fig.-1 and Fig.-2.
10. Coat then the area of 1 to 2 cm long in the center
Worm gear
of the worm gear with the grease. Claw
Bearing
11. Put the worm wheels (S) and (T) to the shaft and Claw
align the protrusions of the worm gear case
assembly to each rib, and attach the worm gear Bearing
case assembly. (Fig.-3)
Claw
Fig.-2

Bearing
13. Confirm that the worm wheel (S) and worm
wheel (T) are aligned with each protrusion of Fig.-1
worm gear case assembly. (Fig.-4)
Worm gear case assembly
Worm wheel (S) Worm wheel (T)
Rib Rib
Protrusion Protrusion
Shaft Shaft
Fig.-3
OK NG
Fig.-4
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-31
6-22. REEL POSITION SENSOR REPLACEMENT
Mode
PLAY state
Removal
1. Loosen the screw fixings the end sensor and the
top sensor by rotating it 1 to 2 turns respectively. Fixing screw End sensor holder
2. Release the lock by opening the two claws of the Top sensor holder
LED holder
LED holder of the LED assembly, press them
down. At this time, the connector on the PTC-87
board is removed from CN207 on the MS-43
board. (Fig.-1)
Fixing screw
Claw LED holder LED assembly LED holder
MS-43 board MD chassis
PTC-87
LED
board
assembly Connector Connector
Connector
Fig.-1
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-32
Capstan motor
bottom case to the MD chassis, and remove the
MS-43 board MB shield
case assembly
5. Remove the capstan motor.
6. Remove the flexible card wire (CN11 on the
RM-159 board in the case of S side, or CN15 on
the RM-160 board in the case of T side) which is
connected to the reel block.
7. Remove the two flexible card wires (CN203,
CN206) which are connected to the MS-43
board.
8. Remove the three flexible card wires (CN201, PWH 3x6
CN202, CN208) and three harnesses (CN210, Bottom case

CN211, CN221) which are connected to the MS- Flexible card wire
43 board. T reel
9. Remove the connectors of the top sensor holder
and the end sensor holder from CN212 and
CN205 on the MS-43 board. CN11
10. Remove the five screws (PWH 2.6x6) fixing the RM-159 board
MS-43 board to the MD chassis, and remove the

MS-43 board.
S reel
11. Remove soldering of the two diodes and two
RM-160 board
photo transistors on the MS-43 board. Release CN15
the four claws of the RS sensor holder. Remove Flexible card wire
them altogether.
12. Remove the two diodes and two photo transistors
from the holders respectively. (Fig.-2) MS-43 board CN212 CN211 CN202 CN203
PWH
2.6x6
Attachment
13. Insert the four claws of the RS sensor holders PWH
CN208 2.6x6
into the holes of the MS-43 board.
14. Insert the new diodes and new photo transistors CN210
into the holders respectively and solder them on PWH CN201
the MS-43 board. 2.6x6
PWH
15. Attach the disassembled parts by reversing the CN206 2.6x6
removal procedure from steps 10 to 1. CN211
CN205 Harness
PWH
2.6x6 Flexible card wire
Fig.-2
Claw RS sensor holder
Diode
Photo transistors
MS-43 board Claw Diode
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-33
6-23. S ARM ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
Mode
EJECT mode
Tools
Sony grease (SGL-601) : 7-651-000-10
Fixing screw Shaft

Removal PSW 2.6x6
1. Remove the connector (CN31) of the S arm S arm assembly
assembly. Connector Tape guide
(5P)
Note : Do not apply force to the arm block of Arm block
the S arm assembly.
CN31 Hole a
2. Remove the two screws (PWH 2.6x6) securing
the S arm assembly to the MD chassis, and Fixing screw
remove the S arm assembly. PSW 2.6x6
Tape end sensor Gear block

Hole a
Attachment
3. Coat the gear block of the new S arm assembly Shaft
with grease, and align the gear block with the

mark of the S drawer gear. Align the shaft and
two holes “a” of the new S arm assembly with
the hole “b”and the positioning pins of the MD
chassis. Fix the S arm assembly with two
screws. (Fig.-1)
4. Connect the 5-pin connector of the end sensor to MD chassis Hole b
S drawer gear
CN31 of the S arm assembly. Positioning pin Positioning pin
5. Clean the three tape guides with the cleaning Gear block
Grease S drawer gear
cloth moistened with the cleaning fluid.

6. Perform the FWD/REV Back Tension
Adjustment.
Marks
(Refer to section 7-2.) Fig.-1
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-34
6-23-1. FWD/REV Back Tension Adjustment
Mode
PLAY mode
Tool
DV torque cassette : J-6082-373-A
Preparation
Connect a video monitor to the VIDEO OUTPUT2 connector and
show characters on screen.
1. Remove the cassette compartment.

2. Turn on the main power and press the [EJECT] key.
Note : Be careful that the cassette compartment
connection cable must not be shorted when the
main power is turned back on.
3. Show “MAINTENANCE MENU” on monitor display.

4. Select the item “SERVO ADJUST” using the [(], [)] keys.
5. Press the [*] key to show the next display.
6. Select the item “TENSION” among the servo adjustment using

the [(], [)] keys.
7. Press the [*] key to show the next display.
8. When preparation is complete, press the [YES] key to start

adjustment.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-35
9. Insert the DV torque cassette. Place a weight of about 300 g
and press the [STOP] key.
10. When tape threading is complete, the unit enters the SEARCH
mode automatically, then the PLAY mode.
11. Keep pressing the [(], [)] keys to make adjustment until the
DV torque cassette indicates 16.9 ± 2 g.cm.
12. When the adjustment is complete, press the [*] key.
13. Keep pressing the [(], [)] keys in the same way to make
adjustment until the DV torque cassette indicates
35.3 ± 2 g.cm.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-36
14. When the adjustment is complete, press the [*] key.
15. Confirm that the DV torque cassette indicates 21.8 ± 3 g.cm.
16. Press the [*] key to enter the next display.
(Unit enters the REV mode automatically.)
17. Adjust the REV holdback tension until 24.4 ± 2 g.cm is

obtained by pressing the [(], [)] keys.
18. Press the [*] key to enter the next display.
19. Press the [EJECT] key to remove a DV torque cassette.
20. Confirm that the “COMPLETE” message appears on screen.
. When adjustment is complete, turn on the main power and attach

the cassette compartment.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-37
6-24. GUIDE ROLLER ASSEMBLY (TG-1) REPLACEMENT
Tools
Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01 Top flange Top
a
Guide roller assembly
b
Removal Bottom flange Bottom
1. Remove the top flange by turning it in the a>b
Compression coil spring Fig.-1
direction of arrow.
Note : Do not turn the fixing screw which is Shaft
painted by screw locking compound. S arm base assembly
2. Remove the guide roller assembly.
coil spring.
Attachment
4. Clean outside of the shaft of the S arm base
assembly with the cleaning cloth moistened with S arm assembly
cleaning fluid.
5. Insert the compression coil spring and the bottom
flange into the shaft.
6. Insert the new guide roller assembly into the
shaft in the direction as shown.
7. Revolve the top flange to attach it to the shaft.
8. Clean the guide roller assembly, top flange and
bottom flange with a cleaning cloth moistened

DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-38
Tools
Top
Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01 Top flange
a
Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01 Guide roller
assembly
b
Removal Bottom
Bottom flange
a>b
1. Remove the top flange by turning it in the
Compression
direction of arrow. coil spring Fig.-1
Note : Do not turn the fixing screw which is Shaft (cleaning)
painted by screw locking compound.
2. Remove the guide roller assembly.
coil spring.
Attachment
S drawer arm
4. Clean outside of the shaft of the S drawer arm
assembly with the cleaning cloth moistened with S arm assembly
cleaning fluid.
7. Revolve the top flange to attach it to the shaft.
8. Clean the guide roller assembly, top flange and

Note : Be careful not to apply force to the S

drawer arm during removal and
attachment works. The external force to
the S drawer arm can give adverse effect
on the perpendicularity of the arm which
causes the tape path adjustment error.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-39
6-26. TR ROLLER ASSEMBLY (TG-3) REPLACEMENT
Tools
Tape guide adjustment driver : J-6441-560-A Fixing screw (P 1.4x2.5)
Top
Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01 Top flange a
TR roller assembly
Thickness gauge : 9-911-053-00 b
Bottom
Bottom flange
a>b
Removal
Compression coil spring Fig.-1
1. Loosen the fixing screw as shown by revolving it
1 to 2 turns. Shaft (cleaning)
2. Remove the top flange by turning it in the
direction of arrow.
3. Remove the TR roller assembly.
coil spring.
Tension regulator arm assembly
Attachment
5. Clean outside of the shaft of the S tension S arm assembly
regulator arm assembly with the cleaning cloth
moistened with cleaning fluid. Specification : A=1.7 mm
Thickness gauge Top flange
7. Insert the new TR roller assembly into the shaft TR roller
in the direction as shown. assembly
8. Revolve the top flange until the clearance A Bottom flange
between the tension regulator arm assembly and
the bottom flange satisfies the specification, and Tension regulator arm assembly
fix the top flange to the shaft. (Fig.-2)
9. Clean the TR roller assembly, top flange and Fig.-2

Note : Be careful not to apply force to the

tension regulator arm assembly during
removal and attachment works. The
external force to the tension regulator
arm assembly can give adverse effect on
the perpendicularity of the tension
regulator arm assembly which causes the
tape path adjustment error.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-40
Tools
Tape guide adjustment driver : J-6441-560-A TG-6 top flange
Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01 Top
Guide roller assembly a
TR-6 bottom flange
b
Removal Bottom
Compression coil spring a>b
1. Remove the top flange of TG-6 by revolving it
by turning it in the direction of arrow. Shaft Fig.-1
Note : Do not turn the fixing screw which is
painted by screw locking compound.
2. Remove the guide roller assembly. TG-6 assembly

3. Remove the TG-6 lower flange and the
compression coil spring.
Attachment
4. Clean outside of the shaft of the TG-6 assembly
with the cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning
fluid.
5. Insert the compression coil spring and the TG-6
bottom flange into the shaft.
7. Attach the TG-6 top flange to the guide roller
assembly. Revolve the top flange until it stops to
attach the top flange to the shaft.
8. Clean the guide roller assembly, TG-6 top flange
and TG-6 bottom flange with a cleaning cloth
moistened with cleaning fluid.

DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-41
6-28. CASSETTE MEMORY
Flexible card wire
TERMINAL REPLACEMENT
T reel assembly
CN208
Tools
Sony grease (SGL-601) : 7-651-000-10
Removal
bottom case to the MD chassis, and remove the
3. Remove the flexible card wire of the cassette
MB shield
memory terminal assembly from CN208 on the case assembly
MS-43 board.
Fixing screws
Bottom case PWH 3x6
MS-43 board

5. Remove the return spring of the worm gear case Grease Shaft b
assembly from the shaft of the cassette memory
terminal assembly.
area
6. Remove the stop washer 2.3 from the shaft “a”
of the MD chassis, and remove the cassette
memory terminal assembly. Fig.-1 Shaft a
Shaft
Attachment
7. Coat the oblique line area of the new cassette Stop washer 2.3
memory terminal with grease. (Fig.-1)
8. While inserting the cassette memory terminal Cassette memory
assembly into the shaft “a” of the MD chassis, terminal assembly
Dents
insert the crank arm assembly (T) axis into the
recessed portion. Attach the cassette memory
terminal assembly so that the assembly is
positioned in relation to shafts “a” and “b” as
shown.
9. Fix the cassette memory terminal assembly with
the stop washer 2.3.
10. Hook the return spring as shown.
11. Attach the disassembled parts by reversing the Shaft a
Worm gear case
assembly
Crank arm (T) shaft
Return spring
Shaft b
Shaft a
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-42
6-29. HEAD CLEANER ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
Note : Be careful not to give any scars to the guide rollers in the vicinity the drum when removing the HC solenoid
assembly or the head cleaner assembly.
Removal
1. Remove the connector (3 pins) CN222 from the
PTC-84 board on the MD chassis. PWH 2.6x6
2. Release the rock of solenoid slider claw and A

move the solenoid slider in the direction of arrow
HC solenoid assembly
C.
PWH 2.6x6
3. Remove the three screws (PWH 2.6x6) securing
the HC solenoid assembly, and remove the HC
solenoid assembly in the direction of arrow A.
4. Remove the stop washer 1.5 from the shaft of the Shaft
MD chassis, and remove the head cleaner Claw C Solenoid

assembly in the direction of arrow B. Connector 3P
slider
Hole B
Hole Head cleaner
Attachment
assembly
5. While passing the lapping tape portion of the
new head cleaner assembly in between the guide
Hole Lapping tape
roller (TG-4) and the drum assembly, insert the portion
new head cleaner into the shaft of the MD Stop
chassis. Then pass the HC base stopper through washer
the hole.
Guide roller
Note : Be careful that the lapping tape is not (TG-4)
HC base stopper Positioning pin
caught by the drum or the guide Positioning pin
rollers. CN222
Shaft PTC-84 board
6. Attach the stop washer 1.5 to the head cleaner
assembly.
MD Chassis Drum assembly
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-43
Check After Replacement
Mode
Establish the mechanical state in which the lapping
tape portion of the new head cleaner assembly is Solenoid limiter arm
pressed against the drum. Solenoid base Iron core Solenoid

assembly
Fixing screw
8. Confirm that the specification is satisfied when
the iron core of the solenoid is energized.

9. Loosen slightly the two screws fixing the
solenoid spacer. Solenoid
Claw
10. Insert the flat head (_) screwdriver into the spacer
Fixing screw
adjustment hole of the solenoid spacer. Make A
Adjustment
Solenoid drive B Pin hole
adjustment by turning the screwdriver until the
arm assembly
position of the solenoid limiter arm satisfies the
Specification : Clearance must be secured in
specification. between A and B.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
6-44
DSR-80 / 80P
6-30. FAN MOTOR REPLACEMENT
Tools
Screw locking compound : 7-432-114-11 MB-712 board
(Three Bond-1401B)
Rear panel
From the
assembly Square hole
SDI-26 board
Removal
BVTT
1. Remove the seven screws (BVTT 3x6) securing 3x6
From the
Orange
SDI-27 board
the rear panel assembly, and remove the rear Yellow
Hook
panel assembly. Green
Blue
2. Remove the two connectors (orange, yellow) Black
from the SDI-26 board, the two connectors Red CN609
(green, blue) from the SDI-27 board and the two B 3x30
BVTT 3x6
connectors (black, red) from the SDI-28 board. From the
SDI-28 board Fan motor
3. Remove the 3-pin connector coming from the fan BVTT 3x6
motor, on CN609 on the MB-712 board. BVTT 3x6
4. Remove the two fixing screws (B 3x30) and
remove the fan motor.
Attachment
5. Attach the new fan motor to the chassis with two
fixing screws. Apply the screw locking
compound.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 6-45
SECTION 7
TAPE PATH ADJUSTMENT
Tape path adjustment is very important adjustment to run tape under the optimum conditions for tape.
If this adjustment is not performed correctly, tape can be damaged.
Perform this adjustment with utmost attention.
Perform this adjustment after cassette compartment is removed from VTR.
7-1. GENERAL INFORMATION FOR TAPE PATH ADJUSTMENT
1. Alignment tape
The following alignment tapes are necessary for
tape path adjustment. Torque driver
. XH2-1AST (Standard cassette) : 8-967-999-02
. XH5-1A (Standard cassette) : 8-967-999-21
(NTSC)
. XH5-1AP (Standard cassette) : 8-967-999-25
(PAL)
2. Tape guide adjustment driver
0
The following tape guide adjustment driver
which is available as the Sony service tool is
necessary for height adjustment of TG-1, TG-2
and TG-6. When tape guide height adjustment is
completed, tighten the fixing screw on the top Hexagon bit
flange of tape guides using the torque driver as Tape guide

shown in the following procedure. adjustment driver
. Tape guide adjustment driver : J-6440-850-A
. Torque driver : J-6325-400-A Holder block
Tightening torque : 0.06 to 0.07 N.m
(0.6 to 0.7 kgf.cm)
1) Set a torque driver to the hexagon bit on top
Fixing screw
of the tape guide adjustment driver.
2) Set the tape guide adjustment driver to the Top flange
top flange of tape guide. While grasping the Tape guide
holder block with hand so as not turn the top
Bottom flange
flange, turn the torque driver to tighten the
fixing screw.
3. Height of TG-3 must be adjusted using the
following nutdriver (width across flat 4.5 mm).
Height of TG-4 and TG-5 must be adjusted using
the following nutdriver (width across flat 4.5
mm) in the same way.
. Nutdriver : 7-700-751-01
(width across flat 4.5 mm)
4. Cassette compartment
Perform the tape path adjustment after cassette
compartment is removed from VTR. When a
cassette is set on the VTR, place a weight (about
300 g) on a cassette so that a cassette is securely
fixed in position.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 7-1
5. Selecting the servo mode
(1) Select the servo mode “ITI CENTER” by S101
setting the switches S201-1 and S101-5 on
the SV-184 board to ON position when using S201
the tracking alignment tape (XH2-1AST).
(The servo loop will not lock in at the OFF SV-184 board
position.) 16
ON
01
*
This unit does not have the tracking shift S1 OF
F
function. Instead of having the tracking 2

01 8 15
S2
shift function, the tracking alignment tape 2 8
XH2-1AST has already been recorded in 5
1
4 ON
the factory so that the servo is locked at -18 OF
F 7
1
SV 1 4
50 % off-track automatically.
(2) Select the servo mode “ITI NORMAL” by 1
setting the switches S201-1 and S101-5 on

the SV-184 board to OFF position when
using the tracking alignment tape (XH5-1A,
XH5-1AP).
(3) When all items of tape path adjustment are
completed, be sure to confirm that the
switches S201-1 and S101-5 on the SV-184
board is set to OFF position.
6. RF switching position preliminary adjustment
When the RF switching position is greatly
mistaken in such occasion as head drum
replacement, there can be a case that the servo
does not lock. In such a case, firstly perform
section “7-4. TAPE PATH ADJUSTMENT
(CHECKING AMOUNT OF TAPE CONTACT
WITH TOP FLANGES AT ENTRANCE
SIDE)”. Secondly perform section “7-6. RF
SWITCHING POSITION ADJUSTMENT”.
Then perform section “7-5. TAPE PATH
ADJUSTMENT (TAPE PATH FINE
ADJUSTMENTS AT ENTRANCE AND EXIT
SIDES). After that, check the switching position
again.
7. Preparation of tape path adjustment
(1) Set the switches S201-1 and S101-5 on the [RESET] ([NO]) key
SV-184 board to ON position. [(] key
(2) Clean the tape running surface of tape guides,
head drum and video head using the cleaning [MENU] key
cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01 MENU panel
(3) Use a remote controller unit (DSRM-10,
SVRM-100) or remote controller (RM-450 or [&] key [)] key
equivalent) to enter the SHUTTLE mode.
[*] key
[SET] ([YES]) key
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
7-2
8. Tape guide locations
The tape guides which are referred to in the adjustment items are located as shown below.
TG 3 TG 9 Tape cleaner TG 5 TG 4 TG 10
TG 6
Capstan Head drum
TG 8
T drawer arm
Pinch roller
TG 7
(Preceding roller)
TG 2 TG 11
TG 1
TG 12
Mini cassette
Standard cassette
S reel T reel
9. Tape running condition
Preceding roller
Capstan shaft (TG-7)
TG-1 TG-2 TG-3 TG-4 Head drum TG-5 TG-6 TG-8 TG-9 TG-10 TG-11 TG-12
The hatched areas (marked by /////) are contacting with tape or pressing tape.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 7-3
10. Measurement points and signals for adjustment
Signal Name Board Name TP terminal

(Address)
RF (the signal after envelope detection) DSR-60/60P : RP-103 TP104 (D-1)

OUTPUT DSR-80/80P : RP-101 TP302 (D-1)
SW PULSE OUTPUT SV-184 DSR-60/60P : TP207 (F-1)
DSR-80/80P: TP208 (F-1)
GND FRAME DSR-60/60P
TP104
RP-103 board
3
-10
RP
DSR-80/80P
TP302
RP-101 board
1
-10
RP
SV-184 board
DSR-80/80P 01 16
S1
: TP208
081 2
DSR-60/60P S2 15
: TP207 2
1
7
1
207
TP
4
-18
SV
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
7-4
7-2. TAPE PATH CHECK
Required tools
Alignment tape XH2-1AST : 8-967-999-02
Dual trace oscilloscope
Check procedure
CH-1 : DSR-60/60P TP104/RP-103 board (D-1)
max
DSR-80/80P TP302/RP-101 board (D-1)
CH-2 : TP207/SV-184 board (F-1) 4/5 Div

TRIG : CH-2
2. Set the alignment cassette XH2-1AST (standard min 3 Div
cassette) on the VTR and place a weight on a
cassette so that a cassette is securely fixed in
position.
3. Enter the PLAY mode.
4. Adjust the Variable VOLTS/DIV control of an [x1]
oscilloscope so that the maximum amplitude of 4
the RF waveform becomes the three DIVISIONs Specification: max vs min < Div
5
sharp on an oscilloscope.
5. Measure the minimum amplitude of the RF
waveform and confirm that the amplitude
difference between the maximum and the
minimum portions of the RF waveform satisfies
the specification.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 7-5
6. Enter the PLAY mode and confirm that tape curl
at the respective tape guides satisfies the Top flange Tape
specification. B
TG-3 top flange
. Specification of tape curl amount
B 1
(1) The tape curl amount at the top flanges of Specification : <
A A 20
TG-3, TG-4 and TG-5 must satisfies the
TG-4 and TG-5 top flange
specification. Curl
B 1
(2) There must be no tape curl at TG-1’s bottom Specification : <
A 30
flange, TG-6’s top flange and drum rabbet
guide (both entrance and exit).
Tape running condition
Preceding roller
Capstan shaft (TG-7)
TG-1 TG-2 TG-3 TG-4 Head drum TG-5 TG-6 TG-8 TG-9 TG-10 TG-11 TG-12
The hatched areas (marked by /////) are contacting with tape or pressing tape.
. Tape path at TG-2

There must be clearance between tape edge
and top flange, and between that and bottom A
B C
flange when tape runs at TG-2.
B C
7. The RF waveform must satisfy the specification Specification : < 90 %
A, A
during FF and REW modes.
8. Enter the FF and REW modes and confirm that

tape curl at the respective tape guides satisfies Top flange Tape
the specification. B
. Specification of tape curl amount TG-3 top flange
(1) The tape curl amount at the top flanges of B 1
Specification : <
A A 20
TG-3, TG-4 and TG-5 must satisfies the
TG-4 and TG-5 top flange
specification. Curl
(2) There must be no tape curl at TG-1’s bottom B 1
Specification : <
A 30
flange, TG-6’s top flange and drum rabbet
guide (both entrance and exit).
9. If the specifications shown in steps 4 to 8 are not
satisfied, perform sections “7-3. TAPE PATH
ADJUSTMENT (CHECKING AMOUNT OF
TAPE CONTACT WITH TOP FLANGES AT
EXIT SIDE)” and “7-4. TAPE PATH
ADJUSTMENT (CHECKING AMOUNT OF
TAPE CONTACT WITH TOP FLANGES AT
ENTRANCE SIDE)”.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
7-6
7-3. TAPE PATH ADJUSTMENT
(CHECKING AMOUNT OF TAPE CONTACT WITH TOP FLANGES AT EXIT SIDE)
Required tools
Dental mirror : J-6080-029-A
Nutdriver (width across flat 4.5 mm) : 7-700-751-01
Check procedure
1. Connect an oscilloscope as follows:
CH-1 : DSR-60/60P TP104/RP-103 board (D-1) TG-6 TG-5
DSR-80/80P TP302/RP-101 board (D-1) B A
Head drum
CH-2 : TP207/SV-184 board (F-1)
TRIG : CH-2
2. Set the alignment cassette XH2-1AST (standard C
cassette) on the VTR and place a weight on a cassette
so that a cassette is securely fixed in position. Fig.-1
4. Confirm that there are clearances between tape Amount of tape contact at exit
edge and top flange (“A” portion) of TG-5, and
between that and top and bottom flanges of to
TG-6. (“B” and “C” portions) (Fig.-1)
5. Confirm that the amount of tape contact at exit is Two peaks Three peaks
in the specification. (Fig.-2)
< If the specification is not satisfied > (Fig.-3) <Amount of tape contact at exit>
a) When the amount of tape contact is smaller Specification : Numbers of peaks are two or three when there
(when numbers of peak are smaller than are clearances between tape and TG-5’s top
specification) flange, and between tape and top and bottom
flanges of TG-6.
Turn the AZ screw of TG-6 counter-
clockwise. Fig.-2
Confirm that there are clearances at “A” and
“B” of TG-5 and TG-6.
b) When the amount of tape contact is too much
(when numbers of peak are more than
specification) AZ screw
Turn the AZ screw of TG-6 counter-
clockwise.
Confirm that there are clearances at “C” of Fixing screw
AO screw
TG-6.
TG-6
Note : Start counting the numbers of peak
after the tape run is fully stabilized. Fig.-3
6. Turn the top flange of TG-6 clockwise until the

RF waveform becomes the waveform as shown
in Fig.-4.
Q = 90 to 100 %
7. Tighten the fixing screw of TG-6 lightly.
Note : Never press TG-6 downward strongly. Fig.-4
8. Press [EJECT] key and remove the weight of

cassette and alignment tape.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 7-7
(CHECKING AMOUNT OF TAPE CONTACT WITH TOP FLANGES AT ENTRANCE SIDE)
Required tools
Dental mirror : J-6080-029-A
Check procedure
CH-2 : TP207/SV-184 board (F-1)
TRIG : CH-2
2. Set the alignment cassette XH2-1AST (standard cassette) on the VTR and place a weight on a cassette so that a cassette
is securely fixed in position.
3. Enter the PLAY mode. If the tape in VTR is not at the tape top, rewind the tape to the tape top.
*
Tape top is the area which is 7 minutes or less from the tape top of a reel.
Note : Perform rewinding a tape before creating a clearance at the top flange (E and G portions) of TG-3 and
TG-4. If a tape is rewound after a clearance is created, tape will not be wound around a reel with its bottom
edge contacting the reel hub. It results that the correct numbers of peak cannot be obtained in the
waveform.
4. Confirm that there are clearances between tape

edge and top flange (“G” portion) of TG-4, and
between that and top and bottom flanges of TG-
1. TG-2 and TG-3. (“A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “E”
and “F” portions) (Fig.-1)
Head drum
5. Confirm that the amount of tape contact at TG-1 TG-2 TG-3 TG-4
A C E G
entrance is in the specification. (Fig.-2)
< If the specification is satisfied >
Turn the TG-1’s top flange counter-clockwise
until numbers of peak increase by 0.5 peaks (half
B DF
peak). Then tighten the fixing screw to fix the
top flange.
Fig.-1
< If the specification is not satisfied >
a) When the amount of tape contact is smaller
Amount of tape contact at exit
(when numbers of peak are smaller than
specification)
to
1) Turn the top flange of TG-1 counter-
clockwise until tape is raised by the
Three peaks Five peaks
bottom flange. When numbers of peak
become 3 to 4 peaks, fix the top flange.
2) Confirm that there are clearances at “C”, “D”, <Amount of tape contact at entrance>
“E” and “G” of TG-2, TG-3 and TG-4. Specification : Numbers of peaks are three to five when there
b) When the amount of tape contact is too much are clearances between tape edge and top flange
(when numbers of peak are more than (“G” portion) of TG-4, and between that and top
specification) and bottom flanges of TG-1, TG-2 and TG-3.
Confirm that tape is wound around a reel
Fig.-2
with its bottom edge contacting the reel hub.
Confirm also that the tape top is used.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
7-8
Note : When numbers of peaks are too
much, confirm that TG-1 and TG-2
are rotating. Check also that tape is
not pushed by the TG-1’s lower
flange excessively.
6. Turn the height adjustment nut of TG-3 until the

RF waveform becomes the waveform as shown TG-3 height adjustment nut
in Fig.-4. Confirm that the tape contacts to the
top flange of TG-3 at “E”, and the same time,
comfirm that there are clearances at “C” and “D”
of TG-2. When there is no clearance, adjust
height of TG-2 flange.
7. Press [EJECT] key and remove the weight of

cassette and alignment tape.
Fig.-3
Q = 90 to 100 %
Fig.-4
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 7-9
(TAPE PATH FINE ADJUSTMENTS AT ENTRANCE AND EXIT SIDES)
Required tools
Check procedure
CH-2 : TP207/SV-184 board (F-1)

TRIG : CH-2
2. Set the alignment cassette XH2-1AST (standard
cassette) on the VTR and place a weight on a
cassette so that a cassette is securely fixed in
position.
4. Adjust the Variable VOLTS/DIV control of an
oscilloscope so that the maximum amplitude of max
the RF waveform becomes the three DIVISIONS
sharp on an oscilloscope.
3 Div
5. Turn the TG-3 height adjustment nut and TG-6

top flange counter-clockwise once so that the top Peak of waveform
flanges are clear of tape, then turn them
clockwise until the RF waveform shown in
Fig.-1 is obtained.
Repeat the operation from STOP → PLAY
several times and confirm that the waveform
shown in Fig.-1 is obtained always. Then fix the
TG-6 top flange. 5 Div
Note : . Do not press TG-6 strongly

downward when fixing it.
. End the TG-3 and TG-6
adjustments with clockwise
Fig.-1
rotation. (Do not end the
adjustment with counter-clockwise
rotation.)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
7-10
6. Turn the TG-4 top flange clockwise until the RF
waveform shown in Fig.-2 (entrance side) is
obtained.
Confirm that the tape curl at entrance side (TG-1,
TG-3, TG-4 and drum rabbet guide) satisfies the
specification.
Notes : . Tape path adjustment are normally

performed using the standard tape.
When a mini-cassette is used for
adjustment, clearance can occur
between tape and bottom flange of
TG-1 which is not an abnormal.
. End the TG-4 adjustment with
clockwise rotation. (Do not end the
rotation.)
7. Turn the TG-5 top flange clockwise until the RF

waveform shown in Fig.-2 (exit side) is obtained.
Confirm that tape curl at exit side (TG-5, TG-6 max
and drum rabbet guide) satisfies the

specification.
min 3 Div
Note : End the TG-5 adjustment with
clockwise rotation. (Do not end the
rotation.)
[x1]
4
Specification : max vs min < Div
5
Fig.-2
Specification of tape curl
. TG-1 bottom flange, TG-6 top flange and drum

rabbet guide (entrance and exit)
Specification : There must be no tape curl.
. TG-3 top flange

1
Specification : of tape width or less
20
. TG-4 and TG-5 top flanges

1
Specification : of tape width or less
30
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 7-11
7-6. RF SWITCHING POSITION ADJUSTMENT
Be sure to perform the RF switching position adjustment whenever the TAPE PASS ADJUSTMENT (refer to section 7-2)
is performed.
This adjustment can be performed by the AUTO adjustment procedure and the MANUAL adjustment procedure.
Perform the AUTO adjustment first. If the RF switching position adjustment cannot be completed by the AUTO
adjustment, perform the MANUAL adjustment.
Preparation
Connect the video monitor to the VIDEO OUTPUT 2 connector on the rear panel to show the characters on the display.
Tools
Alignment tape, XH5-1A : 8-967-999-21 (NTSC)
XH5-1AP : 8-967-999-25 (PAL)
[AUTO Adjustment]
1. Show the maintenance menu on the monitor screen.
(1) While pressing the [&] key on the sub control panel, press
the [MENU] key to show the maintenance menu.
2. Press the [(], [)] keys and select “SERVO ADJUST”.
3. Press the [*] key to show the display 1.

4. Press the [(], [)] keys and select “RF SWITCHING
POSITION”.

6. Press the [(], [)] keys and select “AUTO”.
. If you cannot proceed to the next step, perform the

MANUAL adjustment. 2
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
7-12
7. Press the [*] key to show the display 3 “START OK?”.
8. Press the [YES] key.
9. Playback the alignment tape XH5-1A. (display 4)

Then the unit starts the RF switching position automatic
adjustment. (display 5)
10. When the adjustment is complete, the display 6

“COMPLETE” appears.
Note : When the display “ADJUST INCOMPLETE”

appear on the monitor screen, check that the 6
alignment which is played back is XH5-1A.
11. When the adjustment is complete, the alignment tape is

automatically ejected.
12. Press the [&] key twice and the monitor screen returns to the
display 1.
13. Select “SAVE ADJUSTING DATA” of the “SAVE/LOAD
CONTROL” and press the [YES] key to save the adjustment
data.
14. Press the [MENU] key to return to the maintenance menu.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 7-13
[MANUAL Adjustment]
CH-2 : TP207/SV-184 board (F-1)
TRIG : CH-2
2. Show the maintenance menu on the monitor screen.

(1) While pressing the [&] key on the sub control panel, press
the [MENU] key to show the maintenance menu.
3. Press the [(], [)] keys and select “SERVO ADJUST”.

5. Press the [(], [)] keys and select “RF SWITCHING
POSITION”.

7. Press the [(], [)] keys and select “X1 MANUAL”.
8. Press the [*] key to show the display 3 “START OK?”.

9. Press the [YES] key.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
7-14
10. Playback the alignment tape XH5-1A.
Then the unit starts the RF switching position automatic
adjustment.
11. Press the [(], [)] keys until the RF switching position satisfies
the specification.
Specification X1 : FFE7 to 0019 (center: 0000)
Note : When the displayed data does not change or does

not stabilize, perform adjustment using [(][(], [)]
keys until the specification is satisfied.
DSR-60/60P
12. Press the [*] key, and perform “ (OCH) ” adjustment in the DSR-60/60P
same manner as step 11. : TP104
*
For DSR-80/80P, step 12 is unnecessary. DSR-80/80P
: TP302
DSR-60/60P
: TP207 ECH
DSR-80/80P
: TP208 A
DSR-60/60P
: TP207 OCH
Specification X1 : A = 55 ± 10 us

14. When the adjustment is complete, the display 6
“COMPLETE” appears.
15. When the adjustment is complete, the alignment tape is
automatically ejected. 6
16. Press the [&] key twice and the monitor screen returns to the
display 1.
17. Select “SAVE ADJUSTING DATA” of the “SAVE/LOAD
CONTROL” and press the [YES] key to save the adjustment
data.
18. Press the [MENU] key to return to the maintenance menu.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 7-15
SECTION 8
ELECTRICAL ALIGNMENT OVERVIEW (for NTSC)
8-1. ADJUSTMENT PARTS (for NTSC)
DSR-80 RV306 G DC ................................................... 10-21 (N)

DV-15 RV308 S-Y LEVEL .......................................... 10-8 (N)
RV309 R-Y DL ............................................... 10-15 (N)
RV201 SPCK ERR ........................................... 10-1 (N) RV310 B-Y DL ............................................... 10-15 (N)
RV311 VIDEO 1 LEVEL ................................. 10-8 (N)
RV312 B BAL ................................................ 10-22 (N)
DSR-60 RV313 R BAL ................................................ 10-24 (N)
DV-17 RV314 B LEVEL ............................................ 10-22 (N)
RV315 R LEVEL ............................................ 10-24 (N)
RV401 CH1 Output Level ................................ 10-2 (N) RV316 R DC ................................................... 10-25 (N)
RV501 CH2 Output Level ................................ 10-2 (N) RV317 B DC ................................................... 10-23 (N)
RV601 CH3 Output Level ................................ 10-2 (N) RV318 S-C LEVEL ........................................ 10-13 (N)
RV701 CH4 Output Level ................................ 10-2 (N) RV319 VIDEO 2 LEVEL ................................. 10-9 (N)
RV501 SYNC PHASE .................................... 10-19 (N)
RV502 UV OFFSET ....................................... 10-11 (N)
DSR-80 RV503 HUE .................................................... 10-11 (N)
DA-119 RV504 INT SC ................................................ 10-16 (N)
RV505 REF. SYNC LEVEL .......................... 10-19 (N)
RV601 CH1 Output Level ................................ 10-2 (N) RV506 REF. BST LEVEL .............................. 10-19 (N)
RV701 CH2 Output Level ................................ 10-2 (N) RV601 1ST FLD ............................................. 10-17 (N)
RV801 CH3 Output Level ................................ 10-2 (N)
RV901 CH4 Output Level ................................ 10-2 (N) DSR-80
CT1001 SC ERR .............................................. 10-26 (N)
RV701 B/B-Y LEVEL .................................... 10-33 (N)
DSR-60/80 RV702 R/R-Y LEVEL .................................... 10-33 (N)
IO-149B/149 RV703 G/Y LEVEL ........................................ 10-33 (N)
RV704 AD CPST LEVEL .............................. 10-30 (N)
CT601 HCK ...................................................... 10-5 (N) RV901 DEC Y LEVEL ................................... 10-31 (N)
CT602 INT SC .................................................. 10-5 (N) RV902 DEC C/C LEVEL ............................... 10-32 (N)
RV102 Y/C DL ............................................... 10-14 (N) RV903 DEC C LEVEL ................................... 10-32 (N)
RV103 C/C DL ............................................... 10-13 (N) RV904 AD Y LEVEL ..................................... 10-28 (N)
RV104 C SETUP .............................................. 10-7 (N) RV905 CPST B-Y DL .................................... 10-34 (N)
RV105 C LEVEL .............................................. 10-6 (N) RV906 S B-Y DL ............................................ 10-36 (N)
RV106 V LEVEL .............................................. 10-6 (N) RV907 CPNT B-Y DL .................................... 10-35 (N)
RV107 C/C LEVEL .......................................... 10-7 (N) RV908 RGB B-Y DY ..................................... 10-37 (N)
RV108 ENC B-Y BAL ................................... 10-10 (N) RV909 CPST R-Y DL .................................... 10-34 (N)
RV109 BNC R-Y BAL ................................... 10-10 (N) RV910 S R-Y DL ............................................ 10-36 (N)
RV110 ENC R-Y LEVEL ............................... 10-12 (N) RV911 CPNT R-Y DL .................................... 10-35 (N)
RV111 ENC B-Y LEVEL ............................... 10-12 (N) RV912 RGB R-Y DL ...................................... 10-37 (N)
RV112 ENC BST LEVEL .............................. 10-12 (N) RV913 AD B-Y LEVEL ................................. 10-29 (N)
RV301 S/CAV SYNC ....................................... 10-6 (N) RV914 AD R-Y LEVEL ................................. 10-29 (N)
RV302 G BAL ................................................ 10-20 (N) RV915 Y CLP LEVEL ................................... 10-27 (N)
RV303 G LEVEL ............................................ 10-20 (N) RV1001 BST DL .............................................. 10-26 (N)
RV304 V SYNC ..................................... 10-8, 10-20 (N) RV1002 4W REC PHASE ................................ 10-39 (N)
RV305 Y BAL ................................................ 10-20 (N) RV1004 SCH .................................................... 10-38 (N)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 8-1 (N)

DSR-60/80
SY-241B/241
CV101 CHARA SIZE ....................................... 10-1 (N)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
8-2 (N)
8-2. MEASURING EQUIPMENT FOR ADJUSTMENT (for NTSC)
Type of measuring equipment Equivalent Remarks

Oscilloscope Tektronix 2445 150 MHz or more
Video signal generator TSG-130A (OP.03)
Component Tektronix WFM300/300A/1760/1765
Waveform monitor
Composite Tektronix 1480/1750/1780 Equipped with SCH meter
Picture monitor
Audio level meter HP3400A/MeguroMN-446
Frequency counter Advantest TR5821
8-3. REFERENCE TAPE FOR ALIGNMENT (for NTSC)
XH5-1A (8-967-999-21)
Recording contents are followings.
TIME CODE REC
VIDEO AUDIO
(h) (m) (s) (s)
Black Burst 23 : 59 : 00 60 No Signal
75 % Full Color Bars 00 : 00 60 1 kHz
60 % Multi Burst 01 : 00 60 20 Hz
Bowtie with Mod 12.5T 02 : 00 30 14.5 kHz
02 : 30 30 10 kHz
Shallow Ramp
03 : 00 30 No Signal 32 kHz
Cross Hatch (index) 03 : 30 30 1 kHz 0 dBFS 4 ch
Line 17 04 : 00 40 1 ch
75 % Full Color Bars 04 : 40 40 2 ch
1 kHz
05 : 20 40 3 ch
Quad Phase
06 : 00 40 4 ch
06 : 40 5
Black Burst No Signal
06 : 45 5
60 % Multi Burst (for Composite) 06 : 50 60 1 kHz
Mod 12.5T 07 : 50 30 20 Hz
08 : 20 30 20 kHz
Shallow Ramp (B-Y/R-Y OFF)
08 : 50 30 10 kHz
Cross Hatch (index) 09 : 20 30 1 kHz 0 dBFS
Chroma Noise 09 : 50 30
Line 17 10 : 20 30
60 % Multi Burst 13 : 50 60 2 ch
Mod 12.5T 14 : 50 30
Shallow Ramp 15 : 20 60
1 kHz
75 % Full Color Bars 16 : 20 100
75 % Full Color Bars (R-Y OFF) 18 : 00 180
75 % Full Color Bars (B-Y OFF) 21 : 00 180
Blanking Marker 24 : 00 180
Line 17 (R-Y OFF) 27 : 00 180
Line 17 (B-Y OFF) 30 : 00 180
*
Audio levels are _20 dBFS (Reference), except 1 kHz 0 dBFS part.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 8-3 (N)

8-4. MAINTENANCE MENU (for NTSC)
The servo system and the RF system alignments are performed automatically or semi-automatically using the maintenance
menus SERVO ADJUST and ELECTRICAL ADJUST.
Refer to sections “4-5. SERVO ADJUST” and “4-6. ELECTRICAL ADJUST” for more details.
How to start up the maintenance menu

Move the cursor shown with white background to any of the items displayed on monitor.
Thus an item with white background can be selected.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
8-4 (N)
SECTION 8
ELECTRICAL ALIGNMENT OVERVIEW (for PAL)
8-1. ADJUSTMENT PARTS (for PAL)
DSR-80P RV308 S-Y LEVEL ........................................... 10-7 (P)

DV-15A RV309 R-Y DL ................................................ 10-14 (P)
RV310 B-Y DL ................................................ 10-14 (P)
RV201 SPCK ERR ............................................ 10-1 (P) RV311 VIDEO 1 LEVEL .................................. 10-8 (P)
RV312 B BAL ................................................. 10-21 (P)
RV313 R BAL ................................................. 10-23 (P)
DSR-60P RV314 B LEVEL ............................................. 10-21 (P)
DV-17A RV315 R LEVEL ............................................. 10-23 (P)
RV316 R DC .................................................... 10-24 (P)
RV401 CH1 Output Level ................................. 10-2 (P) RV317 B DC .................................................... 10-22 (P)
RV501 CH2 Output Level ................................. 10-2 (P) RV318 S-C LEVEL ......................................... 10-12 (P)
RV601 CH3 Output Level ................................. 10-2 (P) RV319 VIDEO 2 LEVEL .................................. 10-8 (P)
RV701 CH4 Output Level ................................. 10-2 (P) RV501 SYNC PHASE ..................................... 10-18 (P)
RV502 UV OFFSET ........................................ 10-10 (P)
RV503 HUE ..................................................... 10-10 (P)
DSR-80P RV504 INT SC ................................................. 10-15 (P)
DA-119 RV505 REF. SYNC LEVEL ........................... 10-18 (P)
RV506 REF. BST LEVEL ............................... 10-18 (P)
RV601 CH1 Output Level ................................. 10-2 (P) RV601 1ST FLD .............................................. 10-16 (P)
RV701 CH2 Output Level ................................. 10-2 (P)
RV801 CH3 Output Level ................................. 10-2 (P)
RV901 CH4 Output Level ................................. 10-2 (P) DSR-80P
CT1001 SC ERR ............................................... 10-25 (P)
RV701 B/B-Y LEVEL ..................................... 10-32 (P)
DSR-60P/80P RV702 R/R-Y LEVEL ..................................... 10-32 (P)
IO-149C/149A RV703 G/Y LEVEL ......................................... 10-32 (P)
RV704 AD CPST LEVEL ............................... 10-29 (P)
CT601 HCK ....................................................... 10-5 (P) RV901 DEC Y LEVEL .................................... 10-30 (P)
CT602 INT SC ................................................... 10-5 (P) RV902 DEC C/C LEVEL ................................ 10-31 (P)
RV102 Y/C DL ................................................ 10-13 (P) RV903 DEC C LEVEL .................................... 10-31 (P)
RV103 C/C DL ................................................ 10-12 (P) RV904 AD Y LEVEL ...................................... 10-27 (P)
RV105 C LEVEL ............................................... 10-6 (P) RV905 CPST B-Y DL ..................................... 10-33 (P)
RV106 V LEVEL ............................................... 10-6 (P) RV906 S B-Y DL ............................................. 10-35 (P)
RV107 C/C LEVEL ........................................... 10-7 (P) RV907 CPNT B-Y DY .................................... 10-34 (P)
RV108 ENC B-Y BAL ...................................... 10-9 (P) RV908 RGB B-Y DY ...................................... 10-36 (P)
RV109 ENC R-Y BAL ...................................... 10-9 (P) RV909 CPST R-Y DL ..................................... 10-33 (P)
RV110 ENC R-Y LEVEL ................................ 10-11 (P) RV910 S R-Y DL ............................................. 10-35 (P)
RV111 ENC B-Y LEVEL ................................ 10-11 (P) RV911 CPNT R-Y DL ..................................... 10-34 (P)
RV112 BURST LEVEL ................................... 10-11 (P) RV912 RGB R-Y DL ....................................... 10-36 (P)
RV301 S/CAV SYNC ........................................ 10-6 (P) RV913 AD B-Y LEVEL .................................. 10-28 (P)
RV302 G BAL ................................................. 10-19 (P) RV914 AD R-Y LEVEL .................................. 10-28 (P)
RV303 G LEVEL ............................................. 10-19 (P) RV915 Y CLP LEVEL .................................... 10-26 (P)
RV304 V SYNC ...................................... 10-8, 10-19 (P) RV1001 BST DL ............................................... 10-25 (P)
RV305 Y BAL ................................................. 10-19 (P) RV1002 4W REC PHASE ................................. 10-38 (P)
RV306 G DC .................................................... 10-20 (P) RV1004 SCH ..................................................... 10-37 (P)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 8-1 (P)

DSR-60P/80P
SY-241B/241
CV101 CHARA SIZE ........................................ 10-1 (P)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
8-2 (P)
8-2. MEASURING EQUIPMENT FOR ADJUSTMENT (for PAL)
Type of measuring equipment Equivalent Remarks

Oscilloscope Tektronix 2445 150 MHz or more
Video signal generator TSG-131A (OP.03)
Component Tektronix WFM300/300A/1761/1765
Waveform monitor
Composite Tektronix 1480/1751/1781 Equipped with SCH meter
Picture monitor
Audio level meter HP3400A/MeguroMN-446
Frequency counter Advantest TR5821
8-3. REFERENCE TAPE FOR ALIGNMENT (for PAL)
XH5-1AP (8-967-999-25)
Recording contents are followings.
TIME CODE REC
VIDEO AUDIO
(h) (m) (s) (s)
Black Burst 23 : 59 : 00 60 No Signal
60 % Multi Burst 01 : 00 60 20 Hz
Bowtie with Mod 10T 02 : 00 30 14.5 kHz
02 : 30 30 10 kHz
Shallow Ramp
03 : 00 30 No Signal 32 kHz
Cross Hatch (index) 03 : 30 30 1 kHz 0 dBFS 4 ch
Line 17 04 : 00 40 1 ch
100 % Full Color Bars 04 : 40 40 2 ch
1 kHz
05 : 20 40 3 ch
Quad Phase
06 : 00 40 4 ch
06 : 40 5
Black Burst No Signal
06 : 45 5
60 % Multi Burst (for Composite) 06 : 50 60 1 kHz
Mod 10T 07 : 50 30 20 Hz
08 : 20 30 20 kHz
Shallow Ramp (B-Y/R-Y OFF)
08 : 50 30 10 kHz
Cross Hatch (index) 09 : 20 30 1 kHz 0 dBFS
Chroma Noise 09 : 50 30
Line 17 10 : 20 30
60 % Multi Burst 13 : 50 60 2 ch
Mod 10T 14 : 50 30
Shallow Ramp 15 : 20 60
1 kHz
100 % Full Color Bars 16 : 20 100
100 % Full Color Bars (R-Y OFF) 18 : 00 180
100 % Full Color Bars (B-Y OFF) 21 : 00 180
Blanking Marker 24 : 00 180
Line 17 (R-Y OFF) 27 : 00 180
Line 17 (B-Y OFF) 30 : 00 180
*
Audio levels are _18 dBFS (Reference), except 1 kHz 0 dBFS part.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 8-3 (P)

8-4. MAINTENANCE MENU (for PAL)
The servo system and the RF system alignments are performed automatically or semi-automatically using the maintenance
menus SERVO ADJUST and ELECTRICAL ADJUST.
Refer to sections “4-5. SERVO ADJUST” and “4-6. ELECTRICAL ADJUST” for more details.
How to start up the maintenance menu

Move the cursor shown with white background to any of the items displayed on monitor.
Thus an item with white background can be selected.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
8-4 (P)
SECTION 10
ELECTRICAL ALIGNMENT (for NTSC)
10-1. SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT (for NTSC)
10-1-1. Character Position Adjustment
Conditions for adjustment Adjustment . Specification
. SETUP MENU CHARA. DISPLAY:ON VIDEO 2 (SUPER) OUT (75 Z terminated)

. PB mode
75 % Color bar/XH5-1A 1CV101/SY-241 (B-3)
TCR 00 : 02. 40 : 25
STOP
. After completing adjustment, press the [MENU] key to Spec. Adjust the character position with a good balance with
return to the original menu display. respect to color bars.
10-1-2. SPCK Error Adjustment
(Connection) DSR-80
75% CB
TSG VIDEO IN
130A
BB REF VIDEO IN
DSR-80
. EE mode TP201/DV-15 (P-1)

. VIDEO IN ; 75 % Color bar
1RV201/DV-15 (N-1)
Oscilloscope
Connection 2 Spec. A=1.5 ± 0.1 Vdc
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-1 (N)

10-2. SERVO ADJUSTMENT (for NTSC)
Perform the servo system adjustment referring to section “4-5. SERVO ADJUST”.
10-3. AUDIO ADJUSTMENT (for NTSC)
10-3-1. Output Level Adjustment
. MENU AUDIO OUT CH1 to 4 (600 Z loaded)

ENHANCED
↓ CH11RV401/DV-17 (N-2)
Select AU REF LEVEL ; _20 dB CH21RV501/DV-17 (N-2)
DSR-60
CH31RV601/DV-17 (P-2)
. PB mode CH41RV701/DV-17 (P-2)
1 kHz Ref. level (32 kHz, 4CH)/
XH5-1A (03:30-04:00) CH11RV601/DA-119 (M-3)
CH21RV701/DA-119 (N-3)
DSR-80
CH31RV801/DA-119 (P-3)
CH41RV901/DA-119 (P-3)
Spec. +4.0 ± 0.5 dBu
10-4. RF ADJUSTMENT (for NTSC)
The RF adjustment is performed in the section “4-6. ELECTRICAL ADJUST”.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-2 (N)
10-5. VIDEO ALIGNMENT (for NTSC)
Equipment
. Oscilloscope (TEKTRONIX 2445 or equivalent)
. Signal Generator (TEKTRONIX TSG-131A op. 03 or equivalent)
. Waveform Monitor/Vectorscope
Component (TEKTRONIX WFM300/300A/1780/1765 op. SC or equivalent)
Composite (TEKTRONIX WFM1750/1780/1765 op. SC or equivalent)
. Frequency Counter
. Picture Monitor
. Extention Board (DJ-259, DJ-260)
. Alignment Tape XH5-1A (Part No. 8-967-999-21)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-3 (N)

[Switch Setting]
This setting should be fixed in position unless otherwise specified.

LOCAL/REMOTE ; LOCAL
CHARACTER ; ON
COMPONENT (IN), OUT/Rear panel ; Y-R, B
(VIDEO IN/Front panel ; COMPONENT)
*
( ) .......DSR-80
[Connection]
Connect some equipment as following unless otherwise specified.
(Connection 1) SG : TSG130A / Waveform Monitor : WFM-300 / Oscilloscope / Picture Monitor

(DSR-80)
CH1
CH2
CH3
(Connection 2) SG : TSG130A / Waveform Monitor . Vector : 1750 / Oscilloscope / Picture Monitor
DSR-80/60
PICTURE
OSCILLOSCOPE TP VIDEO OUT 2 MONITOR
VIDEO IN
S VIDEO IN
(DSR-80)
SIGNAL GEN. REF. VIDEO IN (VIDEO OUT 2)

(TSG-130A) BB (75Z : OFF) REF VIDEO OUT
A
S VIDEO OUT
VIDEO OUT 1 1750
EXT REF
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-4 (N)
10-5-1. Recorder/Player Adjustment
10-5-1-1. INT SC Frequency Adjustment
(Connection)
. STOP mode TP601/IO-149 (B-2)

. REF. VIDEO IN ; No signal 1CT602/IO-149 (A-3)
Frequency counter
Spec. f=3,579,545 ± 10 Hz
10-5-1-2. HCK Adjustment
. STOP mode TP602/IO-149 (A-4)

1CT601/IO-149 (A-3)
Oscilloscope
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-5 (N)

10-5-1-3. COMPONENT Y OUT Level Adjustment
. PB mode COMPONENT Y OUT (75 Z terminated)

75 % Color bar/XH5-1A
(A) V LEVEL (B) S/CAV SYNC
1RV106/IO-149 (E-4) 1RV301/IO-149 (F-2)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
Spec. A=0.714 ± 0.007 V (100 ± 1 IRE)

Connection 1 B=0.286 ± 0.003 V (40 ± 0.5 IRE)
10-5-1-4. COMPONENT B-Y OUT Level Adjustment
. PB mode COMPONENT B-Y OUT (75 Z terminated)

75 % Color bar/XH5-1A 1RV105/IO-149 (E-4)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
Connection 1 Spec. A=0.700 ±0.007 V (98 ±1 IRE)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-6 (N)
10-5-1-5. COMPONENT R-Y OUT Level Adjustment
. PB mode COMPONENT R-Y OUT (75 Z terminated)

75 % Color bar/XH5-1A 1RV107/IO-149 (F-4)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
Connection 1 Spec. A=0.700 ± 0.007 V (98 ± 1 IRE)
10-5-1-6. Setup off Chroma Level Adjustment
. SETUP MENU/VIDEO CONTROL/SETUP ADD; COMPONENT R-Y OUT (75 Z terminated)

Set to OFF. 1RV104/IO-149 (E-4)
. PB mode TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
. After adjustment, SETUP ADD ; ON
Connection 1 Spec. A=0.757 ±0.007 V (106 ± 1 IRE)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-7 (N)

10-5-1-7. S-VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment
. PB mode S-VIDEO (Y) OUT (75 Z terminated)

75 % Color bar/XH5-1A 1RV308/IO-149 (G-5)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
10-5-1-8. VIDEO OUT 1 Y/SYNC Level Adjustment
. PB mode VIDEO OUT 1 (75 Z terminated)

(A) VIDEO 1 LEVEL (B) VIDEO SYNC LEVEL
1RV311/IO-149 (G-1) 1RV304/IO-149 (F-3)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
Spec. A=0.714 ± 0.007 V (100 ±1 IRE)

Connection 2 B=0.286 ± 0.003 V (40 ± 0.5 IRE)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-8 (N)
10-5-1-9. VIDEO OUT 2 Y Level Adjustment

75 % Color bar/XH5-1A 1RV319/IO-149 (J-4)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-9 (N)

10-5-1-10. ENC SC Leak Adjustment
Step 1 VIDEO OUT 1 (75 Z terminated)

. PB mode (A) ENC B-Y BAL (B) ENC R-Y BAL
75 % Color bar/XH5-1A 1RV108/IO-149 (E-3) 1RV109/IO-149 (D-3)
. Waveform/Vector (1750) ; WFM mode TRIG : REF. VIDEO
. Set the time axis of the WFM to magnification mode
WFM or Oscilloscope
(Spec. Adjust alternately.)
Connection 2 < 0.007 V (1 IRE)

Spec. Minimize the A, B. A, B<
. Waveform/Vector (1750) ; Vector mode Vector mode
Connection 2 Spec. Maximum the gain of the Vector and check the dot is at center.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-10 (N)
10-5-1-11. U-V Axis Phase (B-Y, R-Y Phase) Adjustment
[Procedure] VIDEO OUT 1 (75 Z terminated)

(A) Burst preset (A) Burst preset (C) V-axis preset (U/V OFFSET)
. PB mode 1PHASE control/Vector 1RV502/IO-149 (C-3)
75 % Color bar/XH5-1A (16:20-18:00) (B) U-axis preset (HUE)
1RV503/IO-149 (C-4)
(B) U-axis phase adjustment TRIG : REF. VIDEO
. PB mode
75 % Color bar (R-Y off) /XH5-1A (18:00-21:00) Vector mode
(C) V-axis phase adjustment (Before adjustment)

. PB mode
75 % Color bar (B-Y off) /XH5-1A (21:00-24:00)
Burst
Spec. (A) Set the dot of the burst in the right position on the scale.
(B) Set the dots of the B-Y on the U axis of the vector.
(C) Set the dots of the R-Y on the V axis of the vector.
Connection 2 B, C=0 ±0.5 d
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-11 (N)

10-5-1-12. PB VIDEO OUT 1 C Level Adjustment

75 % Color bar/XH5-1A Step 1 C level
(A) Burst (B) ENC R-Y

1PHASE control/Vector 1RV110/IO-149 (E-2)
ENC B-Y LEVEL
1RV111/IO-149 (D-2)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Vector
(B) All dots should be inside the “44” mark on the vector by
adjustment RV110 and RV111 alternately.
Step 2 Burst level
1RV-112/IO-149 (D-1)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
Connection 2 Spec. A=0.286 ± 0.003 V (40 ± 0.5 IRE)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-12 (N)
10-5-1-13. PB S-VIDEO C Level Adjustment
. PB mode S-VIDEO (C) OUT (75 Z terminated)

75 % Color bar/XH5-1A 1RV318/IO-149 (J-4)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
Connection 2 Spec. A=0.627 ± 0.007 V (87.7 ±1 IRE)
10-5-1-14. PB Composite C/C Delay Adjustment
. PB mode CH-1/Oscilloscope CH-2/Oscilloscope

Bowtie/XH5-1A (02:00-02:30) TP101/IO-149 (E-5) TP102/IO-149 (D-3)
1RV103/IO-149 (E-5)
Vertical mode : INV +ADD
Minimize
Connection 2
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-13 (N)

10-5-1-15. PB Composite Y/C Delay Adjustment

Mod 12.5T/XH5-1A (07:50-08:20)
1RV102/IO-149 (E-5)
TRIG : INT/WFM
WFM
Connection 2
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-14 (N)
10-5-1-16. PB Component Y/C Delay Adjustment
[Connection for reference] Using for an oscilloscope
. PB mode COMPONENT OUT (75 Z terminated)

Bowtie/XH5-1A (02:00-02:30)
. WFM300 ; Bowtie mode (A) B-Y DELAY (B) R-Y DELAY
1RV310/IO-149 (F-3) 1RV309/IO-149 (F-4)
TRIG : EXT/WFM
Bowtie mode
Spec. Set the each Bowtie dip point of (A) and (B) on the center marker.
Connection 1 0 ±20 ns
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-15 (N)

10-5-1-17. PB INT SCH Phase Adjustment

. REF. VIDEO IN ; No signal (A) Burst Adjustment (B) INT SC
. Waveform/Vector (1750) ; SCH mode 1PHASE control/Vector 1RV504/IO-149 (C-3)
TRIG : INT/WFM
SCH mode
. After adjustment, connect REF. VIDEO IN.

(B) The SYNC should be in the same phase as the burst
Connection 2 (SCH=0 d).
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-16 (N)
10-5-1-18. REF. CF Phase Adjustment
(Connection)
. STOP mode CH-1/Oscilloscope CH-2/Oscilloscope

TP604/IO-149 (A-2) FRAME PULSE/TSG-130A
1RV601/IO-149 (A-1)
TRIG : FRAME PULSE (CH-2)
Oscilloscope
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-17 (N)

Spec. (1) Turn RV601 counterclockwise fully.
(2) When RV601 is turned clockwise gradually, the phase
condition between CH-1 and CH-2 changes from NG to OK or
OK to NG.
(3) In case of the pattern of change is started from NG as shown
in the following illustration, set RV601 to mechanical center
of range of first OK.
NG → OK → NG → OK



↑
the mechanical center
of this range
(4) In case of the pattern of change is started from OK as shown

OK → NG → OK → NG



↑
of this range
*
If the range of first OK is extremely narrow, set to mechanical
center of range of second OK.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-18 (N)
10-5-1-19. REF. Internal SCH Adjustment
. PB mode REF. VIDEO OUT (75 Z terminated)

. REF. VIDEO IN ; No signal (A) Burst Adjustment (B) SYNC PHASE
. Vector (1750) ; SCH mode 1PHASE control/Vector 1RV501/IO-149 (B-4)
TRIG : INT/WFM
SCH mode
. After adjustment is completed, re-connect the REF.

VIDEO IN. Spec. (A) Set the dot of the burst in the right position on the scale.
(B) The SYNC should be in the same phase as the burst.
Connection 2 (SCH=0 ± 3 d )
10-5-1-20. REF. VIDEO OUT SYNC/Burst Level Adjustment

(A) SYNC LEVEL (B) BURST LEVEL
1RV505/IO-149 (B-4) 1RV506/IO-149 (A-4)
TRIG : INT/WFM
WFM or Oscilloscope
Connection 2 Spec. A, B=0.286 ± 0.003 V (40 ±0.5 IRE)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-19 (N)

10-5-1-21. PB G Balance/Level Adjustment
. PB mode RGB G OUT (75 Z terminated)

. COMPONENT OUT switch/Rear panel ; RGB (A) Y BALANCE G BALANCE
1RV305/IO-149 (F-5) 1RV302/IO-149 (F-5)
(B) G LEVEL (C) G SYNC
1RV303/IO-149 (F-4) 1RV304/IO-149 (G-2)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
Spec. A=0 ± 0.01 V (0 ± 1.5 IRE)

B=0.700 ± 0.014 V (98 ± 2 IRE)
Connection 1 C=0.300 ± 0.006 V (42 ± 1 IRE)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-20 (N)
10-5-1-22. PB G DC Adjustment

. COMPONENT OUT switch/Rear panel ; RGB 1RV306/IO-149 (G-5)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
Before adjustment
Connection 1 Spec. A=0 ± 0.01 V (0 ± 1.5 IRE)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-21 (N)

10-5-1-23. PB B Balance/Level Adjustment
. PB mode RGB B OUT (75 Z terminated)

. COMPONENT OUT switch/Rear panel ; RGB (A) B BALANCE B LEVEL
1RV312/IO-149 (F-3) 1RV314/IO-149 (G-3)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
Spec. A=0 ± 0.01 V (0 ± 1.5 IRE)

Connection 1 B=0.700 ± 0.014 V (98 ± 2 IRE)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-22 (N)
10-5-1-24. PB B DC Adjustment

TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-23 (N)

10-5-1-25. PB R Balance/Level Adjustment
. PB mode RGB R OUT (75 Z terminated)

. COMPONENT OUT switch/Rear panel ; RGB (A) R BALANCE (B) R LEVEL
1RV313/IO-149 (F-3) 1RV315/IO-149 (G-4)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
Spec. A=0 ± 0.01 V (0 ± 1.5 IRE)

Connection 1 B=0.700 ± 0.014 V (98 ± 2 IRE)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-24 (N)
10-5-1-26. PB R DC Adjustment

TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-25 (N)

DSR-80
10-5-2. Recorder Adjustment (for NTSC)
10-5-2-1. Composite 4Fsc Lock Loop DC Adjustment
. EE mode TP1002/IO-149 (K-4)

. VIDEO INPUT ; Composite 75 % Color bar
. VIDEO IN switch/Front panel ; COMPOSITE 1CT1001/IO-149 (J-4)
Oscilloscope
Spec. A=2.5 ± 0.05 Vdc

TP1001/IO-149 (J-3)
1RV1001/IO-149 (K-4)
Oscilloscope
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-26 (N)
DSR-80
10-5-2-2. REC Y Clamp Level Adjustment
. EE mode COMPONENT Y OUT (75 Z terminated)

. COMPONENT IN ; 75 % Color bar
1RV915/IO-149 (M-4)
Oscilloscope
Connection 1 Spec. A=Overlap the Setup portion
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-27 (N)

DSR-80
10-5-2-3. REC Y Level Adjustment

1RV904/IO-149 (N-4)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-28 (N)
DSR-80
10-5-2-4. REC Component R-Y Level Adjustment
. EE mode COMPONENT R-Y OUT (75 Z terminated)

1RV914/IO-149 (M-4)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
10-5-2-5. REC Component B-Y Level Adjustment
. EE mode COMPONENT B-Y OUT (75 Z terminated)

1RV913/IO-149 (L-4)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-29 (N)

DSR-80
10-5-2-6. REC A/D Y Level Adjustment
(Connection) DSR-80
WFM or Oscilloscope
75% CB
TSG VIDEO IN
COMPONENT
130A
Y OUT
BB REF VIDEO IN

. VIDEO IN switch/Front panel ; COMPOSITE 1RV704/IO-149 (N-2)
. S901/IO-149 (L-3) ; ON TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
. After Adjustment, S901 ; OFF Spec. A=0 ± 0.007 V (0 ±1 IRE)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-30 (N)
DSR-80
10-5-2-7. REC Composite Y Level Adjustment
. EE mode VIDEO OUT1 (75 Z terminated)

TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
Connection 2 Spec. A=0.714 ± 0.007 V (100 ±1 IRE)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-31 (N)

DSR-80
10-5-2-8. REC Composite C Level Adjustment

. VIDEO IN switch/Front panel ; COMPOSITE (A) Burst (B) CST-C LEVEL
1PHASE control/Vector 1RV903/IO-149 (M-2)
1RV902/IO-149 (M-2)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Vector
Connection 2 (B) All dots should be inside the “4 4” mark on the vector.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-32 (N)
DSR-80
10-5-2-9. REC RGB Level Adjustment
. EE mode RGB G/B/R OUT (75 Z terminated)

. RGB IN ; 75 % Color bar
. COMPONENT IN, OUT switch/Rear panel ; RGB G : 1RV703/IO-149 (P-4)
B : 1RV701/IO-149 (N-4)
R : 1RV702/IO-149 (P-5)
G/B/R=0.525 ± 0.01 V (73.5 ± 1.5 IRE)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-33 (N)

DSR-80
10-5-2-10. REC Composite Y/C Delay Adjustment
. EE mode VIDEO OUT 1 (75 Z terminated)

. VIDEO IN ; Pulse & Bar
. VIDEO IN switch/Front panel ; COMPOSITE B-Y : 1RV905/IO-149 (L-4)
R-Y : 1RV909/IO-149 (L-4)
TRIG : EXT/WFM
WFM
Before adjustment
Connection 2
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-34 (N)
DSR-80
10-5-2-11. REC Component Y/C Delay Adjustment
. EE mode COMPONENT OUT (75 Z terminated)

. COMPONENT IN ; 50 % Bowtie
1RV907/IO-149 (L-4) 1RV911/IO-149 (M-4)
TRIG : EXT/WFM
Bowtie mode
Connection 1 0 ±20 ns
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-35 (N)

DSR-80
10-5-2-12. REC S-VIDEO Y/C Delay Adjustment
(Connection)
. EE mode S-VIDEO OUT 1 (75 Z terminated)

. S-VIDEO IN ; Pulse & Bar
. VIDEO IN switch/Front panel ; S-VIDEO B-Y : 1RV906/IO-149 (K-4)
R-Y : 1RV910/IO-149 (M-4)
TRIG : INT/WFM
WFM
Before adjustment
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-36 (N)
DSR-80
10-5-2-13. REC RGB Delay Adjustment
. EE mode RGB OUT (75 Z terminated)

. RGB IN ; 75 % Cololr bar
. COMPONENT IN, OUT switch/Rear panel ; RGB B-Y : 1RV908/IO-149 (K-4)
. Using [Tektronix 1765] R-Y : 1RV912/IO-149 (L-4)
Lightning mode
Connection 1 Spec. G/B and G/R both, 0 ±20 ns
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-37 (N)

DSR-80
10-5-2-14. Composite SCH Detect Adjustment
(Connection)
. EE mode Step 1 Adjust

. VIDEO IN ; 75 % Color bar (SCH=0 d) CH-1 : TP1005/IO-149 (H-2)
. VIDEO IN siwtch/Front panel ; COMPOSITE CH-2 : TP1007/IO-149 (H-3)
1RV1004/IO-149 (H-3)
TRIG : CH-1
Oscilloscope
Spec. B=A ± 0.05 Vdc

Step 2 Check
CH-1 : TP305/VRA-7 (K-4)
CH-2 : FRAME PULSE/TSG-130A
TRIG : CH-1
Check Coincide CH-2 pulse and CH-1 rising edge.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-38 (N)
DSR-80
10-5-2-15. RGB OUT G Phase Adjustment

. RGB IN ; 75 % Color bar Step 1
*
TSG-130A setting Color bar, white portion
Step 1 ; G ON Sync → ON
Step 2 ; G ON Sync → OFF
Step 2
1RV1002/IO-149 (J-1)
Connection 1 Spec. A=0 ±10 ns
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-39 (N)

SECTION 10
ELECTRICAL ALIGNMENT (for PAL)
10-1. SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT (for PAL)
10-1-1. Character Position Adjustment
. SETUP MENU CHARA. DISPLAY:ON VIDEO 2 (SUPER) OUTPUT (75 Z terminated)

. PB mode
100 % Color bar/XH5-1AP 1CV101/SY-241 (B-3)
TCR 00 : 02. 40 : 25
STOP
. After completing adjustment, press the [MENU] key to Spec. Adjust the character position with a good balance with
return to the original menu display. respect to color bars.
10-1-2. SPCK Error Adjustment
(Connection) DSR-80P
100% CB
TSG VIDEO IN
131A
BB REF VIDEO IN
DSR-80P
. EE mode TP201/DV-15 (P-1)

1RV201/DV-15 (N-1)
Oscilloscope
Spec. A=1.5 ± 0.1 Vdc
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-1 (P)

10-2. SERVO ADJUSTMENT (for PAL)
Perform the servo system adjustment referring to section “4-5. SERVO ADJUST”.
10-3. AUDIO ADJUSTMENT (for PAL)
10-3-1. Output Level Adjustment
. MENU AUDIO OUT CH1 to 4 (600 Z loaded)

ENHANCED
↓ CH11RV401/DV-17 (N-2)
Select AU REF LEVEL ; _18 dB CH21RV501/DV-17 (N-2)
DSR-60P
CH31RV601/DV-17 (P-2)
. PB mode CH41RV701/DV-17 (P-2)
1 kHz Ref. level (32 kHz, 4CH)/
XH5-1AP (03:30-04:00) CH11RV601/DA-119 (M-3)
CH21RV701/DA-119 (N-3)
DSR-80P
CH31RV801/DA-119 (P-3)
CH41RV901/DA-119 (P-3)
Spec. +4.0 ± 0.5 dBu
10-4. RF ADJUSTMENT (for PAL)
The RF adjustment is performed in the section “4-6. ELECTRICAL ADJUST”.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-2 (P)
10-5. VIDEO ALIGNMENT (for PAL)
Equipment
. Oscilloscope (TEKTRONIX 2445 or equivalent)
. Signal Generator (TEKTRONIX TSG-131A op. 03 or equivalent)
. Waveform Monitor/Vectorscope
Component (TEKTRONIX WFM300/300A/1781/1765 op. SC or equivalent)
Composite (TEKTRONIX WFM1751/1781/1765 op. SC or equivalent)
. Frequency Counter
. Picture Monitor
. Extention Board (DJ-259, DJ-260)
. Alignment Tape XH5-1AP (Part No. 8-967-999-25)
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-3 (P)

[Switch/Setup Menu Setting]
This setting should be fixed in position unless otherwise specified.

LOCAL/REMOTE ; LOCAL
CHARACTER ; ON
COMPONENT (IN), OUT/Rear panel ; Y-R, B
(VIDEO IN/Front panel ; COMPONENT)
*
( ) .......DSR-80P
[Connection]
Connect some equipment as following unless otherwise specified.
(Connection 1) SG : TSG131A / Waveform Monitor : WFM-300 / Oscilloscope / Picture Monitor
(Connection 2) SG : TSG131A / Waveform Monitor . Vector : 1751 / Oscilloscope / Picture Monitor
DSR-80P/60P
PICTURE
OSCILLOSCOPE TP VIDEO OUT 2 MONITOR
VIDEO IN
S VIDEO IN
(DSR-80P)
SIGNAL GEN. REF. VIDEO IN (VIDEO OUT 2)

(TSG-131A) BB (75Ω : OFF) REF VIDEO OUT
A
S VIDEO OUT
VIDEO OUT 1 1751
EXT REF
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-4 (P)
10-5-1. Recorder/Player Adjustment
10-5-1-1. INT SC Frequency Adjustment
(Connection)
. STOP mode TP601/IO-149 (B-2)

. REF. VIDEO IN ; No signal 1CT602/IO-149 (A-3)
Frequency counter
Spec. f=4,433,618 ± 10 Hz
10-5-1-2. HCK Adjustment
. STOP mode TP602/IO-149 (A-4)

1CT601/IO-149 (A-3)
Oscilloscope
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-5 (P)

10-5-1-3. COMPONENT Y OUT Level Adjustment
. PB mode COMPONENT Y OUT (75 Z terminated)

100 % Color bar/XH5-1AP
(A) V LEVEL (B) S/CAV SYNC
1RV106/IO-149 (E-4) 1RV301/IO-149 (F-2)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
Spec. A=0.700 ±0.007 V

Connection 1 B=0.300 ±0.003 V
10-5-1-4. COMPONENT B-Y OUT Level Adjustment
. PB mode COMPONENT B-Y OUT (75 Z terminated)

100 % Color bar/XH5-1AP 1RV105/IO-149 (E-4)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
Connection 1 Spec. A=0.700 ±0.007 V
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-6 (P)
10-5-1-5. COMPONENT R-Y OUT Level Adjustment
. PB mode COMPONENT R-Y OUT (75 Z terminated)

100 % Color bar/XH5-1AP 1RV107/IO-149 (E-4)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
Connection 1 Spec. A=0.700 ± 0.007 V
10-5-1-6. S-VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment
. PB mode S-VIDEO (Y) OUT (75 Z terminated)

100 % Color bar/XH5-1AP 1RV308/IO-149 (G-5)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-7 (P)

10-5-1-7. VIDEO OUT 1 Y/SYNC Level Adjustment

(A) VIDEO 1 LEVEL (B) VIDEO SYNC LEVEL
1RV311/IO-149 (G-1) 1RV304/IO-149 (F-2)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
Spec. A=0.700 ± 0.007 V

Connection 2 B=0.300 ± 0.003 V
10-5-1-8. VIDEO OUT 2 Y Level Adjustment

100 % Color bar/XH5-1AP 1RV319/IO-149 (J-4)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-8 (P)
10-5-1-9. ENC SC Leak Adjustment

. PB mode (A) ENC B-Y BAL (B) ENC R-Y BAL
100 % Color bar/XH5-1AP 1RV108/IO-149 (D-3) 1RV109/IO-149 (E-3)
. Waveform/Vector (1751) ; WFM mode TRIG : REF. VIDEO
. Set the time axis of the WFM to magnification mode
WFM or Oscilloscope
(Spec. Adjust alternately.)
Connection 2 <7 mV
Spec. Minimize the A, B. A, B<
. Waveform/Vector (1751) ; Vector mode Vector mode
Connection 2 Spec. Maximum the gain of the Vector and check the dot is at center.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-9 (P)

10-5-1-10. U-V Axis Phase (B-Y, R-Y Phase) Adjustment
[Procedure] VIDEO OUT 1 (75 Z terminated)

(A) Burst preset (A) Burst preset (C) V-axis (UV OFFSET)
. PB mode 1PHASE control/Vector 1RV502/IO-149 (C-3)
100 % Color bar/XH5-1AP (16:20-18:00) (B) U-axis (HUE)
1RV503/IO-149 (C-4)
(B) U-axis phase adjustment TRIG : REF. VIDEO
. PB mode
100 % Color bar (R-Y off) /XH5-1AP (18:00-21:00) Vector mode
(C) V-axis phase adjustment (Before adjustment)

. PB mode
100 % Color bar (B-Y off) /XH5-1AP (21:00-24:00)
Burst
C
(After adjustment)
(B) Set the dots of the B-Y on the U axis of the vector.
(C) Set the dots of the R-Y on the V axis of the vector.
Connection 2 B, C=0 ± 0.5 d
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-10 (P)
10-5-1-11. VIDEO OUT 1 C/Burst Level Adjustment
. PB mode Step 1 C level

100 % Color bar/XH5-1AP VIDEO OUT 1 (75 Z terminated)
(A) Burst preset (B) ENC R-Y LEVEL

1PHASE control/Vector 1RV110/IO-149 (E-2)
ENC B-Y LEVEL
1RV111/IO-149 (D-2)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Vector
(B) All dots should be inside the “44” mark on the vector by
adjustment RV110 and RV111 alternately.
Step 2 Burst level
VIDEO OUT 1 (75 Z terminated)
1RV-112/IO-149 (D-1)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-11 (P)

10-5-1-12. PB S-VIDEO C Level Adjustment
. PB mode S-VIDEO (C) OUT (75 Z terminated)

100 % Color bar/XH5-1AP 1RV318/IO-149 (J-4)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
10-5-1-13. PB Composite C/C Delay Adjustment
. PB mode CH-1/Oscilloscope CH-2/Oscilloscope

Bowtie/XH5-1AP (02:00-02:30) TP101/IO-149 (C-3) TP102/IO-149 (D-3)
1RV103/IO-149 (E-5)
Vertical mode : INV +ADD
Minimize
Connection 1
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-12 (P)
10-5-1-14. PB Composite Y/C Delay Adjustment

Mod 10T/XH5-1AP (07:50-08:20)
1RV102/IO-149 (E-5)
TRIG : INT/WFM
WFM
Connection 2
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-13 (P)

10-5-1-15. PB Component Y/C Delay Adjustment
. PB mode COMPONENT OUT (75 Z terminated)

Bowtie/XH5-1AP (02:00-02:30)
1RV310/IO-149 (F-3) 1RV309/IO-149 (F-4)
TRIG : EXT/WFM
Bowtie mode
Connection 1 0 ± 20 ns
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-14 (P)
10-5-1-16. PB INT SCH Phase Adjustment

. REF. VIDEO IN ; No signal (A) Burst Adjustment (B) INT SC
. Waveform/Vector (1751) ; SCH mode 1PHASE control/Vector 1RV504/IO-149 (C-3)
TRIG : INT/WFM
SCH mode
. After adjustment, connect REF. VIDEO IN.
Connection 2 (B) The SYNC should be in the center of the bursts (SCH=0 d).
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-15 (P)

10-5-1-17. REF. CF Phase Adjustment
(Connection)
. STOP mode CH-1/Oscilloscope CH-2/Oscilloscope

TP604/IO-149 (A-2) FRAME PULSE/TSG-131A
1RV601/IO-149 (A-1)
TRIG : FRAME PULSE (CH-2)
Oscilloscope
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-16 (P)
Spec. (1) Turn RV601 counterclockwise fully.
(2) When RV601 is turned clockwise gradually, the phase
condition between CH-1 and CH-2 changes from NG to OK or
OK to NG.
(3) In case of the pattern of change is started from NG as shown
NG → OK → NG → OK



↑
of this range
(4) In case of the pattern of change is started from OK as shown

OK → NG → OK → NG



↑
of this range
*
If the range of first OK is extremely narrow, set to mechanical
center of range of second OK.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-17 (P)

10-5-1-18. REF. Internal SCH Adjustment

. REF. VIDEO IN ; No signal (A) Burst Adjustment (B) SYNC PHASE
. Vector (1751) ; SCH mode 1PHASE control/Vector 1RV501/IO-149 (B-4)
TRIG : INT/WFM
SCH mode
Burst
SYNC
. After adjustment is completed, re-connect the REF.

VIDEO IN.
(B) The SYNC should be in the center of the bursts.
Connection 2 (SCH=0 ±3 d)
10-5-1-19. REF. VIDEO OUT SYNC/Burst Level Adjustment

(A) SYNC LEVEL (B) BURST LEVEL
1RV505/IO-149 (B-4) 1RV506/IO-149 (A-4)
TRIG : INT/WFM
WFM or Oscilloscope
Connection 2 Spec. A, B=0.300 ± 0.003 V
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-18 (P)
10-5-1-20. PB G Balance/Level Adjustment

. COMPONENT OUT switch/Rear panel ; RGB (A) Y BALANCE G BALANCE
1RV305/IO-149 (F-5) 1RV302/IO-149 (F-5)
(B) G LEVEL (C) G SYNC
1RV303/IO-149 (F-4) 1RV304/IO-149 (F-2)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
Spec. A=0 ± 0.01 V

B=0.700 ± 0.014 V
Connection 1 C=0.300 ± 0.006 V
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-19 (P)

10-5-1-21. PB G DC Adjustment

. COMPONENT OUT switch/Rear panel ; RGB 1RV306/IO-149 (F-5)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
Connection 1 Spec. A=0 ± 0.01 V
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-20 (P)
10-5-1-22. PB B Balance/Level Adjustment

. COMPONENT OUT switch/Rear panel ; RGB (A) B BALANCE B LEVEL
1RV312/IO-149 (F-3) 1RV314/IO-149 (G-3)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
Spec. A=0 ±0.01 V

DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-21 (P)

10-5-1-23. PB B DC Adjustment

TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-22 (P)
10-5-1-24. PB R Balance/Level Adjustment

. COMPONENT OUT switch/Rear panel ; RGB (A) R BALANCE (B) R LEVEL
1RV313/IO-149 (F-3) 1RV315/IO-149 (G-4)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
Spec. A=0 ±0.01 V

DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-23 (P)

10-5-1-25. PB R DC Adjustment

TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-24 (P)
DSR-80P
10-5-2. Recorder Adjustment (for PAL)
10-5-2-1. Composite 4Fsc PLL DC Adjustment
. EE mode TP1002/IO-149 (K-4)

. VIDEO IN switch/Front panel ; COMPOSITE 1CT1001/IO-149 (J-4)
Oscilloscope
Spec. A=2.0 ± 0.1 Vdc

TP1001/IO-149 (J-3)
1RV1001/IO-149 (K-4)
Oscilloscope
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-25 (P)

DSR-80P
10-5-2-2. REC Y Clamp Level Adjustment

1RV915/IO-149 (M-4)
Connection 1 Spec. A=Overlap the Pedestal portion
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-26 (P)
DSR-80P
10-5-2-3. REC Y Level Adjustment

1RV904/IO-149 (N-4)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-27 (P)

DSR-80P
10-5-2-4. REC Component R-Y Level Adjustment
. EE mode COMPONENT R-Y OUT (75 Z terminated)

1RV914/IO-149 (M-4)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
10-5-2-5. REC Component B-Y Level Adjustment
. EE mode COMPONENT B-Y OUT (75 Z terminated)

1RV913/IO-149 (L-4)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-28 (P)
DSR-80P
10-5-2-6. REC A/D Y Level Adjustment
(Connection) DSR-80P
WFM or Oscilloscope
100% CB
TSG VIDEO IN
COMPONENT
131A
Y OUT
BB REF VIDEO IN

. S901/IO-149 (L-3) ; ON 1RV704/IO-149 (N-2)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
. After Adjustment, S901 ; OFF
Connection 1 Spec. A=0 ±0.007 V
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-29 (P)

DSR-80P
10-5-2-7. REC Composite Y Level Adjustment

TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM or Oscilloscope
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-30 (P)
DSR-80P
10-5-2-8. REC Composite C Level Adjustment

. VIDEO IN switch/Front panel ; COMPOSITE (A) Burst (B) CST-C LEVEL
1PHASE control/Vector 1RV903/IO-149 (M-2)
1RV902/IO-149 (M-2)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Vector
Connection 2 (B) All dots should be inside the “44” mark on the vector.
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-31 (P)

DSR-80P
10-5-2-9. REC RGB Level Adjustment
. EE mode RGB G/B/R OUT (75 Z terminated)

. RGB IN ; 100 % Color bar
. COMPONENT IN, OUT switch/Rear panel ; RGB G : 1RV703/IO-149 (P-4)
B : 1RV701/IO-149 (N-4)
R : 1RV702/IO-149 (P-5)
G/B/R=0.70 ±0.01 V
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-32 (P)
DSR-80P
10-5-2-10. REC Composite Y/C Delay Adjustment
. EE mode VIDEO OUT 1 (75 Z terminated)

. VIDEO IN ; Pulse & Bar
. VIDEO IN switch/Front panel ; COMPOSITE B-Y : 1RV905/IO-149 (L-4)
R-Y : 1RV909/IO-149 (L-4)
TRIG : EXT/WFM
WFM
Before adjustment
Connection 2
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-33 (P)

DSR-80P
10-5-2-11. REC Component Y/C Delay Adjustment
. EE mode COMPONENT OUT (75 Z terminated)

. COMPONENT IN ; 50 % Bowtie
1RV907/IO-149 (L-4) 1RV911/IO-149 (M-4)
Note : Perform the CH-1/CH-3 (B) adjust before the TRIG : EXT/WFM
CH-1/CH-2 (A) adjust.
Bowtie mode
Connection 1 0 ± 20 ns
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-34 (P)
DSR-80P
10-5-2-12. REC S-VIDEO Y/C Delay Adjustment
. EE mode S-VIDEO OUT (75 Z terminated)

. S-VIDEO IN ; Pulse & Bar
. VIDEO IN switch/Front panel ; S-VIDEO B-Y : 1RV906/IO-149 (K-4)
R-Y : 1RV910/IO-149 (M-4)
TRIG : INT/WFM
WFM
Before adjustment
Connection 2
DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-35 (P)

DSR-80P
10-5-2-13. REC RGB Delay Adjustment

. RGB IN ; 100 % Cololr bar
. COMPONENT IN, OUT switch/Rear panel ; RGB B-Y : 1RV908/IO-149 (K-4)
. Using [Tektronix 1765] R-Y : 1RV912/IO-149 (L-4)
Lightning mode
Connection 1 Spec. G/B and G/R both, 0 ± 20 ns
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-36 (P)
DSR-80P
10-5-2-14. Composite SCH Detect Circuit Adjustment
(Connection)
. EE mode Step 1 Adjust

. VIDEO IN ; 100 % Color bar (SCH=0 d) CH-1 : TP1005/IO-149 (H-2)
. VIDEO IN siwtch/Front panel ; COMPOSITE CH-2 : TP1007/IO-149 (H-3)
1RV1004/IO-149 (H-3)
TRIG : CH-1
Oscilloscope
Spec. B=A ± 0.05 Vdc

Step 2 Check
CH-1 : TP1008/IO-149 (J-2)
CH-2 : FRAME PULSE/TSG-131A
TRIG : CH-1
Oscilloscope
Check Coincide CH-2 pulse and CH-1 rising edge.

DSR-80/80P/60/60P 10-37 (P)
DSR-80P
10-5-2-15. RGB OUT G Phase Adjustment

. RGB IN ; 100 % Color bar Step 1
*
TSG-131A setting Color bar, white portion
Step 1 ; G ON Sync → ON
Step 2 ; G ON Sync → OFF
Step 2
1RV1002/IO-149 (J-1)
Connection 1 Spec. A=0 ± 10 ns
DSR-80/80P/60/60P
10-38 (P)
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem,

perform the following safety checks before
releasing the set to the customer :
Check the metal trim, “metallized” knobs,

The material contained in this manual consists of screws, and all other exposed metal parts for AC
information that is the property of Sony Corporation and leakage. Check leakage as described below.
is intended solely for use by the purchasers of the
equipment described in this manual. LEAKAGE TEST
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of
any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any The AC leakage from any exposed metal part to
purpose other than the operation or maintenance of the earth ground and from all exposed metal parts to
equipment described in this manual without the express any exposed metal part having a return to
written permission of Sony Corporation. chassis, must not exceed 0.5 mA (500
microampers). Leakage current can be
measured by any one of three methods.
Le matériel contenu dans ce manuel consiste en
informations qui sont la propriété de Sony Corporation et 1. A commercial leakage tester, such as the
sont destinées exclusivement à l’usage des acquéreurs Simpson 229 or RCA WT-540A. Follow the
de l’équipement décrit dans ce manuel. manufacturers’ instructions to use these
Sony Corporation interdit formellement la copie de instruments.
quelque partie que ce soit de ce manuel ou son emploi 2. A battery-operated AC milliammeter. The
pour tout autre but que des opérations ou entretiens de Data Precision 245 digital multimeter is
l’équipement à moins d’une permission écrite de Sony suitable for this job.
Corporation. 3. Measuring the voltage drop across a resistor
by means of a VOM or battery-operated AC
voltmeter. The “limit” indication is 0.75 V, so
Das in dieser Anleitung enthaltene Material besteht aus analog meters must have an accurate low-
informationen, die Eigentum der Sony Corporation sind, voltage scale. The Simpson 250 and Sanwa
und ausschließlich zum Gebrauch durch den Käufer der SH-63Trd are examples of a passive VOM
in dieser Anleitung beschriebenen Ausrüstung bestimmt that is suitable. Nearly all battery operated
sind. digital multimeters that have a 2 V AC range
Die Sony Corporation untersagt ausdrücklich die are suitable. (See Fig. A)
Vervielfältigung jeglicher Teile dieser Anleitung oder den
Gebrauch derselben für irgendeinen anderen Zweck als
die Bedienung oder Wartung der in dieser Anleitung To Exposed Metal
beschriebenen Ausrüstung ohne ausdrückliche Parts on Set
schriftliche Erlaubnis der Sony Corporation.
AC
0.15 µF 1.5 k Ω voltmeter
(0.75V)
Earth Ground
Fig A. Using an AC voltmeter to check AC leakage.
(UC model only)

DSR-80
DSR-80P
Printed in Japan
DSR-60
DSR-60P (UC, CE) Sony Corporation 1998. 7 16
9-977-696-13 Broadcasting & Professional Systems Company ©1997

DSR-60 80

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

DSR-60 80

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DSR-60 80

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DIGITAL VIDEOCASSETTE RECORDER

. Operating Instructions (Supplied with equipment)

. Service Manual Vol.2 (Not supplied with equipment)

SECTION 1 OPERATING INSTRUCTION

SECTION 3 SERVICE OVERVIEW

SECTION 4 MAINTENANCE MENU

SECTION 5 PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

SECTION 6 REPLACEMENT OF MECHANICAL PARTS

SECTION 7 TAPE PATH ALIGNMENT

SECTION 8 ELECTRICAL ALIGNMENT OVERVIEW

SECTION 9 (This section is intentionally left blank.)

SECTION 10 ELECTRICAL ALIGNMENT

The DSR-60/60P manual will be available as a supplement shortly.

2-1. Installation Procedure ..................................................................................... 2-1

3-1. Location of Main Parts ................................................................................... 3-1

3-9-5. Removal of the HP-73 Board ............................................................... 3-34

4-1. How to Operate Maintenance Menu .............................................................. 4-3

5. PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

5-1. Hours Meter .................................................................................................... 5-1

6. REPLACEMENT OF MECHANICAL PARTS

7. TAPE PATH ADJUSTMENT

7-1. General Information for Tape Path Adjustment ............................................. 7-1

8-1. Adjustment Parts (for NTSC) .................................................................. 8-1 (N)

8. ELECTRICAL ALIGNMENT OVERVIEW (for PAL)

8-1. Adjustment Parts (for PAL) ..................................................................... 8-1 (P)

10. ELECTRICAL ALIGNMENT (for NTSC)

10-1. System Adjustment (for NTSC) ............................................................ 10-1 (N)

10. ELECTRICAL ALIGNMENT (for PAL)

10-1.System Adjustment (for PAL) ................................................................ 10-1 (P)

from operation manual.

Owner’s Record For the customers in the USA

Table of Contents Features

Connections and Connections for a Digital Non-Linear Editing

Table of Contents Chapter 1 Overview

A command protocol to remote control Sony

6 Chapter 1 Overview Chapter 1 Overview 7

1 Audio level meter

1 Display section (A) and 2 AUDIO MODE display

2 Display section (B) and

5 AUDIO REC SELECT button

4 Menu control panel

Chapter 1 Overview Chapter 1 Overview

Features and Function of Parts

10 Chapter 1 Overview Chapter 1 Overview 11

Features and Function of Parts

7 Cassette memory indicator 9 EDIT MODE indicator 4 Menu control panel

3 Tape transport control section

1 EJECT button 2 SC PHASE control Press on the

6 0 ) p r SYNC PHASE SC PHASE MENU RESET(NO)

6 REC button MONITOR SELECT

Chapter 1 Overview Chapter 1 Overview

Features and Function of Parts

Rear Panel COMPONENT VIDEO R.G.B.

2 Digital signal input/output RGB RGB

ANALOG I/O QSDI SDI INPUT SDI OUTPUT

through connection, set the 75 Ω termination switch to

Features and Function of Parts

0 S VIDEO OUT connector (4-pin) SDI INPUT SDI OUTPUT